Construction - ARSD College

Transcription

TENDER & CONTRACT DOCUMENT
Retrofitting Existing GF&Ff for Earth Quake, Modifications of Front
Entrance & Compound walls; Construction of New Ramp Physically
Challenged & Emergency Stairs at ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan,
New Delhi
Tender Document No: ARSD/IS/TD/03
Owners:
Principal,
ARSD Colllege,
Dhaula Kuan,
New Delhi – 110 021.
Phone: +91 11 2411 3436
Fax: +91 11 2411 1390
Email: [email protected] & [email protected]
Dt: 16th Sep 2013
Consultants:
IDEAL STRUCTURES,
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS
R. Narendrakumar,
11, Avvaiyar Street, Singarayar Colony,
Madurai – 625 002.
Tele: 0452 – 2528471
Fax: 0452 - 4361471
e-mail: [email protected]
Page 2 of 185
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bid Documents
Sr. No.
Particulars
Sect. No.
Page No.
3
Notice inviting Tender
1.
Instructions to Bidders
1
4-9
2.
General Conditions of Contract
2
10-48
3.
Contract Agreement
3
49-51
4.
Technical Specifications of Work
4
52- 162
5.
Bill of Quantities
5
163 - 173
6.
List of Approved Makes
6
174-176
7.
Performance BG Form
7
177- 179
8.
Mobilization Advance BG Form
8
180 - 182
9.
Bid Proposal Submission Form
9
183 - 184
10.
Appendix A – Tender Drawings
A
ARSD College, Delhi.
Ideal Structures
Page 3 of 185
NOTICE INVITING TENDER
TENDER NOTICE No.
ARSD/DEL/IS/03/2013-14
Dt. 16th Sep 2013
TENDER DOCUMENT No.
ARSD/IS/TD /03
Dt 16th Sep 2013
Sealed and super scribed tenders are invited from technically competent, experienced Civil
Engineering contractors for the following work;
1.
Name of work:
Repair and Retrofitting of RCC Structures at the Existing
Buildings of ARSD College, At Daula Kuan, New Delhi
2.
Owners:
ARSD College, New Delhi
3.
Consultants:
R. Narendrakumar, Ideal Structures, 11, Avvaiyar Street,
Singarayar Colony, Madurai, Tamilnadu
5(Five) Months from 10th day after date of issue of “Letter of
4.
Completion Time:
Acceptance”
5.
Tender Security:
Two Percentage (2%) of Contract Amount, drawn in favour
of “Principal, ARSD College “, payable at New Delhi
6.
Cost of Tender Document:
Rs. 10,000/- ( Rupees Ten thousand) only
7.
Tender Documents
O/o, Section Officer (Admn), ARSD College
8.
Last date time and place for
receipt of Tenders
4.00 pm, 4th Oct 2013 at the office of the Principal, ARSD
College, New Delhi
9.
Date and time of pre bid
meeting
3rd Oct 2013: Venue - office of the Principal, ARSD College,
New Delhi (time will be intimated)
4.30 pm 4th Oct 2013 at the office of the Principal, ARSD
10.
Opening of Tenders
College, New Delhi
Note:
1. The Owners / Consultants shall not be responsible for any delay, loss or non-receipt of Tender
Documents or tenders during transit by courier or mail.
2. The Clients reserves all rights to issue/refuse Tender documents and to accept / reject any or
all tenders either in part or full or to split and award the work to more than one agencies
without assigning any reasons thereof and without any liability to the Clients or Consultants.
Ideal Structures
Page 4 of 185
SECTION – 1 : INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.
Invitation to submit Bid Proposals:
1.1.
Sealed Bid Proposals in the prescribed form are hereby invited by R. Narendrakumar, Ideal
Structures, Civil and Structural Consultants, , having their offices at 11, Avvaiyar Street,
Singarayar Colony, Madurai – 625 002 (hereinafter the “Consultants”), on behalf of The
Principal, ARSD College, New Delhi (“Owner ”), having their college Buildings at Dhaula
Kuan, New Delhi – 110 021, for Retrofitting the existing GF&FF for Earth quake, Modifications
of Front Entrance & Compound wall, Construction of Ramp for Physically Challenged and
Emergency Stairs, at ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi 110 021.
1.2
The Bid Documents shall comprise of:
a.
Instructions to the Bidders
b.
General Conditions of the Contract
c.
Contract Agreement
d.
Specifications of the Work
e.
Bill of Quantities
f.
List of approved makes
h.
Performance Bank Guarantee Form
i.
Bank Guarantee Form towards Mobilization Advance
j.
Bid Proposal Submission Form
Section 01
Section 02
Section 03
Section 04
Section 05
Section 06
Section 07
Section 08
Section 09
1.3.
Bidders are expected to read the Bid Documents carefully and familiarize themselves with the
instructions, terms, conditions, requirements and specifications in the Bid Documents. Failure
to comply with or furnish the requirements specified in the Bid Documents or submission of
incomplete Bid Proposals will render the Bid Proposals to be liable for rejection.
1.4
At any time prior to the due date for submission of the Bid Proposals, the Owner may, on its
own initiative or in response to request received for clarification, modify the Bid Documents
and shall notify such modifications to the Bidders to whom the Bid Documents have been
issued.
2.
Submission of Bid Proposals:
2.1
Sealed Bid Proposals shall be submitted in three envelope system. The outer envelope shall
have two inner envelopes viz., 1. The Technical Bid and 2. The Financial Bid. All the envelopes
shall be sealed with the seal of the Bidder. The name of the Work, namely “Retrofitting
Existing GF&FF for Earth quake; Modifications of Front Entrance & Compound Wall;
Construction of New Ramp for Physically Challenged & Emergency Stairs, at ARSD College,
Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi” and the name of the Bidder shall be subscribed on the envelopes.
The envelopes containing the Bid Proposals, as aforesaid, shall be addressed to The Principal,
ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi, and submitted not later than 4.00 PM on 4th Oct
2013. Bid Proposals received after due date and time will be out-rightly rejected.
2.2.
Bidders are required to submit with their Technical Bid Proposal, List of works executed,
List of equipments, list of their technical personnel, who will be stationed at Site, if the Work
Ideal Structures
Page 5 of 185
is awarded to them and the value of works done during the last three financial years. The
said list shall set out inter alia names, experience and qualifications of such technical
personnel. Receipt for Rs. 10,000/- or DD for the same amount in Favour of the Principal,
ARSD College, Payable at New Delhi towards the fee for tender document shall be attached
with technical bid.
2.3
Bid Proposals must be filled in English and all entries made by hand and written in ink. In
case any supporting document furnished by Bidder is in any other language, the same shall
be accompanied by an English translation thereof. Information in any other language shall
be accompanied by an appropriate translation in English. For the purpose of interpretation
of contract, the document translated in English alone shall be considered.
2.4
Bid Proposals shall be submitted without any corrections or overwriting. In case corrections
are unavoidable, the authorized representative(s) of the Bidder shall authenticate such
corrections by appending his / their full signatures.
2.5.
Bid Proposals, which propose alterations in the Work or completion thereof or Bid Proposals
which are subject to any conditions are, at the discretion of the Owner, liable to be rejected.
2.6
Bid Proposal should be submitted in the prescribed Bid Proposal Form attached to the Bid
Documents, along with other documents specified in the Bid Documents.
2.7
No explanation / request for change or alteration of the information given in the Bid
Proposals or submission of any missing or additional documents, shall be entertained by the
Consultants or the Owner, after submission of the Bid Proposal. No advice of any change in
rate or conditions after the opening of Bid Proposals shall be entertained.
2.8
The Bidders shall bear all costs and expenses associated with preparation and submission of
Bid Proposals. The Owner shall in no case be responsible or liable for any such costs,
regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.
2.9
Bid Proposal shall be signed on behalf of the Bidder by an authorized representative (s) of the
Bidder. The document evidencing authority in favour of the authorized representative(s) to
sign the Bid Proposal shall be attached to the Bid Proposal. In case the Bidder is a company
incorporated under the Companies Act, 1956 or under any earlier Act, the Bidder shall furnish
updated copy of Memorandum and Articles of Association and Certificate of Incorporation of
the Bidder. In case the Bidder is a partnership firm, a certified copy of the current Partnership
Deed together with a copy of the Certificate of Registration issued by the Registrar of Firms,
shall be attached to the Technical Bid Proposal.
2.10
Bidder shall submit Bid Proposals complying in full with the requirements of the
Bid Documents. If any Bidder desires to submit, in addition to the Bid Proposal in
compliance with the Bid Documents, alternatives for any of the items of Work, the
Bidder may state such alternatives separately, provided such alternatives shall
conform fully to the functional requirements and the applicable Specifications.
2.11
Financial Bid will be considered on if the bidders qualify in the Technical Bid.
Ideal Structures
Page 6 of 185
3.
Earnest Money
3.1
Financial Bid Proposal shall be accompanied by earnest money of 2% (Two Percentage) of the
Total Contract Price in the form of a Pay Order/ Demand Draft drawn in favour of “Principal,
ARSD College, New Delhi” payable at New Delhi. Bid Proposals not accompanied by the
requisite earnest money will be rejected. No interest shall be payable on Earnest Money.
Earnest money shall be returned to the unsuccessful bidders, without interest within 10
working days from the final decision, concerning the award of the Works is taken by the
Owner. In case of successful Bidder, the earnest money amount would be retained by the
Owner as part of the security/ retention amount for due execution of the Works by the Bidder.
3.2
The earnest money shall be forfeited to the Owner if the Bidder withdraws its Bid Proposal
after award of the Work or fails to furnish the security in the form of Performance Bank
Guarantee or fails or neglects to execute the Contract or after execution of the Contract, fails to
commence or execute the Work.
4.
Tender Drawings
Refer Appendix A.
5.
Schedule of Works
The Bidders are expected to study the Bid Documents and prepare its detailed schedule of
work to be done with respect to time, equipment and manpower, in conformity with the
Scheduled time frame.
6.
Site Location
The Site is located at Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi 110 021. General information relating to the
Site is available with the Owner/Consultants. Such information shall be indicative in nature
and shall not be binding on the Owner. The Bidders are expected to familiarize themselves
with the Site, the area in which the Site is situated, approach roads thereto, type of soil,
availability of materials and other factors relevant for execution of the Work, prevailing in
the area where the Site is situated and submit their Bid Proposal, after fully familiarizing
themselves with the conditions prevailing in the areas. The Owner shall have no obligation
to entertain any claim concerning the location or condition of soil or on any other factor
whatsoever.
7.
Rates and computations
7.1
Bidders should state the Rates quoted in figures as well as in words. The amount for each
individual item should be worked out and the requisite totals should be given in the
respective Schedules. If on verification, any discrepancy is noticed between the rates quoted
in words and figures or in the amount worked out, the following rule shall be followed:
(a)
Where the amount worked out in respect of an item is not given in the Bid Proposal or
the amount worked out does not correspond with the rates quoted in either in figures
or in words, then the rate quoted by the Bidder in words shall be taken as correct.
Ideal Structures
Page 7 of 185
(b) Where the rate quoted by the Bidder in figures and words tallies but the amount is not
Worked out correctly, the rate quoted by the Bidder shall be taken as correct and the
amount shall be worked out based on such quoted rates.
7.2
Bidders are advised in their own interest to submit arithmetically accurate and complete Bid
Proposals. Bid Proposals containing arithmetical errors, which when corrected produce a
grand total varying by more than +2% from the grand total given in the respective Bid
Proposals, are liable to be rejected.
7.3
The Rates quoted shall be the landed cost at Site and shall be inclusive of all present and future
Taxes including customs, excise, additional duties/tax, Entry Tax, LAD Tax, Octroi, Cess, VAT
imposition of any nature, except Service Tax. The Owner will not entertain any claim
whatsoever in this respect and all rates quoted shall include all taxes and duties. Rates quoted
shall remain firm till the entire Works is executed. The Owner shall not entertain any request
or claim for any revision of any rates on any account whatsoever. Without in any way limiting
the obligations of the Bidder, in the event any such Tax or Taxes are paid or required to be
paid by the Owner for any reason whatsoever, the Bidder shall promptly reimburse to the
Owner the amount paid by the Owner.
8.
Clarifications:
The Bidders may request the Consultants/Owner for a personal meeting, any time before
submission of the Bid, to obtain any additional information/ clarification in relation to the
Bid Documents.
9.
Validity Period of Bid Proposals
Bid Proposal submitted shall remain valid for a minimum period of 90 days from the date of
opening of the Bid Proposals by the Owner and for such extended period, as the Owner may
require from time to time. The Bidders shall quote the prices and rates in Indian Rupees and
the same shall be payable in Indian Rupees.
10.
Bid Opening and Evaluation
10.1
The Owner may open the Bid Proposals at any time after the due date for submission of the
Bid Proposals, convenient to the Owner and the Consultants, in any case not later than seven
days from the date of Bid Closing.
10.2
To assist in evaluation of the Bid Proposals, the Consultants / Owner may ask the Bidders for
clarification of their Bid Proposals. The request for clarification and the response shall be in
writing. However, the Consultants or the Owner will not entertain any unsolicited clarification
from the Bidders after the Bid opening.
11.
Award of Works
Ideal Structures
Page 8 of 185
11.1
The Owner may award the Work in whole to any one Bidder or split the Work and award to
more than one Bidders, as the Owner may consider appropriate, without assigning any
reasons for doing so. Bidders shall have no right to revise the rates quoted or specify any
conditions, if the Bid Proposals submitted by them are accepted in part.
11.2
The Owner may issue a provisional letter of award (the “Provisional Letter of Award”) to
successful Bidder. The issue of Provisional Letter of Award shall constitute only an intention of
the Owner to award the Work but does not create any legally binding obligation on the part of
the Owner to award the Work to the Bidder.
11.3
The successful Bidder shall, within 10 days of issue of the Provisional Letter of Award:
(a) Confirm in writing to the Owner the Bidder’s acceptance to the terms and conditions set
forth in the Provisional Letter of Award; (b) Provide a Bank Guarantee towards
Mobilization Advance to be paid by Owner, in terms of Clause 13 below; and (c) Provide
a Performance Bank Guarantee to the Owner, as stated in Clause12 below.
In case the above is not fulfilled within the stipulated time frame, the Owner reserves the
right to appropriate the Earnest Money and engage another Contractor of its choice.
11.4
At any time after fulfillment of the conditions specified in clause 11.3 above, the Owner may
issue the Letter of Award to the successful Bidder. Simultaneously with the issue of the Letter
of Award, the Bidder shall enter into the Contract Agreement with the Owner, subject to such
changes or amendments therein as may be made or approved by the Owner.
12.
Performance Bank Guarantee
The successful Bidder shall, within Ten (10) days of issue of the Provisional Letter of Award,
submit to the Owner a Performance Guarantee from a nationalized Bank and in the form
specified in Section 09 herein, for a sum of Rs. 10,00,000/- (Rupees Ten Laks) only. The
Performance Guarantee shall be for the minimum duration of the time specified for
execution of the Work and for a further period of three months thereafter.
13.
Mobilization Advance
Within 10 days from the date of issue of Provisional Letter of Award, the successful Bidder is
required to provide a Bank Guarantee from a nationalized Bank in such form as specified in
Section 10 herein and subject to submission of such Bank Guarantee and other conditions
stipulated in Clause 9.1 of Section 2, the Owner will advance to the successful Bidder a sum
equivalent to Ten (10) percent of the value of the Works stated in the Letter of Award, by
way of Mobilization Advance. The Mobilization Advance shall be deducted pro-rata from
each running bill with final amount being recovered at 80% value of the Total Contract Price.
14.
Retention Money
The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from each running bill a sum equivalent to five (5) per
cent of the running bill and retain the said sum with the Owner (the “Retention Amount”).
The Owner shall be entitled to retain the Retention Amount with it, free of interest, until the
successful Bidder has duly performed and fulfilled all its obligations under the Bid
Documents and the Contract Agreement. The Owner shall release 50 (fifty) percent of the
Retention Amount, subject to set off of any sums due to the Owner, on successful completion
of execution of the Work and issue of Completion Certificate by the Consultants. The Owner
Ideal Structures
Page 9 of 185
shall retain the balance 50 (fifty) percent of the Retention Amount until the Bidder has duly
completed and fulfilled all its obligations or until expiration of the Defects Liability Period,
whichever date occurs later.
15.
Confidentiality
The Bidders shall treat the contents of the Bid Documents and the Bid Proposals submitted
by them as confidential and shall not disclose the same without prior written permission
from the Owner. The Bidder to whom the Bid Documents are issued alone shall use the Bid
Documents. Bid Documents are not transferable.
16.
Rejection
The Owner may, at its sole discretion, accept or reject any Bid Proposal, without assigning
any reason thereof or may accept any Bid Proposal, subject to such conditions, as the Owner
may consider appropriate. The Owner reserves the right to annul the bidding process and
reject any and all Bid Proposals, without requiring to assign any reasons thereof and without
thereby incurring any liability to the Bidder or Bidders.
17.
Definitions
The words and expressions used in this Section 1 with capitalized letters or with initial letters
capitalized and not defined in this Section, but defined in Section 2 and shall have, where the
context permits, the meanings assigned to them in Section 2, respectively.
Ideal Structures
Page 10 of 185
SECTION - 2 : GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1.
DEFINITIONS
In construing the Bid Documents and the resulting Contract Agreement, the following words and
expressions shall have the meanings assigned to them respectively herein below, except where the
subject or context otherwise requires:
“Appendix” means the Appendix attached to the General Conditions of Contract. The descriptions
provided in the Appendix are only indicative in nature and the same shall apply, subject to the
conditions/stipulations contained in the relevant clause of the General Conditions of Contract.
"Consultants" means R. Narendrakumar, Ideal Structures, having their Design office at 11, Avvaiyar
Street, Singarayar Colony, Madurai – 625 002, and duly appointed by the Owner for the design,
drawings and for supervision of the execution of the Work or in the event of R. Narendrakumar,
ceasing to be the Consultants for the purpose of this Contract Agreement, such other person as may
be nominated/appointed as such by the Owner;
“Bid Documents' shall mean collectively the Instructions to the Bidders, this General Conditions of
Contract, the Tender Drawings, the Gantt Chart, the Contract Agreement, Specifications of the Work,
the Bill of Quantities, the Rate Schedule, the Bid Proposal Submission Form and the Letter of Award;
“Bid Proposal” shall mean the bid proposal submitted by the Contractor including the Bill of
Quantities, the Rate Schedule and the Schedule of Work, in response to the invitation issued by or on
behalf of the Owner, for bid proposal and shall include any amendments thereto accepted by the
Owner;
“Change Order” means a change in the scope of the required Work or a part of it, approved by the
Owner, which may result in a modification of the scope of the Work or the Schedule or the cost of
any item, forming part of the Work
"Completion Certificate" shall mean certificate to be issued by the Consultants when the Work has
been completed in terms of the Contract Agreement;
“Construction Programme” is defined in Clause 5.3.2;
"Contract Agreement" shall mean the agreement entered into between the Contractor and the Owner
pursuant to this Bid and the Bid Proposal submitted by the Bidder;
“Contract Documents” shall mean collectively the Contract Agreement for the execution of the
Work and shall include the Bid Documents, the Bid Proposal, the Letter of Award, Change Order
issued by the Owner and other documents referred to in, or submitted in terms of, the Bid
Documents and includes any Work specific documents that may be issued by the Owner;
Ideal Structures
Page 11 of 185
“Contractor" shall mean the person or persons, firm or company to whom the Letter of Award has
been issued by the "Owner" and who has entered into the Contract Agreement with the Owner for
execution of the Work and includes the Contractor's successors-in-interest and permitted assigns;
"Contract Price" means the sum named in the Letter of Award subject to such additions thereto, or
deductions there from as may be made in terms of the Contract Documents and the Contract
Agreement;
"Defects Liability Period" in relation to the Work means a period of 12 months from the date of
completion of Work as indicated in Completion Certificate, and in the case of any item of work carried
out during the aforesaid period of 12 months in rectification of defect, a further period of 12 months
from the date of completion of such work;
"Final Certificate" in relation to the Work shall mean the certificate titled as such issued by the
Consultants, after expiration of the Defects Liability Period, certifying due execution by the Contractor
in terms of the Contract Agreement and due performance and fulfillment by the Contractor of its
obligations under the Contract Agreement;
"Letter of Award” shall mean the letter designated as such issued by the Owner to the Contractor, to
confirm that the Bid Proposal submitted by the Contractor has been accepted by the Owner, but does
not include the Provisional Letter of Award;
"Owner” means The Principal, ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, and would include its successors-ininterest and assigns;
“Provisional Letter of Award” shall mean a non-binding letter designated as such issued by the
Owner to the Bidder, signifying the Owner’s intention to award the Work to the Bidder;
“Rates” shall mean the rates quoted by the Contractor in the Schedule of Rates for each item of
Work, as per the Specifications and Bill of Quantities, forming part of the Bid Proposal and would
include any change in Rates, as approved by the Owner, upon approval of the Change Order;
“Retention Amount” shall mean the amount deducted by the Owner at the rate of five (5) percent
on the bill value from each running bill and retained by the Owner, free of interest, until Contractor
the Contractor has duly performed and fulfilled all its obligations under the Contract Agreement,
including Defect Liability Period;
"Site" shall mean the site specified by the Owner in terms of the Bid Documents, and where the Work
is to be executed and waters and other places on, under, in or through which the Work is to be carried
out and any other lands, water or places provided by the Owner for the purpose of the Contract
Agreement together with any place as may be designated in the Contract Agreement as forming part
of Site;
"Engineer-in-Charge" shall mean the engineer designated and appointed by the Consultants /
Owner and stationed at the Site, or such other person authorized by the Consultants /Owner to act
as such including any resident engineer or assistant to the engineer appointed from time to time by
the Consultants / Owner to act as a representative of the Owner at the Site;
"Specifications" shall mean all directions, technical specifications, provisions and requirements
attached to the Bid Documents, which pertain to the method and manner of performing the Work to
Ideal Structures
Page 12 of 185
the quantities and qualities of the Work and the materials to be supplied in terms of the Bid
Documents and Contract Agreement for the Work as may be amplified or modified by Tender
Drawings for the execution of the Work and shall include the specifications or standards set forth in
the latest edition including all addenda/corrigenda of relevant CPWD/BIS and other relevant
Codes and in the absence of any CPWD/BIS Standards/specifications, the specifications issued by
the Consultants in consultation with the Owner;
“Sub-Contractor" shall mean any person or firm or company (other than the Contractor) to whom any
part of the Work has been entrusted by the Contractor, with the prior approval of the Owner and their
legal representatives, successors and permitted assigns;
“Taxes” is defined in Clause 9.3.3;
"Temporary Works" shall mean all temporary works of every kind required in or about the execution,
completion or maintenance of the Work;
"Tender Drawings" shall include maps, plans, sketches and tracings or prints thereof with any
modifications approved in writing by the Consultants/Owner and such other drawings as may from
time to time be furnished or approved in writing by the Consultants and the Owner;
"Work" shall mean and include all works specified in the Bid Documents to be executed in accordance
with the Contract Agreement or part thereof, as the case may be, and shall include all extra,
additional, altered, or substituted works as may be required at the sole discretion of the Owner for the
purpose of the Retrofitting Existing GF&FF for Earth quake; Modifications of front entrance
&compound walls; Construction of New Ramp for Physically challenged and Emergency Stairs, at
ARSD College, New Delhi;
“Works Engineer” is defined in Clause 6.5.1 and shall mean the Engineer in Charge appointed by the
Contractor for execution of the work.
2. INTERPRETATION
2.1 Singular and Plural: Where the context so requires, words imparting the singular only also
include the plural and vice-versa. Words importing persons shall include relevant incorporated
companies/registered associations / body of individuals/ firm or partnership.
2.2
Headings and Marginal Notes: Headings and marginal notes to these Conditions shall not be
deemed to form part thereof and are not be taken into consideration for the interpretation or
construction thereof or of the Contract Agreement.
2.3
Meanings: Wherever in this Contract Documents the words directed, permitted required,
ordered, designed, considered, necessary or like words are used, it shall be understood that
the said directions, permissions, requirements, orders, designs etc. of the Engineer in Charge,
Consultants, and/or Owner are intended to mean so. Similarly words approval, acceptable
or satisfactory to the Consultants, Engineer in Charge and/or the Owner as the case may be
unless any other meaning is plainly intended.
2.4
Languages and Measures: All documents pertaining to the contract, drawings or any other
writings shall be written in English Language. The Metric system of measurement shall be
used in the Contract Agreement unless otherwise specified.
Ideal Structures
Page 13 of 185
2.5
Conflict Resolution. All the documents forming part of the Contract Agreement are to be
taken as complementary and mutually explanatory. Should there be any discrepancy,
inconsistency, error or omission in the Contract Agreement or any of the Contract Documents,
the matter shall be referred to the Consultants, who shall give its decision and issue to the
Contractor instructions directing in what manner the Work is to be carried out. The decision
of the Consultants shall be final and conclusive and the Contractor shall carry out Work in
accordance with this decision without any increase in cost.
2.6
Discrepancy Removal. In the Contract Documents certain clauses may be repeated in several
sections. In case of any discrepancy the same may be brought to the notice of the Owner whose
decision regarding interpretation shall be final and binding on the Contractor. Should there be
any difference between the Owner and the Contractor, the matter will be referred to the
Consultants whose decision on such matters will be final and binding on the Owner and the
Contractor. In deciding such matters, the Consultants will be acting as an expert and not as an
arbitrator, hence such a matter will not be considered as an arbitrable dispute within the
meaning of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 or any other applicable law, and hence
none of the provisions of such law would be applicable.
3.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
3.1
These General Conditions shall form part of the Contract Documents and shall be read in
conjunction with the Work for which Bid Proposals are invited, the Specifications of the Work,
the Tender Drawings and any other documents forming part of the Contract Agreement
wherever the context so requires.
3.2
Notwithstanding the sub-division of the Contract Documents into separate Sections and
volumes, every part shall be deemed to be supplementary to and complementary of every
other part and shall be read with and into the Contract Agreement so far as it may be
practicable to do so.
3.3
Wherever it is mentioned in the Specifications and / or indicated in the Tender Drawings that
the Contractor shall perform certain work or provide certain facilities and perform or fulfill
certain obligations, it is understood that the Contractor shall do so at its own cost.
3.4
The materials to be used in relation to the Work shall be in accordance with Section 06., Design
and workmanship shall conform to the prevailing standards and specifications in the relevant
CPWD standards and/ specifications and in the absence of CPWD standards/ specifications,
BIS standards/specifications shall be followed. However, in case no specific CPWD/ BIS
standards and/or specification are available or prescribed, the specifications issued by the
Consultants in consultation with the Owner, shall prevail and be binding on the Contractor.
3.5
A certified copy of the Contract Agreement together with all schedules and attachments
thereto shall remain in the custody of the Consultants & Owners and shall be available in their
office for reference by the Contractor and the Owner. The Owner shall provide to the
Contractor, on the signing of the Contract Agreement, free of cost with two copies of the Bill
of Quantities & Rate Schedule, Tender Drawings and the additional specifications, if any and
two copies of all further drawings issued during the progress of the Work. The Contractor
shall keep one copy of all drawings at its office at the Site and shall allow access to the
Engineer in Charge, Engineer in Charge and the Consultants at all times to such documents
Ideal Structures
Page 14 of 185
and the drawings. Before the issue of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall
forthwith return to the Owner all such documents, drawings and specifications.
4.
COVENANTS AND REPRESENTATION OF THE CONTRACTOR:
4.1
The Contractor shall have, prior to submission of the Bid Proposal, examined the Bid
Documents and the requirements specified in the Bid Documents and shall have obtained all
required information and familiarized itself with all relevant factors and conditions relating to
the Work including without limitation, information in all matters whatsoever that might affect
the execution of the Work at the Scheduled Rates and as per the Bill of Quantities. The
Contractor shall have conducted all required independent due diligence necessary and shall
have satisfied itself with all relevant factors and conditions relating to the Bid and the execution
of the Work. Any error in description of quantity or omission there from shall not vitiate the
Contract Agreement or release the Contractor from its obligations to execute the Work
comprised in the Contract Agreement according to the Tender Drawings and the Specifications
at the Scheduled Rates, using the approved materials. The Contractor shall have, prior to
submission of the Bid Proposal, fully familiarized with and shall have understood fully the
scope, nature and magnitude of the Work and the requirements of materials and labour
involved, in execution of the Work. The Contractor shall have, prior to submission of the Bid
Proposal, fully familiarized itself with the soil conditions and other material and relevant
conditions prevailing in the area, availability of materials, labour, electricity, water availability
in the area and access road to the Site and shall have satisfied itself, in respect of all existing
structures, if any, and also as to the nature and the conditions of the roads, culverts, means of
transport and communications, and as to possible interruptions thereto and the access and
egress from the Site, and shall have made inquires, examined and satisfied itself as to the site(s)
for obtaining sand, stones, bricks and other materials, the site(s) for disposal of surplus
materials, and availability of utilities, services and facilities required for execution and
completion of the Work, and shall have satisfied itself as to the sub-soil, subsoil water and
variations thereof, storms, prevailing winds, climatic conditions and all other similar factors
which may affect the Work. The Contractor shall have acquainted itself and taken into account
its obligations for payment of Taxes and other applicable charges.
4.2
Any neglect or failure on the part of the Contractor in obtaining necessary and reliable
information upon the foregoing or any other matters affecting the Work or Contract Documents
shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract Document including
without limitation the execution of the Work.
4.3
No oral agreement or inference from conversation with any officer or employee of the Owner /
Consultants either before or after the execution of the Contract Documents shall in any way
affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
5.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
5.1
LOCATION OF SITE AND ACCESSIBILITY
5.1.1 The Site is located at Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi. General information relating to the Site is
available with the Owner/Consultants. Such information shall be indicative in nature and
shall not be binding on the Owner. The Contractor has familiarized itself with the Site, the
area in which the Site is situated, approach roads thereto, type of soil, availability of materials
Ideal Structures
Page 15 of 185
and other factors relevant for execution of the Work, prevailing in the area wherein the Site is
situated and has submitted its Bid Proposal, after fully familiarizing itself with the conditions
prevailing in the area. The Owner shall have no obligation to entertain any claim concerning
the location or condition of site or on any other factor whatsoever.
5.1.2 The Owner has not made and does not make any representation about the existence or
suitability of the roads, and availability of access roads or railway siding or permits for entry of
vehicles to any specific area shall in no case be the cause to condone any delay in the execution
of the Work, nor shall be the cause for any claims or additional payments by the Owner to the
Contractor.
5.2
SCOPE OF WORK
5.2.1 The scope of Work is defined more specifically hereto in conjunction with the Bill of Quantities,
the Specifications, Tender Drawings and the Bar Chart.
5.2.1 The Contractor shall procure and use all necessary materials, equipment; labour and such other
resources as may be required for the execution and maintenance of the Work till completion of
the Work and until issue of Completion Certificate unless otherwise specifically agreed to by the
Owner in writing. All materials, equipment and other resources that may be used in the
execution of the Work shall be in terms of List of approved materials and where it is not
specifically mentioned therein, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge and /
or the Consultants.
5.3
COMMENCEMENT TIME, DELAY AND EXTENSION
5.3.1. The Contractor shall commence execution of the Work, not later than seven (7) days from the
date of issue of the Letter of Award.
5.3.2. The Bar Chart indicating the milestone completion dates is given in the Section 03 to Bid
Documents. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed weekly and monthly construction
programme in consultation with the Engineer in Charge (the “Construction Programme”) and
shall submit the same to the Engineer in Charge and the Consultants, within seven (7) days of
issue of the Letter of Award. The Contractor shall, subject to the overall time stipulated herein
for completion of the Work, execute the Work strictly in accordance with the Construction
Programme and shall complete the execution of the Work within the time stipulated in the
Construction Programme. The time specified herein for completion of the Work includes the
time required for mobilization, testing, rectifications, if any, retesting and completion of the
Work in all respects, to the entire satisfaction of the Consultants/ Owner. The Bar Chart shall
be prepared in direct relation to the time stated in the Contract Document for completion of
the items or groups of items of work and for the Work as a whole. It shall indicate the forecast
of the dates of commencement and completion of various trades or section of the work, which
amended as necessary, with prior approval of the Consultants and / or the Owner in writing,
but in any case without prejudice to the obligations of the Contractor to complete execution of
the Work within the time stipulated herein.
Without prejudice to the obligations of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time
stipulated herein, if the execution of the Work is delayed for any reason whatsoever, the
Contractor shall have no rights to claim from the Owner and the Owner shall have no
obligation to pay, any compensation by way of watch and ward, hire charges of tools and
plants, establishment expenses, loss of profit, idle labour or any on other account whatsoever,
Ideal Structures
Page 16 of 185
5.3.3. If, in the opinion of the Consultants, the execution or completion of the Work be delayed (a)
by Force Majeure conditions; and or (b) by reason of any court order restraining the execution
of the work by reason of action taken by any public authority, arising otherwise than on
account of the Contractor's own default, the Consultants shall, as soon as may be, give written
notice thereof to the Contractor, but the Contractor shall nevertheless constantly use his
endeavors to prevent delay and shall do all that may reasonably be required to satisfaction of
the Consultants to proceed with the Work.
5.3.4. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in Charge/Consultants in writing of
any occurrence, which has caused or which may cause a delay, which will affect the
performance of the Work or the completion of the Work within the stipulated time frame. If
the delay is caused by any event of Force Majeure, then and only then Contractor may submit
a request to the Engineer in charge/Consultants seeking extension of the time for completion
of the Work. It is clarified that mere shortage of labour, materials or utilities shall not
constitute an event of Force Majeure, unless any such shortage is caused by circumstance
which by itself is an event of Force Majeure.
5.4
PERIOD OF COMPLETION
Time allowed for execution and the completion of the work is 5 (Five) Months. The period
will be divided in phased work as per CIL priorities, so that they can install plant and
equipment in time. The Gantt Chart will be prepared and will form part of the agreement.
The period of Five months will commence from the 10th (tenth) day from the date of issue of
provisional letter of award. Time is the essence for execution and completion of the work by
the contractor. The contractor shall use all reasonable endeavors and exercise all due
diligence to execute and complete the work within the stipulated time
5.5
RESPONSIBILITY FOR LEVEL AND ALIGNMENT
5.5.1. The Contractor shall at its cost clear the Site prior to commencement of execution of the Work,
so that the Site is free from shrubs, herbs, grass, standing crops, hedges, plants, jungle, debris
or any unwanted materials of any kind whatsoever.
5.5.2. The Contractor shall, at its cost, carry out and ensure the horizontal and vertical alignment, the
levels and correctness of every part of Work and rectification of any errors or imperfections
therein.
5.6
SETTING OUT WORK
5.6.1. The Engineer in Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the corners of the Site and a level
benchmark and the Contractor shall set out the Work and shall provide an efficient staff for this
purpose and shall be responsible for the accuracy of such setting out.
5.6.2. The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all stakes, template,
level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent
their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible for the consequence of such removal or
disturbance should the same take place and for their efficient and timely reinstatement. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for the maintenance of all existing survey marks, boundary
marks, distance marks and center line marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by the
Ideal Structures
Page 17 of 185
Contractor. The Work shall be set out to the satisfaction of the Consultant The approval there of
by the Consultant in setting out the Work shall not relieve the Contractor form any of its
obligations and responsibilities.
5.7
WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER USE
5.7.1 Water shall be provided free of cost by the owner from their existing wells/bore well free of
cost to the contractor at one point near the site. The contractor shall check the suitability of
water for construction as per IS: 456 -2000 regularly and provide water test reports as and when
tested with engineer in charge/consultants.
5.7.2. Storage: The Contractor shall arrange for adequate storage arrangements so that sufficient
quantity of water is available at all times to meet the Contractor's construction, curing and all
other requirements. Adequate storage of water shall be made available at all times by the
Contractor to ensure continuous work without stoppage for want of water.
5.8
POWER (ELECTRICITY) SUPPLY
5.8.1 Use and availability: The Owner shall supply one three phase electricity supply (temporary
connection) at one point in work place free of cost. The owner may also try to ensure continuous
power supply using their existing generators during the period of power shut down. However
it is also the responsibility of the contractor to adhere to clause 5.8.3. The contractor shall give
optimum power requirement with the owner to enable them obtain temporary supply and it is
the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that power factor does not fall below 0.85. The
contractor may erect temporary structure for lighting of the site in night at their own cost.
5.8.2 Temporary works: The Contractor shall at its cost dismantle and remove all temporary lines or
structures erected by them at the Site in relation to drawing and using electricity, on completion
of execution of the Work or earlier, if so required by the Engineer in Charge. If there is any
hindrance to the other works at the Site due to these lines / structures during the progress of
work, the Contractor shall, at its cost, realign the same as may be required by the Engineer in
Charge.
5.8.3 Standby facilities: The Contractor is responsible to make adequate infrastructure and standby
facilities for the continuous supply of electric power required for the satisfactory execution of
the Work without stoppage, including use of Generator(s).
5.8.4 Submission of plans: The Contractor should submit its plans on the facility dealt in this Clause
5.8, for the approval of the Engineer in Charge, and shall proceed with the plans only in the
manner approved by the Engineer in Charge.
5.9
LAND FOR FIELD OFFICE, GODOWN AND WORKSHOP
5.9.1. The Owner may at its discretion permit the Contractor to construct at the Site at such locations,
as may be approved by the Engineer in Charge, temporary constructions for Contractor's field
office, godown(s), workshops and assembly yard required in relation to the execution of the
Work and for use by the Contractor during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall at
Ideal Structures
Page 18 of 185
its own cost construct all such temporary constructions and provide suitable water supply and
sanitary arrangement as required and approved by the Engineer in Charge. The area required
for such temporary constructions shall be subject to approval of the Engineer in Charge and no
representations as to insufficiency or otherwise of such area, shall be entertained by the Owner.
5.9.2. On completion of the Work, the Contractor shall, at its cost, remove all temporary constructions
and clear and restore the Site to usable condition or as may be directed by the Engineer in
Charge. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, or if the Contractor commits
any default in complying with such requirements, the Engineer in Charge may at the cost,
expense and risk of the Contractor remove such material and dispose of the same as the
Engineer in Charge deems fit and get the Site cleared as aforesaid and the Contractor shall
forthwith pay the amount of all expenses so incurred and shall have no claims in respect of any
such material disposed of as aforesaid. But the Owner reserves the right to ask the Contractor
any time during the pendency of the Contract Agreement to vacate the land by giving seven (7)
days notice.
5.10.
SAFETY STANDARDS FOR TEMPORARY BUILDINGS
All temporary buildings, including without limitation, the sheds, workshops, field station,
temporary accommodation for the Engineer in Charge shall be constructed as specified of the
Engineer in Charge/ Owner, as regards location and type of structures. Roofing and cladding
with grass or paddy straw or coconut leaf will not be permitted within the Site.
5.11
OTHER AGENCIES AT SITE
5.11.1 The Owner with the concurrence of the Consultants reserve the right to use the Site and any
portions of the Site for the execution of any work not included in these Bid Documents as the
Owner may desire to have carried out by other persons. The Contractor shall allow all
reasonable facilities for the execution of such work but shall not be obliged to provide any
plant, equipment or materials for the execution of such work, except as the Contractor may
otherwise agree with the Owner.
5.11.2 The Contractor shall be required to execute the Work in co-ordination with other agencies
Contractors engaged by the Owner, for carrying out works at the Site including the agencies or
Contractors engaged for site grading, filling and leveling, electrical and mechanical engineering
work, other civil works etc. No claim shall be entertained due to Work being executed or
inconveniences or interruptions caused execution of the Work in the above circumstances.
6.
6.1
GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
6.1.1 The Contractor shall at its own expenses, provide all materials required for the Work.
6.1.2 The Contractor shall, at its own expense, supply to the Engineer in Charge/Consultants
samples of materials proposed to be used in the Work. The Engineer in Charge /Consultants
shall be entitled to have the tests carried out as specified herein below, or as may be advised,
from time to time, by the Engineer in Charge or the Owner at the cost and expense of the
Contractor. If the test of the samples fails, the Contractor shall arrange to supply fresh
samples for testing to the Engineer in Charge /Consultants and the testing charges shall be
Ideal Structures
Page 19 of 185
borne by the Contractor. Only materials, the samples for which pass the test, will be used for
the Work. If any particular sample, fails to conform to the required specifications in testing,
the Contractor shall not dispute the results of the testing and replace/rectify the materials as
advised by the Engineer in Charge or the Owner, to make the material compliant with the
specifications.
6.1.3 The Engineer in Charge /Consultants shall have full powers to direct removal of any or all of
the materials brought to Site and which do not conform in character to the approved samples
or specifications. Upon issue of such directions, the Contractor shall promptly remove such
materials from the Site but in any case within 24 hours of such direction.
6.1.4 Materials required for the Works shall be stored by the Contractor at the Site only at places
approved by the Engineer in Charge /Consultants. Storage and safe custody of materials
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
6.1.5 The Engineer in Charge or his representative shall be entitled at any time to inspect and
examine any materials intended to be used in or on the Work, either at the Site or at factory or
workshop or other place(s) where these are lying and the Contractor shall give such facilities
as may be required for such inspection and examination.
6.1.6 The Owner shall have a lien on all materials brought to the Site, but all risks of loss of such
material shall remain with the Contractor. Materials brought to the Site shall not be removed
by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the Engineer in Charge or the
Consultants. On completion of the Work and fulfillment of all its obligations under the
Contract Agreement, by the Contractor , and when so required by the Engineer in Charge and
/ or the Consultants, the Contractor shall, at its cost, promptly remove from the Site all plant,
equipment and other materials belonging to the Contractor lying at the Site.
6.1.7. The Consultants shall be entitled to have test(s) carried out as required and specified in the
Specifications or in the Contract Agreement or considered necessary by the Engineer in
Charge/Consultant/Owner, for any materials supplied by the Contractor and such test will
be carried out at the cost of the Contractor. The Contractor shall bear all the expenses and
provide all the facilities, which the Consultants may require for the purpose. Such test will
include without limitation concrete cube test, briquette test, and slump cone test and sieve
analysis. The Contractor shall, at its cost, install and maintain necessary equipment at the Site
for carrying out such tests and shall maintain a register to record such tests and results of such
test and shall make that register available to the Engineer in Charge, the Consultants and the
Owner, whenever required.
6.2
CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY WITH OTHER AGENCIES
Without Prejudice to the Contractor’s obligations, the Contractor shall execute the Work in coordination and co-operation with other contractors engaged by the Owner and / or its other
Contractors, for carrying out works at the Site, including without limitation mechanical,
electrical, air-conditioning and communication network contractors and other agencies engaged
by the Owner and by providing the necessary grooves, recesses, cuts and openings in walls,
slabs, beams and columns and making good the same to the desired finish as per Specifications
for the placement of electrical, networking cables, conduits, air-conditioning inlet and outlet
grills and other equipment etc., where required. For the above said requirements in the false
Ideal Structures
Page 20 of 185
ceiling and other partitions, the Contractor shall, before commencing the Work, prepare and put
in place a joint scheme, in consultation with the electrical, mechanical, network communication,
air-conditioning contractors and other agencies as well as the Consultant, showing the
necessary openings, grooves, recesses, cuts, the methods of fixing required for the work of the
aforesaid, and the finishes therein, to the Engineer in Charge and get the same approved by the
Engineer in Charge.
6.3
COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS:
6.3.1 The Owner may engage other contractor(s) for carrying out other works at the Site in relation to
the project for setting up the Educational Facility. The Contractor shall co-operate, co-ordinate
and liaise with such other Contractors engaged by the Owner and / or by the contractors
engaged by the Owner, and execute the Work accordingly so that the Work shall proceed
smoothly with least possible delay and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner shall not
entertain any representation or claim from the Contractor for delay in completion of the Work,
on account of engagement of other Contractors by the Owner or otherwise howsoever.
6.3A INDEMNITY BY CONTRACTOR:
6.3.2 Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary in the Contract Documents, it is agreed
that the Contractor will remain solely liable for any and all loss, damage, cost, expense or other
charges incurred by the Owner arising out of any act or omission of the Contractor or its
employees, servants, consultants, sub-Contractors, agents and other representatives, in relation
to the execution of any part of the Work, and the Contractor shall indemnify and keep
indemnified the Owner against any and all such losses, damage, liability, cost, expenses, and
claims whatsoever that may be incurred or suffered by the Owner.
6.4
RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS
6.4.1 The Owner reserves the right to distribute the Work amongst more than one Contractor. The
Contractor shall co-operate and provide other contractors’ access to the Site for carrying out by
such other contractors their respective works.
6.4.2 Wherever the work being done by any agent/consultant or contractor or sub-contractor of the
Owner or by other contractors employed by the Owner, is contingent upon Work covered by
this Contract Agreement, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be
determined by the Engineer in Charge to secure the completion of the various portions of the
Work in general harmony.
6.5
CONTRACTOR’S SUBORDINATE STAFF AND THEIR CONDUCT
6.5.1. Promptly on issue of the Letter of Award, the Contractor shall name and depute a qualified
engineer having requisite qualification and sufficient experience in carrying out work of similar
nature, and acceptable to the Engineer in Charge, for being stationed at the Site (the “Works
Engineer”). The materials, which are to be supplied by the Owner in terms of the Contract
Documents, for execution of the Work, shall be issued to the Engineer in Charge. The
Contractor shall also provide to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge sufficient and
qualified staff to supervise the execution of the Work, competent sub-agents, foremen and
leading hands including those specially qualified by previous experience to supervise the type
Ideal Structures
Page 21 of 185
of works comprised in the Contract Agreement in such manner as will ensure work of the best
quality and workmanship and expeditious completion of the Work. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge, additional qualified and experienced personnel are required for proper coordination, supervision and/ or execution of the Work and accordingly notifies the Contractor,
the Contractor shall, at its cost, promptly engage such additional personnel.
6.5.2. If and whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, any of the personnel, consultants,
agents, assistants, foremen or other employees engaged by the Contractor or its sub-contractors,
shall be guilty of any misconduct or be incompetent or insufficiently qualified or negligent in
the performance of their duties or that in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, it is undesirable
for administrative or any other reason for such person or persons to be employed in the Work,
the Contractor, if so directed by the Engineer in Charge, shall at once remove such person or
persons from the Site and the Work and such persons shall not be any responsibility or role in
relation to execution of the Work. Any person or persons so removed from the Work shall not
again be employed in connection with the Work without the prior written permission of the
Engineer in Charge. Any person so removed from the Work shall be immediately replaced at
the expense of the Contractor by a qualified and competent substitute acceptable to the Owner.
The Contractor shall bear all costs in connection herewith.
6.5.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all legal compliances and the proper behaviour of all
the staff, foremen, workmen and other personnel engaged for or in relation to the Work and
shall exercise a proper degree of control over them and in particular and without prejudice to
the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall be bound to prohibit and prevent any
employee and personnel from trespassing or acting in any way detrimental or prejudicial to the
interest of the community or of the properties or occupiers of land and properties in the
neighbourhood and in the event of such employees or personnel so trespassing, the Contractor
shall be solely responsible for such acts and omissions and shall indemnify and keep
indemnified the Owner against all claims, losses, damages, costs and expenses and liabilities
arising there from.. The decision of the Engineer in Charge on any and all matters referred to in
this Clause 6.5.3 shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
6.6.
PLANT AND MATERIALS
6.6.1. The Contractor shall submit a detailed chart within 10 days from the date of issue of Provisional
Letter of Award showing the plant and equipment to be deployed on the works and the periods
during which the same will be required for implementation of the Work. In the event
additional plant and equipment are considered necessary in the opinion of the Consultants or
the Owner, the same shall be provided forthwith at no extra cost.
6.6.2. The Consultants or the Owner may require removal from the Site of any and all plant,
equipment and materials brought for execution of the Work, which the Owner considers as
unsuitable, without requiring give any reasons therefore.
6.6.3. If the Contractor or any of their employees, consultants, servants, sub-Contractors, agents or
other representatives shall due to their act or omission, cause any loss, or damage, to any
property belonging to any person including without limitation the Owner, or if any amount is
claimed by any person from the Owner for such loss, damage or cost suffered by such person
due to any such act or omission on the part of the Contractor, any Sub-contractor or such other
persons specified above, then the same shall be made good by the Contractor at its own expense
and in default thereof, the Engineer in Charge may cause the same to be made good by other
Ideal Structures
Page 22 of 185
agencies and deduct such costs and expenses from the running bills submitted by the
Contractor for which the certificate of the Engineer in Charge shall be final and conclusive.
6.7.
CHANGE IN CONSTITUTION
The Contractor shall not make any change in its constitution without prior written approval of the
Owner.
6.8.
FIRE PROTECTION
6.8.1 The Contractor shall provide fire protection equipment wherever it is required, in working
condition, as may be prescribed by the concerned Fire Authority/Officer. The Contractor's
personnel who are working in execution of the Work will be properly instructed and trained in
the operation of such fire protection equipment. In the event of an accidental fire, it is expected
of such personnel to make efforts to extinguish the fire with the equipment made available. If
the fire situation cannot be controlled, then the Contractor's personnel should immediately get
in touch with the concerned District Fire Officer/ Authority and also report the same to the
Engineer in Charge/ Consultants.
6.8.2 All efforts should be made by the Contractor's personnel to prevent occurrence of any
unwanted fire and in case of occurrence of any fire, due to which any material of the Owner,
gets damaged, the Contractor shall be responsible to recompensate the Owner and the Owner
shall be entitled to set off such damage (assessed by the Consultant), from amounts due and/or
payable to the Contractor.
6.9.
WRONGFUL APPROPRIATION OF MATERIALS
Wrongful appropriation, or attempt of wrongful appropriation, of materials belonging to the
Owner or any other contractor working at the Site or commission of any other criminal act by
the Contractor or its agents, or employees or workers shall be deemed to be a breach of contract
on the part of the Contractor, and the Owner shall, in addition to the other remedies available
under the Contract Agreement, be entitled to terminate the Contract Agreement forthwith at the
risk and cost of the Contractor. The decision of the Owner in any of the above aspects shall be
final and binding on the Contractor.
7.
RIGHTS OF ENGINEER IN CHARGE/CONSULTANTS
7.1
The Engineer in Charge has no supervisory duties or responsibilities over the Contractor and
all such responsibilities in relation to supervision of the execution of the Work by the
Contractor shall vest solely with the Consultants. The Engineer in Charge has no power to
approve, restrict, modify or allow any financial transaction or to incur any amount for and on
behalf of the Owner. The Engineer in Charge will be responsible for on site progress to ensure
that the Works are being carried out by the Contractor in terms of the Specifications stated in
Section 04 hereto and in terms of time schedule, measurement, quantities, quality and as per
drawings etc. He will inform the Consultants/ Owner in case of faulty workmanship or
delays etc. and the Consultants shall take up the matter with the Contractor.
7.2
The Consultants and /or the Owner may appoint other engineers and personnel (hereinafter
the “junior engineers”) to assist the Engineer in Charge. The Contractor shall afford them
Ideal Structures
Page 23 of 185
every facility and assistance for inspecting the Work and materials and for checking and
measuring the work done and materials. Neither the Engineer in Charge nor the junior
engineers shall have power to revoke, alter, enlarge or relax any requirement of the Contract
Agreement or to sanction any additions, alterations, deviations, omissions or any extra work
whatsoever, except in so far as such authority may be specially confirmed by written order of
the Consultants.
7.3
The Engineer in Charges or his representative shall have power to give notice to the
Contractor, its representative regarding non-approval of any work or material and such work
shall be suspended or the use of such materials shall be discontinued until the decision of the
Consultants is obtained. The work will from time to time be examined by the Consultants, the
Engineer in Charges or other representatives, but such examination or approval shall not in
any way exonerate the Contractor from the obligations to remedy any defects which may be
found to exist at any stages of the work or after the same is completed.
7.4
The Consultants/ Engineer in Charge and their representatives shall at all reasonable time
have free access to the Work site and/or other places where materials are lying or from where
they are being obtained. The Contractor shall give every facility to the Consultants/ Engineer
in Charge and their representatives, necessary for inspection and examination and test of the
Work and the materials.
7.5
The Contractor shall give, not less than seven (7) days notice in writing, to the Consultants or
their representative in charge, before the Work is covered or otherwise placed beyond the
reach for measurement. The Contractor agrees not to cover or seal the Work with out the prior
written consent of the Consultants or their authorized representative in charge of the Work
and the same shall be uncovered at the Contractor’s expense in case the procedure is not
followed or any default thereof. No payment or allowance shall be made for such work or the
materials with which the same was executed.
7.6
The Consultants shall have full power, during the progress of the Work, to direct the
Contractor in writing from time to time the removal from the Work within such reasonable
time as may be specified in the direction or any materials, which, in the opinion of the
Consultants, do not conform to the Specifications or to the instructions of the Consultants and
the Contractor shall forthwith carry out such directions at its own cost. In case of default on
the part of the Contractor to carry out such directions, the Consultants shall, with the
concurrence of the Owner, have the power to employ and pay other persons to carry out the
same and all expenses consequent thereon or incidental thereto as certified by the Consultants
shall be borne by the Contractor or may be set off/deducted by the Owner from any money
due or that may be due to the Contractor.
7.7
The Consultants/ Engineer in Charge shall have full powers to require removal of any or all
the materials brought by the Contractor which, in the opinion of the Consultants or the
Engineer in Charge, do not conform to the Specifications or do not conform in character or
quality to the samples approved by the Consultants or the Engineer in Charge. In case of
default on the part of the Contractor in removing rejected materials the Consultants shall be at
liberty to have these removed by other Agency. The Consultants/Engineer in Charge shall
have full powers to require other proper materials to be substituted for rejected materials in
the event of the Contractor refusing to comply, the Consultants/ Engineer in Charge may
cause the same to be supplied by other agency, which may attend upon such removal and/or
substitution and such cost shall be borne by the Contractor.
Ideal Structures
Page 24 of 185
7.8
All the works embracing more than one process shall be subject to examination and approval
at each state thereof by the Consultants and the Contractor shall give the notice to the
Consultants or his authorized representative when each state is ready. In case of default of
such notice the Consultants shall be entitled to appraise the quality and extent thereof and the
assessment of the Consultant, shall be final.
7.9
The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer in Charge free of cost all necessary
instruments and assistance in checking of setting out of Work and in the checking of any Work
made by Contractor and taking measurement of Work.
8.
EXECUTION OF WORK
8.1
EXECUTION OF WORK:
8.1.1 All the items of the Work and parts thereof shall be executed in strict conformity with the
provisions of the Contract Documents and with such explanatory detailed Tender Drawings,
Specifications and Instructions as may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor by the
Engineer in Charge/Consultants, whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or not. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that Work throughout are executed in the most
substantial, proper and workmanlike manner with the quality of material and workmanship in
strict accordance with the Specifications and to the entire satisfaction of the Consultants.
8.1.2 The Contractor shall give all necessary personal superintendence during the execution of
works, and so long thereafter as the Consultants may consider necessary until the expiry of
the "Defects Liability Period" stated hereto. The Contractor shall also during the whole time
the Work are in progress employ competent representatives and qualified engineers who shall
be constantly in attendance at the Site while the men are at work. Any directions,
explanations, instructions or notices given by the Engineer in Charge to any representative of
the Contractor shall be deemed to be given to the Contractor.
8.1.3 The Contractor shall at the request of the Engineer in Charge immediately withdraw and
remove from the Site and the work any of the Contractor’s personnel, who, in the opinion of
the Engineer in Charge/ Consultants, may not be a desirable person to be employed at the
Site or on the Work. The Contractor shall not reemploy such persons at the Site or on the
Work without prior written permission of the Engineer in Charge/Consultants.
8.1.4 The Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings, bar bending schedule and obtain
necessary approval from the Consultants before executing such item of the Work.
8.1.5 Commencing from the time of taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall, at its cost,
arrange for proper watch and ward staff, lighting and protecting the Work Site at all times
until completion of the Work and handing over the same to the Owner. The Contractor shall
provide at its cost necessary temporary enclosures, fencing, boundary walls, gates, entrances
etc., for the protection of the Work and materials. The Contractor shall, at its cost, remove the
same at completion of the Work. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Schedule of Work
for execution in conformity to the stipulated time for completion of the Work, and submit it
for the approval of the Consultants immediately after issue of the Letter of Award. The
Schedule of Work shall be revised and brought up-to-date every month and copies of the
same shall be forwarded to the Engineer in Charge, the Consultants and the Owner. It is
Contractor's responsibility to see that these schedules are complied with. The Owner will not
Ideal Structures
Page 25 of 185
be responsible for any claim of any nature by the Contractor and its subcontractor not having
completed their work in accordance with the time and progress schedule for any reason
whatsoever.
8.1.5 The entire Work including all extra and additional items of work shall be completed in the
time stated in the Contract Documents. No claim for enlargement of time, will be allowed to
the Contractor on this account.
8.1.6 The Contractor shall allow, free of charge, the use of scaffolding etc. to the Engineer in
Charge/ Consultants for inspection and to other contractors for execution of their work in
proper manner.
8.1.7 The Owner shall have no obligation to pay any compensation for any damage caused to the
Work or materials by rains, floods or natural calamities or any other causes whatsoever,
including force majeure conditions. The Contractor shall make good all such damages at its
own cost.
8.1.8 The Contractor shall provide to the satisfaction of the Consultants a team of qualified
engineering staff including one experienced Works Engineer and experienced general
Foreman who will always be on the premises when the work is going on.
8.1.9 The Contractor shall give to the municipal and other authorities all notices etc., that may be
required by the law and obtain all requisite licenses for temporary constructions, enclosures,
opening into common sewers, water pipes etc. and pay all proper fees, costs and shall meet all
misc. expenses in this connection. They shall also construct proper enclosures and fencing for
the protection and convenience of the workmen and public, if so advised by the
Consultant/Engineer in Charge during the progress of the work and perfectly restore all the
adjoining grounds, pavements etc. on completion of the work.
8.1.10 All water pipes, existing drawings or any other work which may be made with or above the
excavation shall be properly maintained by the Contractor by means of shoring, strutting,
planking over or otherwise as the Consultants/ Engineer in Charge may direct and shall be
protected by the Contractor from damage during the course of work or if damaged shall be
made good by him at its own cost. However, if Consultants considers that they will have to
be temporarily broken down or permanent diversion is required then the Contractor will be
compensated for such diversion, at the sole discretion of the Consultants in consultation with
the Owner.
8.1.11 All constructional plant, equipment, instruments, temporary works and materials provided
by the Contractor shall, when brought to or remain at the Site, be used exclusively for the
execution of the Work and the Contractor shall not remove the same or any part thereof
without the consent in writing of the Engineer in Charge.
8.1.12 Labour hutments may be allowed at Site only after obtaining permission from the Engineer in
Charge. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to remove such labour hutments
and such removal is a pre-condition to issue of Completion Certificate.
8.1.13 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that the building under repair works is
not occupied by any person, during construction and the Contractor to hand over vacant and
peaceful possession of the Site.
Ideal Structures
Page 26 of 185
8.1.14 The Work shall not be considered complete until the Contractor has executed the Work
complete in all respects to the entire satisfaction of the Consultants and the Contractor has
removed from the Site all scaffolding, temporary works, surplus materials, rubbish and all
huts and sanitary arrangements required for its workmen on the Site in connection with the
execution of the Work, and cleaned all dirt from the parts of building in, upon or about which
the Work has been executed or of which he may have had possession for the purpose of the
execution thereof and cleaned floors, gutters and drains, eased doors and sashes, oiled locks
and fastenings labeled keys clearly and hand them over to the Engineer in Charge and make
the Site fit for immediate occupation or use to the satisfaction of the Consultants/ Engineer in
Charge. The Consultants shall have no obligation to issue the Completion Certificate to the
Owner until the Contractor has performed and fulfilled all its obligations to the complete
satisfaction of the Consultants. If the Contractor fails to comply with any of the requirements
of these conditions as aforesaid, on or before the date fixed for completion of the work, the
Consultants and/or Engineer in Charge may at the expense of the Contractor fulfill such
requirements and dispose of the scaffoldings, surplus materials and rubbish etc. as he thinks
fit and the Contractor shall have no claim in respect of any such scaffolding or surplus
materials except for any sum actually realized by the sale thereof less the cost of fulfilling the
requirements and any other amount that may be due from the Contractor. If the expense of
fulfilling such requirements is more than the amount realized from such disposal as aforesaid,
the Contractor shall forthwith, on demand, pay such expense. On its failure to pay on
demand, such amount, it may be realized from any other sum due to the Contractor.
8.2
WORK IN MONSOON AND DEWATERING
8.2.1
The completion of the Work will entail working in the monsoon also. The Contractor shall
maintain necessary labour force as may be required for the Work and plan and execute the
construction and erection according to the prescribed schedule. No extra rate will be
considered for such Work in monsoon.
8.2.2
The Contractor should install pump(s) of adequate capacity to bail out/divert/ regulate water,
which may have collected at Site, from any source/for any reason, including natural causes
and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep the construction work Site free from
water logging at its own cost, at all times. The Owner shall not entertain any claim, for such
costs/expenses or damage caused to its material, which the Contractor, may have incurred, in
this regard. Also, the Contractor shall take precautionary/preventive as well as curative steps,
as may be advised by the Engineer in Charge.
8.3
TENDER DRAWINGS
8.3.1
Ref Appendix A “The Work”
8.4
ALTERATIONS IN SPECIFICATIONS & DESIGNS & EXTRA WORK
The Consultants shall have power to make any alterations in, omissions from, additions to,
variations from, or substitutions for, the schedule of rates, the original Specifications,
drawings, designs, and instructions that may appear to the Consultants to be necessary or
advisable during the course of execution of the Work, and Contractor shall be bound to carry
out such altered, additional or substituted items of Work in accordance with any instructions
Ideal Structures
Page 27 of 185
which may be given by the Consultants, and such alterations, omissions, additions or
substitutions shall not invalidate Contract Agreement and any altered, additional or
substituted Work, which Contractor may be directed to do in manner above specified as part
of the Work, shall be carried out by Contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which
the Contractor had agreed to execute the Work. At the request of the Contract, the Consultants
may, at their discretion, allow extra time, for the part of the particular work on account of such
alterations, additions or substitutions of Work, as the Consultants consider as just and
reasonable. The rates for such additional, altered or substituted Work under this clause 8.4
shall be worked out in accordance with the following provisions:
i)
If the rates for additional altered or substituted Work are specified in Contract Agreement, the
Contractor is bound to carry out the additional, altered or substituted Work at the same rates
as are specified in Contract Agreement unless the Consultants considers otherwise. The
opinion of the Consultants, as to whether or not the rates can be reasonably so derived from
the items in the Contract Agreement, shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
ii)
If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted Work are not specifically provided in
Schedule of Rates, the rates, the Consultants will, in consultation with the Owner, assess the
rates.
iii)
For additions/ alterations falling under above sub clauses, the Consultants shall determine the
rate or rates on the basis of the prevailing market rates of materials, labour cost at schedule of
labour plus fifteen percent (15%) thereon to cover Contractor's supervision, over-heads and
profit and pay the Contractor accordingly. The opinion of the Consultants as to the current
market rates of materials and the quantum of labour involved per unit of measurement will be
final and binding on Contractor.
iv)
Notwithstanding anything mentioned in sub-clauses (i), (ii) and (iii) above, the Consultants
shall have the right to determine rates for additional / extra works and the rates determined
by the Consultants shall be binding on the Contractor, who shall forthwith execute such
works. The Engineer in Charge shall also have the option to employ another agency to execute
such works and the Contractor shall provide full co-ordination.
8.5.
VARIATIONS:
8.5.1 The Contractor shall carry out and complete the said Work in every respect in accordance
with the Contract Agreement and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the
Consultants / the Owner. The Consultants may in their absolute discretion and from time to
time issue further drawings and/or written instructions, details, directions and explanations
(herein the “Consultants’ Instructions”) to the Contractor, in regard to:
(i)
The variation of modification of the design, quantity or quality of works or the addition or
omission or substitution of any work;
(ii)
Any discrepancy in the drawings or between the Schedule of Quantities and/or drawings
and/or Specification;
(iii)
The removal from the Site of any works executed by the Contractor, and the substitution of
any other material thereof;
(iv)
The removal and/or re-execution of any works executed by the Contractor;
Ideal Structures
Page 28 of 185
(v)
The removal from the Work and / or from the Site any person(s) employed by the
Contractor;
(vi) The opening up for inspection of any work covered up; and
(vii) The amending and making good of any defects.
Instructions issued to the Contractors under (i) and (ii) shall be considered as expected matters.
8.5.2 The Contractor shall forthwith comply with and duly execute any work comprised in such
Consultants’ Instructions provided always that oral instructions, directions and explanations
given to the Contractor or its representative upon the Work by the Consultants shall, if
involving a variation, be subject to confirmation in writing by the Consultants to the
Contractor, within further seven days and they shall be deemed to be Consultants’
Instructions within the scope of the Contract Agreement.
8.6
NO COMPENSATION FOR ALTERATION / RESTRICTION OF WORK
If at any time from the commencement of the Work, the Owner for any reason whatsoever does
not require the whole or part thereof as specified in the Bid to be carried out, the Engineer in
Charge shall give notice in writing to that effect to the Contractor, who shall have no claim to
any payment or compensation whatsoever on account of any loss of profit or advantage which
the Contractor may have derived from the execution of the Work in full, but which he did not
derive in consequence of the full amount of the work not having been carried out, neither shall
the Contractor have any claim for compensation by reason of any alterations or additions
having been made, to the original Specifications, drawings, designs and the Consultants’
Instructions, which shall involve any curtailment of the Work.
8.7.
INSPECTION OF WORK
8.7.1 The Engineer in Charge/ Consultants will have full power and authority to inspect the Work
(and not the Contractor’s workers) at any time wherever in progress either on the Site or at the
Contractor’s premises/ workshops wherever situated, premises /workshops of any person,
firm or corporation where work in connection with the Contract Agreement may be in hand or
where materials are being or are to be supplied, and Contractor shall afford or procure for the
Engineer in Charge, every facility and assistance to carry out such inspection. Contractor shall,
at all time during the usual working hours and all other times at which reasonable notice of the
intention of the Engineer in Charge or his representative to visit the Work shall have been given
to the Contractor, either himself be present to receive orders and instructions, or have a
responsible agent duly accredited in writing present for the purpose. Orders given to the
Contractor's agent shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been given to
Contractor himself. The Contractor shall give not less than seven (7) day's notice in writing to
the Consultants before covering up or otherwise placing beyond reach of inspection and
measurement any Work in order that the same may be inspected and measured. In the event of
breach of above the same shall be uncovered at Contractor's expense for carrying out such
measurement or inspection.
8.7.2 The Engineer in Charge shall give written instructions regarding any particular work. The
Contractor shall maintain a work order book for each sector in which the aforesaid written
instructions will be entered. The Contractor or its authorized representative shall sign the work
Ideal Structures
Page 29 of 185
order book, within 12 hours of issue of instructions, by way of acknowledgement of such
instructions.
8.7.3 No material shall be dispatched from Contractor's stores before obtaining the approval in
writing of the Engineer in Charge.
8.7.4 The Contractor shall provide at all times during the progress of the Work and maintenance
period proper means of access with ladders, gangways, etc. and the necessary attendance to
move and adopt as directed for inspection or measurement of the Work by the Engineer in
Charge.
8.8.
TESTS FOR QUALITY OF WORK
8.8.1. All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the Contract Documents and in
accordance with the instructions of the Consultant and shall be subjected from time to time to
such test, at the Contractor's cost, as the Consultants may direct at the place of manufacture or
fabrication or on the Site or at an independent laboratory or at all or any such places. The
Contractor shall provide assistance / instrument, labour and materials as are normally required
for examining, measuring and testing any workmanship as may be selected and required by the
Consultants. The results of the tests in original will be forwarded directly to the Consultants or
Engineer in Charge by the testing authority with copies sent to the Contractor.
8.8.2. All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of Work as stipulated by the
Consultants from time to time shall be carried out at the field-testing laboratory of the
Contractor at its costs. The Contractor at its costs shall do all the required tests on materials and
works. In case it is directed to carry out tests at an independent laboratory Contractor shall
arrange to do so at its cost as directed by the Consultants.
8.9.
SAMPLES
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in Charge for approval when requested or if
required by the Specifications, adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be used in Work
at Contractors cost. Such samples shall be submitted before Work is commenced and in ample
time to permit tests and examination thereof. All materials furnished and finishes applied in
Work shall be fully equal to the approved samples.
8.10
SUSPENSION OF WORK
The Contractor shall if ordered in writing by the Engineer in Charge, or his representative,
temporarily suspend the Work or any part thereof for such period and such time as so ordered
and shall not, after receiving such written order proceed with Work therein ordered to be
suspended until he shall have received a written order to proceed therewith. The Contractor
shall not be entitled to claim compensation for any loss or damage sustained by him by reason
of temporary suspension of Work aforesaid. An extension of time for completion,
corresponding with the delay caused by any such suspension of Work as aforesaid will be
granted to Contractor should he apply for the same provided that the suspension was not
consequent to any default or failure on the part of Contractor.
8.11
OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK
Ideal Structures
Page 30 of 185
Upon failure of the Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with the
provisions of this Contract Agreement, the Owner has the alternative right, instead of assuming
charge of the Work to place additional labour force, tools, equipment and materials on such
parts of Work, as the Owner may designate or also engage another Contractor to carry out such
work. In such cases, the Owner shall be entitled, without prejudice to its other rights and
remedies, to deduct from any amount due the Contractor, the cost of such work and materials
with fifteen percent (15%) added to cover all departmental charges and should the total amount
thereof exceed the amount due to the Contractor, the Contractor shall forthwith pay such
shortfall to the Owner. In the alternative, the Owner shall recover such costs from Performance
Bank Guarantee.
8.12
SUB-CONTRACTING OF WORK
8.12.1. The Contractor shall not directly or indirectly sub-let or sub-contract the whole or any part of
the Work, without prior written permission of the Consultants / the Owner, except as provided
for in the succeeding sub-clause, of the Owner/Consultants.
8.12.2. The Owner/Consultants may, at their sole discretion, give written consent to sub- contract for
the execution of any part of the Work at the Site, such as for anti-termite treatment, water
proofing etc., provided the Contractor shall have furnished in advance, full details of such
proposal to sub-contract and shall have obtained written permission from the Consultants /
Owner to such proposal for sub-contracting. The Owner / Consultants may decline to grant
permission for sub-contracting, without requiring to give any reasons thereof. If the Owner/
Consultants permits such sub-contracting by the Contractor, the same shall be subject to the
stipulation that the Contractor shall personally be liable for performance and shall guarantee
the proper functioning of the such, sub-contracted item of Work. It is expressly understood
herein, that in case anti-termite treatment, water proofing, are sub-contracted, the Contractor
shall be required to provide a guarantee, guaranteeing efficacy of such work, for a period of ten
(10) years, in the form and manner prescribed by the Consultants/ Owners.
8.12.3. At the commencement of every month, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in Charge a
complete list of all sub-contractors or other persons or firms, engaged by the Contractor or
working at Site during the previous month with particulars as to the general nature of the
subcontracted Work and reference of the Engineer in Charge’s approval, obtained for the same.
8.12.4 Notwithstanding grant of permission by the Owner / Consultants for sub-contracting any part
of the Work, the Contractor shall be solely liable to execute the Work and any such subcontracting shall not in any way dilute the Contractor’s obligations to execute the Work or
relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract Agreement. The Contractor shall
be fully responsible for proper execution of the sub-contracted work by the sub-contractor and
shall be solely liable to deal with the sub-contractor. The Owner / Consultants shall have no
obligations to deal with the sub-contractors, notwithstanding the fact that such sub-contractors
may have been engaged with the prior permission of the Consultants / Owner.
8.12.5 If any sub-contractor engaged upon the Work at the Site executes any Work, which in the
opinion of Engineer in Charge/Consultants is not in accordance with the Contract Agreement,
Ideal Structures
Page 31 of 185
the Owner/ the Consultants may by written notice to the Contractor withdraw the permission
granted and require the Contractor to execute such work by itself. Upon such withdrawal of
permission, the Contractor shall forthwith terminate the contract, if any, entered into with such
sub-contractor and remove the sub-contractor from the Site and from the Work.
8.12.6. No action taken by the Owner under clause 8.12 shall render the Owner liable to any claim for
damages or compensation from the Contractor or the sub-contractor(s), employed by the
Contractor.
8.13
POWER OF ENTRY
If the Contractor shall not commence the Work in the manner previously described in the
Contract Documents or if the Contractor shall at any time in the opinion of the Consultants:
i)
fail to carry out the Work in conformity with the Contract Documents, or
ii)
fail to carry out the Work in accordance with the time schedule, or
iii)
substantially suspend the Work for a period of seven (7) days without authority from the
Engineer in Charge, or
iv)
fail to carry out and execute the Work to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge, or
v)
fail to supply sufficient or suitable construction plant and equipment, temporary works,
labour, materials or things, or
vi)
commit or suffer, or permit any other breach of any of the provisions of the Contract
Agreement to be performed on its part or observed to persist in any of the above mentioned
breaches of the Contract Agreement for seven (7) days, after notice in writing shall have been
given to the Contractor by the Consultants requesting such breach to be remedied, or
vii)
if the Contractor shall abandon the work, or
viii)
if the Contractor during the continuance of the contract shall become bankrupt, make any
arrangement or composition with its creditors, or permit any execution to be levied or go into
liquidation whether compulsory or voluntary not being merely a voluntary liquidation for the
purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction,
then, and in any such case, the Owner shall have the absolute power to determine the Contract
Agreement, without any notice to the Contractor, as specified in Clause 27 herein below, and in
addition, the Owner shall have the power to enter upon the Work and take possession thereof
and of the materials, temporary works, constructional plant and equipment and stock thereon,
and to revoke the Contractor's right to use the same, and to complete the Work by its agents,
other Contractor’s or workmen, or to re-let the same upon any terms and to such other person,
firm or corporation as the Owner in its absolute discretion may think proper to employ and for
the purpose aforesaid to use or authorize the use of any materials, temporary works,
constructional plant and equipment and stock as aforesaid, without making payment or
Ideal Structures
Page 32 of 185
allowance to the Contractor for the said materials other than such as may be certified in writing
by the Engineer in Charge to be reasonable, and without making any payment or allowance to
the Contractor for the use of the temporary said works, constructional plant and equipment and
stock or being liable for any loss or damage thereto, and if the Owner shall incur additional
expenditure by reason of its taking possession of the Work which are being completed by other
Contractor (due account being taken of any extra work or works which may be omitted) then
the amount of such additional expenditure as certified by the Engineer in Charge shall be
deducted from any money which may be due for work done by the Contractor under the
Contract Agreement and not paid for. Any deficiency shall forthwith be made good and paid to
the Owner by the Contractor and the Owner shall have power to sell in such manner and for
such price as he may think fit all or any of the constructional plant and equipment materials etc.
constructed by or belonging to Contractor and to recoup and retain the said deficiency or any
part thereof out of the proceeds of the sale.
8.14 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY OWNER:
This clause does not apply to “The Work”
8.15
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE OF MATERIALS:
8.15.1.
At the request of the Contractor, the Owner may from time to time issue materials in such
quantities, as the Owner considers appropriate, to the Contractor’s designated person, only for
use in execution of the Work, properly documented by way of pre-numbered issue slips. It
shall be the responsibility of Contractor to receive the materials and arrange unloading and
stacking at its store at its own cost. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor, for
loading, unloading and stacking of such material, by the Contractor.
8.15.2.
Contractor shall bear all incidental charges for the storage and safe custody of materials at site
after these have been issued to him, for the purpose of incorporation or use in performance of
the Work.
8.15.3.
For the material issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall make suitable arrangements, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge/ Consultants, for safe storage of material.
8.15.4.
Contractor shall be responsible for storing the materials supplied by the Owner,
safeguarding the same against damage by rain, dampness, fire, theft etc. He shall also
employ necessary watch and ward establishment for the purpose and the material shall be
stored in Stores with double locks and keys.
8.15.5.
It shall be the duty of Contractor to inspect the materials supplied to him at the time of taking
delivery and satisfy itself that they are in good condition. Once the materials are delivered, the
Contractor shall, at its cost and responsibility, keep such materials in good condition and if the
materials are damaged or lost, at any time, the Contractor shall, at its cost, repair and/or
replace to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
8.15.6.
Unused material (supplied by Owner), shall be properly accounted for and returned by the
Contractor to the Owner, after completion of the Work.
8.15.7.
The materials issued by the Owner are issued only for the purpose of incorporation and use in
the Work of permanent nature performed by the Contractor for the Owner and the same shall
be held by the Contractor, only as a Trustee of the Owner. The Ownership of materials
Ideal Structures
Page 33 of 185
supplied by the Owner shall at all times, vest and remain with the Owner and the Contractor
shall have or claim any Ownership rights over or on such material, supplied by the Owner.
8.15.8.
The Contractor, at his own cost, shall obtain comprehensive insurance cover from a reputed
insurance company for materials supplied by the Owner and the name of the Owner shall be
incorporated as the “Loss Payee” in such insurance policy.
8.15.9.
The Owner shall not be liable for any delay in supply or non-supply of any materials, which
the Owner has undertaken to supply where such failure or delay is due to natural calamities,
act of enemies, transport and procurement difficulties and any circumstance beyond the
control of the Owner. In no case, the Contractor shall be entitled to claim any compensation or
loss suffered by him on this account.
8.15.10. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange in time all materials required for the
Work. If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge the execution of Work is likely to
be delayed due to the Contractor's inability to make arrangements for supply of materials
which normally he has to arrange for, the Engineer in Charge shall have the right at his own
discretion to issue such materials if available with the Owner or may procure the materials
from the market or elsewhere and the Contractor will be bound to take such materials at the
rates decided by the Engineer in Charge. This however does not in any way absolve
Contractor from responsibility of making arrangements for the supply of such materials in
part or in full, should such a situation occur nor shall this constitute a reason for the delay in
the execution of Work.
8.15.11. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer in Charge wherever instructed, a statement
showing its requirement of the quantities of the proposed materials to be supplied by Owner
and the time when the same will be required by him for work, so as to enable the Engineer in
Charge to make necessary arrangements for procurement and supply of the material.
8.15.12. The Contractor shall issue requisition for materials properly documented by way of pre
numbered indents, for such quantities as are absolutely essential for completion of that portion
of the work, for which the material is requisitioned. The requisition shall be made at least ten
days in advance, before such material is required for performance of any item of work, to
enable the Owner to procure such material.
8.15.13. Materials supplied by the Owner shall not be utilized for any purpose other than for which it
is issued, without prior written permission of the Engineer in Charge.
8.15.14 The Contractor shall hold the materials issued or supplied by the Owner in trust for the
Owner and shall use the materials only for the purposes for which such materials are supplied
or issued. In case of any shortfall due to any reason whatsoever, it shall be to the account of
the Contractor. In case of shortfall/ shortage of material or the same is unusable, in Engineer
in Charge/Consultants’ sole opinion, the Owner at its sole discretion shall assess the value of
such material, and such assessed amount shall be deducted from the next running bill or the
final bill, raised by the Contractor.
8.15.15 The Contractor shall maintain a logbook, in which details of quantity received by way of issue
slips, quantity issued for construction and the closing stock are recorded. The logbook shall
contain a monthly summary of actual utilization as per logbook and reconcile the same with
the theoretical consumption as per Consultant’s calculations.
Ideal Structures
Page 34 of 185
8.16.
MATERIALS OBTAINED FROM DISMANTLING
If the Contractor in the course of execution of Work is called upon to dismantle any part for reasons
other than those stipulated herein, the materials obtained as a result of the dismantling etc.,
will be considered as the Owner's property and will be disposed of to the best advantage of
the Owner.
9.
RATES, BILLS AND PAYMENTS
9.1.
MOBILISATION ADVANCE
(a)
The Owner will advance to the Contractor a sum equivalent to ten (10) percent of the Contract
Price, by way of Mobilization Advance (“Mobilization Advance”), subject to the Contractor,
submitting the following within a period of ten days from the date of issue of provisional
Letter of Award:
Bank Guarantee securing the Mobilization Advance from a nationalized bank in the Form
prescribed in Section 8 to the Bid Document, to the satisfaction of the Owner;
(b)
Performance Bank Guarantee for a sum equivalent to Rs. 10,00,000/- (Rupees Ten Lacs) only
from a nationalized bank in the Form prescribed in Section 7 to the Bid Document, to the
satisfaction of the Owner;
(c)
Cover Note for a comprehensive All Risks Cover insurance policy for the Works;
(d)
Registration, or proof of applying for registration from the appropriate authority under the
State Government of Delhi, for registration under the Contract Labour Act/ Inter State
Migrant Workmen Act; and
(e)
Organization structure with resume of engineer in charge and other supporting staff, who will
be assigned for performance of Work, by the Contractor.
The Mobilization Advance shall be deducted prorata from each running bill commencing from the
second running bill and ending with the pre-final bill, such that the entire Mobilization
Advance shall be recovered before the final bill is submitted, by the Contractor.
9.2.
RETENTION MONEY
The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from each running bill a sum equivalent to five (5) per
cent of the running bill, and retain the said sum with the Owner (the “Retention Amount”).
The Owner shall be entitled to retain the Retention Amount with it, free of interest, until the
Contractor has duly performed and fulfilled all its obligations under the Bid Documents and
the Contract Agreement. The Owner shall release fifty (50) percent of the Retention Amount,
subject to deduction of any amount/sums due to the Owner, on successful completion of
execution of the Work and issue of Completion Certificate by the Consultants. The Owner
shall retain the balance fifty (50) percent of Retention Amount until the Contractor has duly
completed and fulfilled all its obligations or until expiration of the Defects Liability Period,
whichever date occurs later.
9.3
SCHEDULE OF RATES AND PAYMENTS
Ideal Structures
Page 35 of 185
9.3.1
The Contract Price to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor for the Work to be done and for
the performance of all the obligations undertaken by the Contractor under Contract Agreement
shall be ascertained by the application of the respective rates (the inclusive nature of which is
more particularly defined by way of application but not of limitation, with the succeeding sub
clauses of this clause) and payment to be made accordingly for the Work actually executed and
approved by the Engineer in Charge. The sum so ascertained shall (excepting only as and to the
extent expressly provided herein) constitute the sole and inclusive remuneration of the
Contractor under Contract Agreement and no further or other payment whatsoever shall be or
become due or payable to the Contractor under Contract Agreement.
9.3.2
The prices / rates quoted by the Contractor shall remain firm till the issue of Final Certificate
and shall not be subject to escalation. Rates shall be deemed to include and cover all costs,
expenses and liabilities of every description and all risks of every kind to be taken in executing,
completing and handing over Work to the Owner by Contractor. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have known the nature, scope magnitude and the extent of Work and materials
required though Contract Documents may not fully and precisely furnish them. The Contractor
shall make such provision in the Rates as the Contractor may consider necessary to cover the
cost of such items of the Work and materials as may be reasonable and necessary to complete
the Work. The opinion of the Consultants as to the items of the Work, which are necessary and
reasonable for completion of the Work, shall be final and binding on the Contractor, although
the same may not be shown on or described specifically in Contract Document.
9.3.3
The Rates quoted shall be the landed cost at the Site and shall be inclusive of all present and
future taxes, duties, rates, imposts, levies, octroi, charges, surcharges and other charges in the
nature of tax, inclusive inter alia sales tax, commercial tax, value added tax, works contract tax,
excluding service tax (collectively the “Taxes”). The Owner will not entertain any claim
whatsoever in this respect and all rates quoted shall include for all taxes and duties. Rates
quoted shall remain firm till the entire Work is executed. The Owner shall not entertain any
request or claim for any revision of any rates on any account whatsoever. Without in any way
limiting the obligations of the Contractor, in the event any such Tax or Taxes are paid or
required to be paid by the Owner for any reason whatsoever, the Contractor shall promptly
reimburse to the Owner the amount paid by the Owner.
9.3.4
Without in any way limiting the provisions of the preceding sub-clause, the Rates shall be
deemed to include and cover the cost of all construction plant and equipment, temporary work,
pumps, materials, labour, insurance, fuel, stores and appliances to be supplied by the
Contractor and all other matters in connection with each item in the Rates and the execution of
Work or any portion thereof finished, complete in every respect and maintained as shown
described in the Contract Documents or as may be ordered in writing during the continuance of
Contract Agreement.
9.3.5
The Rates shall be deemed to include and cover the cost of all royalties and fees for the articles,
and processes, protected by letters, patent or otherwise incorporated in or used in connection
with Work, also all royalties, rents, and other payments in connection with obtaining materials
of whatsoever kind for Work and shall include an indemnity to the Owner which Contractor
hereby gives against all actions, proceedings, claims, damages, costs and expenses arising from
the incorporation in or use on Work of any such articles, processes or materials, octroi, works
contract tax or other Municipal or Local Board charges if levied on materials, Equipment or
machineries to be brought to Site for use on Work shall be borne by Contractor.
Ideal Structures
Page 36 of 185
9.3.6
The Rates shall be deemed to include and cover risk of all possibilities of delay and interference
with Contractor's conduct of Work which occur from any cause including orders of the Owner
in the exercise of its powers and on account of extension of time granted due to various reasons
and for all other possible or probable causes of delay.
9.3.7
The Contract Price are fully inclusive rates which have been fixed by Contractor and agreed to
by the Owner and cannot be altered.
9.4
PROCEDURE FOR MEASUREMENT/BILLING OF WORK IN PROGRESS
9.4.1
All the Work in progress will be jointly measured by the representative of the Engineer in
Charge, and Contractor's authorized agent progressively. Measurements will be recorded by
the Engineer in Charge or his authorized representative and signed by Contractor or its
authorized representative in the measurement book to be provided by the Contractor. For the
purpose of taking joint measurements Contractor's representative shall be bound to be present
whenever required by the Engineer in Charge. If, however, he is absent for any reason
whatsoever the measurements will be taken by the Engineer in Charge or his representative and
this will be deemed to be correct and binding on Contractor. In case of disputes as to the mode
of measurement of any work the Engineer in Charge’s directions shall be followed.
9.4.2.
The Contractor will submit a Bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the Engineer in
Charge giving abstract and detailed measurements for the various items executed during a
month. The Engineer in Charge shall take or cause to be taken the requisite measurements for
the purpose of having the same verified and the claim, as far as admissible, adjusted, if possible,
before the presentation of the bill.
9.5
RUNNING BILLS
9.5.1
The Contractor shall raise a running bill, when value of work executed touches 10% of the total
contract price.
9.5.2
The Contractor shall submit the running bill duly checked by the Engineer in Charge, to the
Consultants, who may approve, restrict, re-assess, or reduce the amount payable against the
running bill, at its sole discretion and certify the running bill for payment to the Owner, within
Seven (7) days from the receipt of the running bill from the Contractor.
9.5.3
Upon receipt of the certification of the running bill for payment along with the running bill for
which such certification was issued, the Owner shall make payment of the value certified by the
Consultants, within a period of Ten (10) days from the date of receipt of the same, from the
Consultants.
9.5.4
All payments shall be made in Indian Currency.
9.6
RUNNING ACCOUNT PAYMENTS TO BE REGARDED AS ADVANCES
All running account payments shall be regarded as payments by way of advance against the
final payment only and not as payment for Work actually done and completed and shall not
preclude the requiring of bad, unsound and imperfect or unskilled Work to be removed and
taken away and reconstructed or re-erected or be considered as an admission of the due
performance of Contract Agreement, or any part thereof, in the respect, or of the accruing of any
claim by Contractor, nor shall it conclude, determine or affect in any way the powers of the
Ideal Structures
Page 37 of 185
Owner under these conditions or any of them as to the final settlement and adjustments of the
accounts or otherwise, or in any other way vary or affect Contract Agreement.
9.7.
PAYMENT OF FINAL BILL
9.7.1.
The Contractor shall submit the final bill within one (1) month of the date of physical
completion of the Work. In case the Contractor fails to submit the final bill within the time
specified above, the Consultants may issue a statement showing the measurement and the
amount payable, which shall be binding on all the parties concerned.
9.7.2.
The amount payable on the final bill shall be the value of the final bill less all payments made on
the running account bills, the value of the retention money recovered on the running account
bills and any amount payable to the Owner by the Contractor.
9.7.3.
The Contractor shall present the final bill, along with a 'No Claim Certificate’ in a format
acceptable to the Owner together with such other documents as directed by the Owner, within
one (1) month from the date of physical completion of the Work.
9.7.4.
The final bill will be processed and certified by the Consultants only subject to the Contractor
performing and fulfilling all its obligations including the requirements set forth in Clause 8.1.14
above.
9.7.5.
In case, any amount over and above, the amount(s) covered under the Performance Guarantee
is deductible at the sole discretion of the Owner, the Owner shall deduct such amounts, as
assessed, from the payment against the final bill.
9.7.6
The Owner shall process the final bill presented by the Contractor for payment, only after
receipt of Completion Certificate, from the Consultants.
9.8.
RECEIPT FOR PAYMENT
Receipt for payment made on account of Work when executed by a firm must be signed by a
person holding due power of attorney in this respect on behalf of Contractor, except when
described in Tender as a Limited Company in which case the receipt must be signed in the
name of the Company by one of its principal officers or by some other person having authority
to give effectual receipt for the Company.
9.9
ESCALATION:
No escalation in accepted rates due to increase in prices of materials, labour, transport, fuel,
taxes, duties or levies or any other cause - direct or indirect, is acceptable and rates specified
hereunder (Section 05) shall remain firm till the completion of the Contract Agreement.
10.
TAXES AND INSURANCE
Ideal Structures
Page 38 of 185
10.1
TAXES, DUTIES, OCTROI ETC.
All present and future Taxes including customs, excise, additional duties/tax, Entry Tax, LAD
Tax, Octroi, Cess, imposition of any nature whatsoever, except Service Tax as applicable from
time to time shall be exclusively borne by the Contractor and are deemed to be included in the
Contract Price. Tax deducted at source for Income tax and any other levies/taxes, deductible at
source shall be deducted as per rules and regulations in force in accordance with acts prevailing
from time to time at the prevailing rates by the Owner from the bills raised by the Contractor.
10.2
COMPREHENSIVE INSURANCE
10.2.1. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, insure and keep in full force till Consultants certify
completion of the Work, an ‘All Risks Policy’ of Insurance including earthquake risk and any
liability under the Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 as well as take insurance policy under the
Workmen’s Compensation Act, Employer’s Liability Insurance for the full Contract Price with
an insurance company approved by the Owner, in the joint names of the Owner and the
Contractor, designating the Owner in the Insurance Policy as “Loss Payee” and deposit such
Cover Note, Insurance Policy and cover note/ insurance policies issued, in renewal thereof.
10.2.2. The Contractor shall reinstate all damage of every sort mentioned in this clause so as to deliver
up the whole of the Work complete and perfect in every respect and so as to make good or
otherwise satisfy all claims for damage to property of third parties.
10.2.3. The Contractor shall, upon settlement by the Insurer of any claim made against the insurer
pursuant to a policy taken under this clause, proceed with due diligence to rebuild or repair the
works destroyed or damaged. In this event all the moneis/amount received from the Insurer in
respect of such damage shall be paid to the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled
to any further payment in respect of the expenditure incurred for rebuilding or repairing of the
materials or goods destroyed or damaged.
10.2.4. The Contractor, in case of re-building or reinstatement after fire, shall be entitled to such
extension of time for completion as the Owner may deem fit, but shall, however, not be entitled
to reimbursement by the Owner of any shortfall or deficiency in the amount finally paid by the
insurer in settlement of any claim arising as set out herein. Any extension of time so granted
shall be subject to no additional costs for the extended period.
10.3
Other Insurance:
10.3.1 Commercial General Liability insurance, including contractual liability coverage with respect to
any indemnifications set forth in this Agreement, in form providing coverage not less than that
of the standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy and insuring the Contractor
with bodily injury (including death) limits of Rs. 1,00,000.00 per occurrence and property
damage limits of Rs.1,00,000.00 (Rupees one lakh only) per occurrence;
10.3.2 All vehicles owned by the Contractor shall valid and subsisting insurance cover including third
party damage and in addition, if the Contractor is using hired vehicles, he shall ensure that such
vehicles have insurance cover in accordance with Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability
insurance policy.
Ideal Structures
Page 39 of 185
10.4
EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE
Within a period of seven (7) days from the execution of the Contract Agreement and in any
case prior to commencement of Work under the Contract Agreement, the Contractor shall
provide copies of the Insurance Cover Note for the policies indicated in Clause 10.2 and 10.3
above, to the Owner. The validity period of the insurance coverage for insurance policies
dealt with under Clause 10.2 and 10.3 shall be till expiry of the Defect Liability Period. The
Contract of Insurance shall indicate the Contractor as the Insured and the Owner as the
additionally named insured/beneficiary (except in case of 10.3.5 above). Upon obtaining such
insurance coverage, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the Cover Note and on receipt of
the Contract of Insurance, a copy thereof, shall also be provided to the Owner.
10.5
Waiver of recovery:
The Contractor waives all rights of recovery against the Owner, subcontractors and/or
consultants which the Contractor may have or acquire because of deductible clauses in or
inadequacy of limits of any policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that
are secured and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall require all subcontractors
and consultants to waive the rights of recovery (as aforesaid waiver by the Contractor) against
the Owner, and other subcontractors or consultants.
11.
LABOUR LAWS COMPLIANCE
11.1.1. The Contractor shall comply with and observe all applicable laws, such as labour and
employment laws including Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act 1970 and the Rules
therein, Minimum Wages Act 1948, Employer’s State Insurance Act 1948 & the Rules,
Employer’s Provident Fund & Misc. Provisions Act 1952 and Employees Provident Fund Rules,
Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923 in relation to execution of the Work and shall be solely
responsible for all injury or damage to persons, animals or things, and for all damage to
property, which may arise from any factor on the part of the Contractor or any of the persons
employed by them. No person under the age of 18 shall be employed by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall at its expense comply with all labour laws, as applicable or as may be made
applicable, in respect of performance of its obligations under the Contract Agreement and shall
keep the Owner indemnified in all respect thereof, from and against any action taken by
statutory authorities or affected person(s) or third parties, against the Owner for noncompliance of the laws. The Contractor shall register himself and obtain necessary permissions
from the local Labour Commissioner’s office before commencement of the Work.
11.1.2. The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner and hold it harmless in
respect of all and any loss and expenses arising from any such injury or damage to persons or
property as aforesaid and also against any claim made in respect of injury or damage, whether
under any statutes or otherwise and also in respect of any award or compensation or damage
consequent upon such claim.
12.
12.1
COMPLIANCE WITH ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS
The Contractor shall take all precautions for safeguarding the environment during the course of
the construction of the Work. Contractor shall abide by all laws, rules and regulations in force
Ideal Structures
Page 40 of 185
governing construction, pollution and environmental protection, that are applicable in the area
where the site is situated.
12.2. The Contractor shall at its expense comply with all applicable environmental
laws/rules/guidelines and any other instructions issued by the authority having jurisdiction
over the Site and the Work and shall continue to comply with all such requirements, as may be
specified from time to time.
13.
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
13.1. The Contractor shall, within ten days of issue of the Provisional Letter of Award, submit to the
Owner a Performance Guarantee from a reputed Bank and in the form appended to the Tender
Documents and acceptable to the Owner, for a sum equivalent to Rs. Ten Lacs. The
Performance Guarantee shall be for a minimum duration of the time specified for execution of
the Work and for a further period of three months thereafter.
13.2. If it shall appear to the Engineer in Charge and or the Consultants that any Work has been
executed with unsound, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials of any inferior
description, or that any materials or articles provided by the Contractor for the execution of
Work are unsound, or of a quality inferior to that contracted for, or otherwise not in accordance
with Contract Agreement, the Contractor shall on demand in writing from the Engineer in
Charge and or the Consultants or his authorized representative specifying the Work, materials or
articles complained of, notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed,
certified and paid for, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct the Work, so specified and
provide other proper and suitable materials or articles at its own charge and cost, and in the
event of failure to do so within the period to be specified by the Engineer in Charge in his
demand aforesaid, the Engineer in Charge may on expiry of notice period rectify or remove and
re-execute the Work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles complained of as
the case may be at the risk and expense in all respects of the Contractor. The decision of the
Engineer in Charge as to any question arising under this clause shall be final and conclusive.
13.3. In the event the Contractor fails to perform or fulfill any of its obligations, the Owner may
without prejudice to its other rights and remedies, invoke the Performance Guarantee and forfeit
the amount realized by invoking the Performance Bank Guarantee.
14.
ACTION WHEN WHOLE OF PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE IS FORFEITED
In any case in which, under any clause or clauses of this Contract Agreement, the Owner
shall have the right to invoke the Performance Guarantee and forfeit whole or any part of the amount
realized by invoking the Performance Guarantee or the Contractor shall have committed a breach of
any of the terms contained in the Contract Agreement, the Owner shall have power to adopt any of
the following courses as the Owner may deem best suited to its interest.
To rescind the Contract Agreement (of which rescission notice in writing to the Contractor
under the hand of the Owner shall be conclusive evidence) in which case the Performance Guarantee
provided by the Contractor may be invoked and the amount realized may be forfeited to the Owner.
To measure up the Work of the Contractor and to take such part thereof as shall be
unexecuted out of its hand to give it to another Contractor to complete in which case any expenses
which may be incurred in excess of the sum which would have been paid to Contractor, if the Work
had been executed by him (the certificate in writing of the Engineer in Charge of the excess amount
Ideal Structures
Page 41 of 185
shall be final and conclusive) shall be borne and paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from
any money due to him by the Owner under the Contract Agreement or otherwise or from its Security
Deposit or from the proceeds of sale thereof, of a sufficient part thereof.
In the event of any of the above course being adopted by the Owner, the Contractor shall have no
claim to compensation for any loss sustained by him by reason of its having purchased or procured
any materials or entered into any agreements or made any advances on account of or with a view to
the execution of the Work of the performance of the Contract Agreement. In case the Contract
Agreement shall be rescinded under the provision aforesaid the Contractor shall not be entitled to
recover or be paid any sum for any Work actually performed under this Contract Agreement unless
the Engineer in Charge will certify in writing the performance of such work, and the value payable in
respect thereof and he shall only be entitled to be paid the value so certified, after recoveries and
deductions if any to be made by the Owner as per Contract Agreement.
15.
LIABILITY TO PAY COMPENSATION, IF ACTION NOT TAKEN AS ABOVE
In any case in which any of the powers conferred upon the Owner as above hereof shall have become
exercisable and the same had not been exercised, the non- exercise thereof shall not constitute a waiver
of any of the rights available to the Owner and shall not exercise of such rights by the Owner at a
subsequent or later point in time and the liability of the Contractor for past and future compensation
shall remain unaffected. In the event of the Owner exercising its rights, the Owner may, at its option
and without prejudice to other rights and remedies available to the Owner, take possession of all or
any tools and plants, materials and stores in or upon the Work or the Site belonging to the Contractor
or procured by the Contractor and intended to be used for the execution of the Work or any part
thereof paying or allowing for the same in account at the contract rates or in the case of these not being
applicable at current market rates to be certified by the Engineer in Charge, whose certificate thereof
shall be final. Otherwise, the Engineer in Charge may give notice in writing to the Contractor or its
foreman or other authorized agent, requiring him to remove such tools, plant, materials or stores from
the premises (within a time to be specified in such notice), and in the event of the Contractor failing to
comply with any such requisition, the Engineer in Charge may remove them at the Contractor’s
expense or sell them by auction or private sale on account of the Contractor and at its risk in all
respects without any further notice as to the date, time or place of sale and the certificate of the
Engineer in Charge as to the expense of any such removal and the amount of the proceeds and
expense of any such sale shall be final and conclusive against the Contractor.
16.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY
If Contractor fails to complete the Work within the agreed time schedule as given in the Bar Chart or
such extended time schedule as intimated by the Owner in writing, as the case may be, the Contractor
shall be liable to pay liquidated damages to the Owner at the rate of 0.2% of the Contract Price, per
day of delay, subject to a maximum of 5% (Five percent) of the Contract Price. The obligation to pay
liquidated damages shall not affect the Owners right to seek and enforce indemnity obligations
against the Contractor, nor shall the liquidated damages specified in this clause 16, operate as a cap on
the Contractor’s liability under the indemnity obligations specified in Clause 23 below.
17.
POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION
The Owner shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially completed
items of Work or part of Work. Such possession or use shall not be deemed to be an acceptance of any
Work completed in accordance with the Contract Agreement. If such possession or use by the Owner,
Ideal Structures
Page 42 of 185
delays the progress of Work, equitable adjustment in the time of completion will be made, at the sole
discretion of the Owner and the Contractor shall be notified accordingly.
18.
18.1
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
When Contractor fulfils its obligations under the Contract Agreement in executing the Work
including without limitation its obligations set forth in Clause 8.1.14 and 8.1.15 above, the
Contractor shall be eligible to apply for the Completion Certificate. In case the Owner requires
completion and handing over of the Work in parts, the Contractor may apply for separate
Completion Certificate in respect of each such portion of Work, by submitting the completion
documents along with such application for the Completion Certificate, to the Consultants.
The Consultants shall verify the documents submitted by the Contractor and after satisfying
themselves that the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents,
issue the Completion Certificate to the Owner.
18.2
The Owner shall process the final bill presented by the Contractor for payment only after
receipt of Completion Certificate, from the Consultants.
18.3
It is expressly understood that the Contractor shall apply for Completion Certificate only after
measurements are verified by the Consultants and only after the Contractor has removed all
scaffolding, surplus materials, rubbish, temporary works, labour and staff colonies etc.
constructed/erected, from the Site completely, to the complete satisfaction of Engineer in
Charge. The measurements of the Consultants shall be binding and conclusive.
18.4
If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirement of the preceding clause on or before the
date fixed for the completion of Work, the Consultants/ Engineer in Charge may at the expense
of the Contractor remove such scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish, temporary works and
dispose off, the same as they may think fit and also clear off, the labour and staff colonies etc.
erected at Site as aforesaid, and deduct such amounts, as may be considered appropriate, from
the final bill. The Contractor shall have no claim in respect of any such scaffolding or surplus
materials as aforesaid except for any sum that may have been actually realized by the sale
thereof.
18.5
For the purpose of applying for Completion Certificate, the following documents will be
deemed to form the Completion Documents:
i)
Test Certificates of the materials supplied
ii)
Results of any tests conducted
iii) Certificate of final completion as set out, for various works, if applicable.
19.
PERIOD OF DEFECTS LIABILITY / PERFORMANCE
19.1
The Contractor shall guarantee the construction of the Work for a period of Twelve (12)
months from the date of completion of work against all damages and defects including any
defect in quality and standards of construction, workmanship and quality of materials used in
the construction. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the completion of
the Work, connected in any way with the equipment or materials supplied by the Contractor
or in the workmanship shall be rectified or replaced by the Contractor at its own expense as
Ideal Structures
Page 43 of 185
deemed necessary by the Consultants or the Owner and in default, the Consultants may cause
the same to be made good by other workmen and deduct all costs and expenses (of which the
certificate of Consultants shall be final) from any sums that may be then or at any time
thereafter, become due to the Contractor or from the Retention Amount or any other sum due
or payable to the Contractor.
19.2
In case the Consultants or the Owner notifies any defect in any item of the Work or any
portion of the Work, during the validity of the Defect Liability Period, the Contractor shall
forthwith attend to and take such remedial steps to cure the defect, to the satisfaction of the
Consultants / the Owner. The Defect Liability Period for such item of work, or portion of
work shall commence afresh and the period of Defect Liability Period for such item of work
shall be Eighteen (18) months from the date of curing the defect in such item of work.
19.3
If Contractor feels that any variation in work or in quality of materials or proportions would
be beneficial or necessary to fulfill guarantee called for, he shall bring this to the notice of the
Engineer in Charge in writing.
19.4
From the commencement of execution of the Work until completion thereof, the Contractor
shall take and assume full responsibility for the Work including all temporary works and in
case any damages, loss or injury shall happen to the Work or to any part thereof or to any
temporary works from any cause whatsoever, shall at its own cost repair and make good the
same so that at completion Work shall be in good order and in conformity, in every respects,
with the requirements of Contract Agreement and the Engineer in Charge's instructions.
19.5.
If at any time, before taking over possession of the Work, whether completed or not, the
Consultants reasonably (a) forms an opinion that any part of the Work done or materials used
by the Contractor is defective or is not in accordance with Specifications, or that the Work or
any portion thereof is defective, or do not conform to the quality standards and workmanship
applicable (hereinafter collectively the “Defects”) and (b) as soon as reasonably practicable
thereafter gives to Contractor notice in writing of such Defects, specifying particulars of such
Defects, then Contractor shall at its own expense and with all speed make good the defects so
specified.
19.6.
In case the Contractor shall fail to do so, the Owner may take, at the cost of Contractor, such
steps as may in all circumstances, be reasonable to make good such defects. The expenditure
so incurred by Owner will be recovered from the amount due to Contractor. The decision of
the Consultants with regard to the amount to be recovered from Contractor will be final and
binding on Contractor.
19.7.
In order that Contractor could obtain a Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall make
good, with all possible speed any defect arising from the defective materials supplied by
Contractor or workmanship or any act or omission of Contract Agreement that may have been
noticed or developed, after the Work or group of Work has been taken over, the period
allowed for carrying out such Work will be normally one (1) month. If any defect be not
remedied within a reasonable time, the Owner may proceed to do Work at Contractor's risk
and expense and deduct from the Final Bill such amounts as may be decided by the
Consultants. If by reason of any default on the part of Contractor a Completion Certificate has
not been issued in respect of every portion of Work within one (1) month after the date fixed
by Contractor for the completion of Work, the Owner shall be at liberty to use Work or any
portion thereof, which has been completed. The Contractor shall be afforded reasonable
opportunity for completing the Work for the issue of Completion Certificate.
Ideal Structures
Page 44 of 185
20.
FINAL DECISION AND FINAL CERTIFICATE
Upon expiry of the Defect Liability Period and subject to the Consultants being satisfied that
the Work has been duly maintained by the Contractor, during such period as hereinbefore
provided and the Contractor has performed and fulfilled all its obligations, under Contract
Agreement, the Consultants shall issue the Final Certificate to the Contractor. The Final
Certificate shall evidence due performance and fulfillment by the Contractor of its obligations
under the Contract Agreement. Until the Final Certificate is issued, the Contractor shall not be
considered to have performed and fulfilled its obligation sunder the Contract Agreement.
21
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS AND ROYALTIES
The Contractor, if licensed under any patent covering equipment, machinery, materials or
compositions of matter to be used or supplied or methods and process to be practiced or
employed in the performance of this Contract Agreement, agrees to pay all royalties and
licence fees, which may be due with respect thereto. If any equipment, machinery, materials,
composition matters, to be used or supplied or methods and processes to be practiced or
employed in the performance of this Contract Agreement, is covered by a patent under which
the Contractor is not licensed then the Contractor before supplying or using the Equipment,
Machinery, Materials, compositions method or processes shall obtain such licences, and pay
such royalties and license fees as may be necessary for performance of the Contract
Agreement. In case of any violation/infringement of any of the rights of third parties in
relation to its intellectual property rights and royalties thereto, the Contractor, indemnifies the
Owner in relation to any claim whatsoever, in this regard.
22.
NON DISCLOSURE AND CONFIDENTIALITY
22.1
The Contractor agrees not to disclose to third parties, without the written consent of the
Owner any information which relates to the technical, commercial or business activities or the
business of Owner or their affiliates (the “Confidential Information”) obtained from or
through Owner or Owner employees, agents, consultants or other representatives in
connection with the performance of this Agreement.
22.2
Contractor further agrees that it will not, without the express prior written consent of Owner,
disclose to any third party any information developed or obtained by Contractor in the
performance of Work.
22.3
The Contractor shall ensure that all his employees, agents, representatives and others working
at site or in relation to the performance of the Work, at all times maintain confidentiality in
respect of the nature of the Work, specifications, drawings and all other information relating to
the Work.
22.4
The obligations of Contractor under this Clause shall survive termination of this Agreement.
23.
CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER
23.1
The Contractor shall duly observe and comply with in all respects all laws and regulations
applicable to performance and fulfillment by the Contractor of its obligations under the
Ideal Structures
Page 45 of 185
Contract Agreement or in relation to execution of the Work by the Contractor or in relation to
employment of labour for execution of the Work.
23.2
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner and its directors, officers,
employees, shareholders, agents and consultants from and against all actions, proceedings,
claims, demands, costs and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the Work
and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs and expenses which may be made against
the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any failure by Contractor in the performance or
fulfillment of its obligations, covenants, representations or warranties under the Contract
Documents. The Owner shall not be liable for or in respect of any demand or compensation
payable by law in respect of or in consequence of any accident, death or injury to any
workman or other person in the employment of Contractor or his sub-Contractors and the
Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner against all such damages and
compensations and against all claims, damages, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses
whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.
23.3
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner and its directors, officers,
employees, shareholders, agents and consultants from and against all actions, proceedings,
claims, demands, costs and expenses whatsoever made by any third party, including without
limitation by any suppliers, vendors, Contractors or sub-Contractors or labour employed or
engaged by the Contractor in or in relation to the execution of the Work.
23.4
The liability under this shall cover inter alia, any damage to structures, whether immediately
adjacent to the works or otherwise, any damage to roads, streets, footpaths, bridges as well as
damage caused to the buildings and other structures and works forming the subject matter of
this contract. The Contractor shall also be responsible for any damage caused to the buildings
and other structures and works forming the subject matter of this contract due to rain, wind,
frost or other inclement of weather.
23.5
The Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Owner any loss
of article any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or being
executed or procured or being procured by the Owner of other Agencies within the premises
of all Work of the Owner if such loss or damage is due to fault and / or the negligence or
willful acts of omission of Contractor, its employee's agents, representatives or sub
Contractors.
24. ASSIGNMENT
The Contractor shall execute the entire Work by itself. The Contractor shall not assign or
transfer, directly or indirectly, the Contract Agreement or the whole or any part of the Work.
However, the Owner shall have the right to assign in favour of any party, with prior
intimation to the Contractor.
25.
LIENS
25.1
If, any time, there should be evidence of any lien or claim for which the Owner might have
become liable and which is chargeable to the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to
retain out of any payment then due or thereafter to become due an amount sufficient to
completely indemnify the Owner against lien or claim and if such lien or claim be valid the
Owner may pay and discharge the same and deduct the amount so paid from any money
which may be or may become due and payable to the Contractor. If any lien or claim remain
Ideal Structures
Page 46 of 185
unsettled after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund or pay to the Owner all
moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay discharging such lien or claim including all
costs and reasonable expenses.
25.2
The Owner shall have general lien over all tools, equipment, machinery and materials etc.
belonging to the Contractor for any amount due from the Contractor to the Owner on any
account.
26.
FORCE MAJEURE
Any delays in or failure of the performance of obligations by either party hereto shall not
constitute default hereunder or give rise to any claims for damages, if any, to the extent such
delays or failure of performance is caused by occurrences of acts of any alien enemy,
expropriation or confiscation of facilities by government authorities, any war, rebellion or
sabotage or earthquake, fires, floods, explosions, riots or illegal strikes (the “Force Majeure”),
provided the affected party gives prompt notice thereof to the other party in writing and takes
all possible action to minimize the interruption of Work because of such Force Majeure event
and resumes work promptly upon cessation of such Force Majeure event. If the Force Majeure
persists for two months, then either party may proceed to terminate the Contract Agreement.
27.
RIGHT OF OWNER TO DETERMINE / TERMINATE CONTRACT
27.1
The Owner shall, at any time, be entitled to determine and terminate the Contract Agreement, if
in the opinion of the Owner the cessation of the Work becomes necessary owing to any cause
whatsoever, in which case the cost of approved materials at the Site at specified rates as verified
and approved by Engineer in Charge and of the Work done to date by the Contractor shall be
paid for in full at the rate specified in the Contract Agreement. A communication in writing
from the Owner to the Contractor of such determination and termination shall be the
conclusive proof of the fact that the Contract Agreement has been so determined and
terminated by the Owner.
27.2
Should the Contract Agreement be determined under the above clause and the Contractor
claims payment to compensate expenditure incurred by him in the expectation of completing
the Work, the Owner shall consider and admit such claim as is deemed fair and reasonable and
supported by the vouchers to the satisfaction of the Consultants . The Owner’s decision on the
necessity and Propriety of such expenditure shall be final and conclusive and binding on the
Contractor.
27.3 If an order of winding up is passed by the Court of appropriate jurisdiction or if any Official
Liquidator or Provisional Liquidator is appointed by the Court/ Tribunal of appropriate
jurisdiction and/ a reference is filed under the Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions)
Act, 1985 as amended or any enactment made in replacement thereof is filed or any Order of
attachment is passed under the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and
Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002, as amended or any enactment made in
replacement thereof is passed against the Contractor, the Owner can forthwith terminate the
Contract Agreement, without assigning any reason
27.4 In the following cases, the Owner can terminate the Contract Agreement by giving seven (7)
days notice:
a)
where the Contractor has abandoned the contract, or
Ideal Structures
Page 47 of 185
b)
c)
Contractor has failed to commence the works, or has without any lawful excuse under these
conditions suspended the progress of works for seven (7) days after receiving from the
Consultants/ Owner written notice to proceed/continue, or
Contractor has failed to proceed with the works with such due diligence and fail to make due
progress as would enable the works to be completed within the time agreed upon,
d)
Contractor has failed to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace work for
seven days after receiving from the Consultants written notice that the said materials or
works were condemned and rejected by the Consultants under these conditions, or
e)
Contractor has neglected or failed persistently to observe and perform all or any of the acts,
matters or things by this contract to be observed and performed by the Contractor for seven
days after written notice shall have been given to the Contractor requiring the Contractor to
observe or perform the same, or
f)
Contractor has sublet any part of the contract.
28.
RESOLUTION OF DIFFERENCES BY MEDIATION:
28.1
All differences of any kind whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the Contract
Agreement, whether during the progress of the Work or after their completion shall be referred
by the Contractor to the Consultants and the Consultants shall within a reasonable time after
their presentation make and notify decisions thereon. The decision of the Consultants shall be
final and binding on the parties.
28.2
The decisions, directions, clarifications, measurements, drawings and certificates with
respect to any matter the decision for which is specifically provided for by these or other
special conditions to be given and made by the Consultants are matters which are referred to
hereinafter as excepted matters and shall be final and binding upon the Contractor and shall
not be set aside on account of non-observance of any formality, any omission, delay or error in
proceeding in or about the same or on any other ground or for any reason and shall be final.
The Parties hereto agree that they shall use all reasonable efforts to resolve between
themselves any disputes, differences, controversy, or claims arising out of or in relation to this
Agreement.
28.3
Unless the Owner otherwise instructs in writing, the Contractor shall continue to perform its
obligations under this Agreement during the pendency of any proceedings instituted
hereunder (or any law suit arising out of this Agreement) as if the said proceedings or law suit
had not been instituted
28A.ARBITRATION:
28A.1 If any dispute, difference, controversy or claim between the Parties in connection with this
Agreement including without limitation, on the existence, validity, interpretation,
implementation or alleged breach of the terms of the Agreement or anything done or omitted
to be done pursuant to this Agreement (“the Dispute”) cannot be resolved per Clause 28
above, within seven (7) days after commencement, then the Dispute may be submitted by
either Party for resolution by final and binding arbitration in accordance with the Arbitration
and Conciliation Act, 1996 by a Sole Arbitrator, to be nominated by the Owner, subject to the
stipulation that the Sole Arbitrator shall not be connected with the Owner in any manner
whatsoever, either in the past or present.
Ideal Structures
Page 48 of 185
28A.2 The language for arbitration shall be in English, and the place of arbitration shall be in New
Delhi.
29.
SET OFF
Any sum of money due and payable to the Contractor (including Retention Amount) under
this Contract may be appropriated by the Owner and set off the same against any claim of the
Owner arising out of the Contract Agreement.
30.
JURISDICTION
All disputes and differences arising out of, in connection or relating to the Contract
Agreement shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of Courts in New Delhi.
31.
INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTICES
31.1 Subject to otherwise provided in this Contract Agreement, all notices to be given and all other
actions to be taken on behalf of the Owner might be given to the Engineer in Charge with a
copy to the Owner addressed as follows:
The Principal,
ARSD College,
Dhaula Kuan,
New Delhi – 110 021
Mail id: [email protected]
Tel: +91 11 2411 3436
31.2 All instructions, notices and communications etc. under the Contract Agreement shall be
given in writing and if sent by registered post to the following address or the last known place
of abode or business of the Contractor, as the case may be, shall be deemed to have been
served on the date when in the ordinary course of post these would have been delivered to
him:
Name and Full Address of Contractor:
Tel No.:
Fax No.:
31.3 The Contractor or its representative shall be in attendance at the Site(s) during all working
hours and shall superintend the execution of the work with such additional assistance in each
trade as the Consultants, Engineer in Charge may consider necessary. Orders given to the
Contractor's representative shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been
given to the Contractor himself.
Ideal Structures
Page 49 of 185
SECTION – 3: CONTRACT AGREEMENT
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
This CONTRACT AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) made this ______ day of _____________ Two
Thousand and Thirteen, at New Delhi, by and between ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi
(“Owner”), an existing college under the University of Delhi, hereinafter referred to as the “Owner”
(which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, be deemed to mean
and include its successors and permitted assigns), represented by its Principal/OSD, of the One
Part;
And
______________________________________________ ("Contractor"), a company incorporated,
existing and functioning under the
___________ and having its registered office at
_______________________(which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning
thereof, be deemed to mean and include its successors and permitted assigns), represented by its
__________[title], Mr. _____________[name], who has been duly authorized by a Resolution passed
by the Board of Directors of the Contractor in its meeting held on _________, of the Other Part.
WHEREAS the Owner is desirous of making Retrofit of existing GF & FF for earthquake,
Modifications of front entrance & compound wall, Construction of New Ramp for Physically
Challenged & Emergency Stairs at, ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi, India. Hereinafter
referred as “The work” and has caused Drawings, Specifications and probable Bill of Quantities
showing and describing the work to be done, to be prepared by Shri R.Narendrakumar, B.E.(Hons),
M.E.(St), having his office “IDEAL STRUCTURES” at 11, Avvaiyar Street, Singarayar Colony,
Madurai 625 002, hereinafter referred as “The Consultant”. Consultants of the Owner, has issued
Invitation to Bid along with Bid Documents for “Retrofitting of existing GF & FF for Earthquake,
Modifications of Main entrance & Compound wall; Construction of new ramp for Physically
Challenged & Emergency stairs” at ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi” (“Work”) and in
response to such invitation, the Contractor has submitted its Bid Proposal;
WHEREAS on evaluation of the Bid Proposals received, the Owner has accepted the Bid Proposal
submitted by the Contractor and has issued the Letter of Award vide letter No. ______ dated
________ to the Contractor, subject to simultaneous execution of this Contract Agreement:
WHEREAS as stipulated in the Letter of Award, the Contractor has provided a Performance Bank
Guarantee for the due performance and fulfillment by the Contractor of its obligations; together
with the bank guarantee towards the mobilization advance to be paid by the Owner and
WHEREAS the Contractor represents that it has examined the Bid Documents including the
Annexure /Schedules forming part thereof and has obtained its own information in all matters
whatsoever that might affect the carrying out the Work at the Scheduled Rates and has satisfied itself
to the sufficiency of the consideration to be paid by the Owner, for execution of the Work
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED BY AND BETWEEN THE PARTIES HERETO AS FOLLOWS:
Ideal Structures
Page 50 of 185
1.
In consideration of the payments to be made by the Owner to the Contractor for the Work to
be executed by the Contractor, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Owner that the Contractor
shall and will duly provide, execute, complete and maintain the said Work and shall duly perform,
fulfill and observe all its obligations under this Agreement or which are to be implied there from or
as may be reasonably necessary for the completion of the said Works in the manner and subject to
the terms and conditions or stipulations mentioned herein and the Annexures/ Schedules.
2.
The Owner does hereby agree with the Contractor that the Owner will pay to the
Contractor, in the manner set forth in the Bid Documents, the respective amounts for the Work
actually done by the Contractor and such other sum payable to the Contractor specifically provided
for in the Bid Documents, such payment to be made at such time in such manner, as specified in the
Bid Documents, attached hereto as Schedule and forming part of this Agreement.
3.
It is specifically and clearly understood and agreed between the Owner and the Contractor,
that the Contractor shall have no right, title or interest to the Site made available by the Owner for
execution of the Works or in the Work to be executed thereat or in the materials, articles or
equipment brought to the Site or used in execution of the Work (unless the same specifically belongs
to the Contractor) and the Contractor shall not have or deemed to have any lien whatsoever for
unpaid bills. The Contractor will not be entitled to assume or retain possession or control of the Site
or structures and the Owner shall have absolute and unfettered right to take full possession of Site
and to remove or evict the Contractor, its servants and agents and materials belonging to the
Contractor and lying on the Site, at any time during the subsistence of this Agreement or thereafter.
4.
The Owner through the Consultants reserves the right of altering the drawings,
specifications, quantities, nature of the work or part thereof and the same shall be performed by the
Contractor, subject to the terms and conditions specified in the General Conditions of Contract and
other Annexures/ Schedules to this Agreement. Further, the Owner has the right to carry out any
part of the awarded Work itself or through any other Contractor, or otherwise and the Contractor
shall not object, resist or in way hinder such performance.
5.
The following documents shall form part of the Contract Agreement and shall be
incorporated herein by reference and read as part of this Agreement, namely:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Instructions to the Bidders – Section 01;
General Conditions of Contract – Section 02;
Specifications of the Work- Section 04;
Bill of Quantities and Rate Schedule – Section 05;
List of approved makes– Section 06;
Bank Guarantee for Performance – Section 07;
Bank Guarantee towards Mobilization Advance – Section 08; and
Bid Proposal Submission Form – Section09;
Both Parties have read and understood the terms and conditions of this Agreement and on these terms
agree to accept and be bound by all terms on the signing of the Agreement by their respective
authorized signatories.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have set their respective hands on the day and the year
herein above written
Ideal Structures
Page 51 of 185
Signed and delivered by the within named
For ARSD College,
in the presence of:
Principal/OSD
_________________________
Signed and delivered by the within named
For _____________________________
in the presence of:
[Name of the Contractor]
_______________________
Name:
Title:
Witnesses:
1.0
2.0
Ideal Structures
Page 52 of 185
4. GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.1
4.1.1
General
Applicabilty:
a)
These Specifications shall be read in conjunction with other documents forming the
Contract, viz: Tender Notice, General Conditions of Contract including Form of Tender,
Invitation to Tender and Articles of Agreement for Construction Work, Special Conditions
of Contract, Bill of Quantities (BOQ) and Drawings.
b)
All the conditions specified in the above documents shall apply unless otherwise
specifically indicated herein to the contrary, in regard to all aspects of the work, coverage
of costs, enabling and attendant works and actions required of the Contractor.
c)
The specifications for various types of work are included herein, segregated into chapters.
Such chapterisation does not preclude application of the specifications to similar works
covered / not covered in any chapter as above.
4.1.2 Quality:
a)
The methodologies and systems to be followed for quality assurance and the quality
control aspects are elaborated in the General Conditions of Contract and Special
Conditions of Contract. The technical requirements, for various types of work, are
indicated in these Specifications.
b)
The requirements in regard to materials, procedures and workmanship and their
sampling and testing as specified herein shall be strictly adhered to, failing which a
Defect, in terms of the Contract, shall be deemed to have occurred.
c)
All work shall be in conformity with the requirements of codes, guidelines and
specifications of applicable standards such as those of Bureau of Indian Standards, Indian
Roads Congress, etc., whether or not indicated as such in these Specifications.
d)
In the absence of applicable standards as above, the work shall be in line with the
requirements of British, American or German standards and / or generally accepted
practices, as may be directed by the Engineer. Where any material/system of construction
is not covered herein, the guidelines of the manufacturer / system-provider of such
material/system in respect of storage, application, use, procedures, testing, etc. shall be
strictly adhered to. In both the aforesaid cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
submit the details thereof in time and obtain approval of the Engineer.
e)
Materials and manufactured items are to be carefully selected, to meet the requirements of
these specifications, the applicable Standards, the drawings and instructions of the
Engineer. Makes and brands of certain manufactured materials and items that are to be
chosen in preference to others are listed in these specifications. The tendered rates are
deemed to correspond to the costliest of these and any material or item outside the above
list shall not be used, unless sanctioned by the Engineer in writing. Such substitution shall
attract a rebate in the rate against the BOQ Item pertaining to the particular material or
item, worked out in detail by the Contractor, with all supporting data and documents,
and to be approved by the Engineer.
Ideal Structures
Page 53 of 185
4.1.3 Time factor:
a)
No stipulation herein shall become diluted in the context of time or the effect of prevailing
conditions on the time available.
4.1.4 Costs:
a)
b)
c)
The tenderer is deemed to have visited the site and ascertained the local conditions, entry,
traffic restrictions, obstructions, if any, climatic conditions and' also the site conditions,
statutory requirements and any other aspect that may have a bearing on the work, its
progress, completion and maintenance.
The tenderer is also deemed to have studied the Specifications, BOQ, Tender Drawings,
other drawings and soil investigation reports that may be available with the Engineer for
perusal of tenderers, all before preparation and submission of his tender.
The tenderer is deemed to have taken into account all the above in his tender, fully
covering all the costs and expenditures in respect of any and all extras likely to be
incurred due to all the above, including quality and time aspects, contingencies, etc. as
well as the General and Special Conditions of Contract and other documents forming the
Contract.
4.1.5 Measurements and coverage of costs in rate:
4.1.5.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items of work are
deemed to include the cost of all materials,. consumables, wastages, watering / curing,
transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery, sampling, samples,
testing, documentation, obtaining and transferring guarantees and warranties from
manufacturers / specialist agencies, preparing and furnishing as-built drawings and
clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.1.5.2
The rates in the BOQ are also deemed to include all costs towards licences, patents,
royalties, cess, seignorages, taxes, insurance, safety practices, watch and ward, security,
medical aid, temporary works, utilities and services, adherence to all applicable local and
government rules and regulations, cost of
money, capital and funds and bidding
for and operating under the Contract.
.
4.1.5.3
Measurements shall be as per IS:1200, Method of Measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering Works, unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ Items.
4.1.6 Safety:
4.1.6.1
The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to ensure complete safety and prevention
of accidents at site. The safety precautions shall conform to the following Indian Standard
Codes, wherever applicable:
IS:3696
Safety code for scaffolding and ladders.
IS:3764
Safety code for excavation work.
IS:4081
Safety code for blasting operations and related drilling operation.
IS:4130
Safety code for demolition of buildings.
Ideal Structures
Page 54 of 185
IS:4138
Safety code for working in compressed air.
IS:7923
Safety code for working with construction machinery.
4.1.7 Benchmarks, reference pillars, etc.:
4.1.7.1
The Contractor shall set up, at his own cost, benchmarks and reference pillars, at the
commencement of work and at subsequent instances, as per requirement. These shall be
maintained at his cost for as long as required, and shall be removed only where approved
by the Engineer.
4.1.7.2
The Contractor shall protect bench marks and reference lines, ground water gauges and
control points from damage or movement during work. In case of any damage, the
Contractor shall have to restore them to their original condition at his own cost.
4.1.8 Cutting of trees:
4.1.8.1 The Contractor is not permitted to cut down any tree without prior written permission from
the Engineer.
4.1.8.2 Trees with a girth of more than 450mm measured at a height of one metre above the ground
level shall be measured and paid as per the items available in the BOQ.
5.1.8.3 All trees smaller than 450mm girth and rank vegetation shall be cleared by the Contractor at
the commencement of work and, where required, at later dates, at his own cost.
4.2 EARTH WORK
4.2.1 Codes and Standards
IS: 1498
Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes.
IS:2720
(All the parts) Methods of tests for soils.
IS:3764
Safety code for excavation works.
IS:6313
(All the parts) Code of practice for anti-termite treatment measure in
4.2.2
buildings.
Work methodology:
4.2.2.1
a)
Setting out:
The work shall be set out to exact dimensions as shown on the drawings and excavations
shall be commenced only after prior approval of the Engineer.
b)
Side slopes, beams or shoring / shuttering, etc., for excavation work shall be as directed
by the Engineer and prior approval of the Engineer shall be obtained for a suitable
method of protection before excavation work is commenced.
4.2.2.2
Sequence of earthwork:
4.2.2.3
The Contractor shall carryout the earthwork in accordance with the sequence for the same
as shown on the drawings and / or as directed by the Engineer.
I
4. 2.3
a)
Cleaning and grubbing work:
All areas to be excavated for attaining specified levels and for obtaining fill material and
areas where filling has to be done shall be cleared of all vegetation, shrubs, bushes, trees,
Ideal Structures
Page 55 of 185
roots, etc. The Contractor shall break and remove unwanted structures and buildings
including foundations, fencing, drains and empty and cleanse all old wells, ponds and
cesspools.
b)
All tree stumps shall be removed and roots shall be excavated and removed.
c)
The cleared and grubbed areas shall be maintained free from vegetation and any
vegetable growth during the progress of the work.
d)
All materials obtained from clearing and grubbing shall be dumped in allotted areas.
4.2.4
a)
Stripping:
The area to be filled shall be stripped of all materials such as vegetation, organic soil, silt,
etc. The surface shall be stripped to a depth of 80mm to 200mm as may be necessary to
obtain a foundation of satisfactory density and stability.
b)
All materials that may be soft or yielding or likely to become unstable with saturation or
which may interfere with the creation of proper bond between the foundation and filling
shall be removed. The material obtained from stripping should be dumped in allotted
areas.
4.2.5 Shoring and strutting:
a)
Shoring and strutting shall be used as specified / directed when the excavation is to be
carried out in soft and slushy soil, which is likely to collapse during the excavation of the
work.
i)
The shoring shall be either open or close-boarded type depending on the nature of
the soil and depth of excavation and the type adapted shall be as directed by the Engineer.
ii)
While excavating in very unstable ground requiring support throughout the period of
excavation, runners shall be used and shall be driven always in advance of excavation.
iii) The size and spacing of different members to be used in shoring shall be as directed by the
Engineer depending on the site conditions.
4.2.6
Protection Work:
a)
The Contractor shall support and maintain adjoining and abutting property and
structures to render work safe to persons, property and structures / installations.
b)
The Contractor shall provide necessary decking, guard, fences, planking, with red flags
and red lights at night to maintain safe pedestrian and vehicular traffic near all open
excavations.
c)
The Contractor shall replace or repair at his own cost in an approved manner, all work
damaged through removal of such temporary work or improper protective work.
d)
The Contractor shall plank and strut as may be required in the sides of all excavations.
4.2.7.
Keeping works free from water:
Ideal Structures
Page 56 of 185
a)
The excavation for foundation and building area shall be kept free from water by the
Contractor at his own expense either by bailing out water with buckets manually or by
pumping.
b)
Bailing out or pumping of water shall be carried out either directly from the excavation or
from sumps made outside the excavation as directed.
c)
Adequate care shall be taken to prevent movement of water through freshly laid concrete
or masonry work.
4.2.8 Pumping:
a) The Contractor shall provide and operate pumps or other equipment necessary to drain and
keep all excavation pits, trenches, etc., free from water at all times during the continuance of
the Contract, at his own expenses. The discharge of water shall be out of the site, without
adversely affecting the surroundings of the site, consistent with any applicable local
regulation or rule, and as directed by the Engineer.
4.2.9.
De-silting:
a) If any excavation for foundation gets filled up with water due to rain, seepage or for
any other reason, the water shall be removed and the bottom of the excavation shall be
cleared of all silt and slush by the Contractor at his own expense.
4.2.10
Excavation for foundation and trenches:
The Contractor shall excavate to remove materials of any nature or description which
may be encountered and excavate to depths, widths and inclinations as shown on the
drawings and / or as directed. The bed of the excavation shall be made level and firm.
Wherever excavations are specified the Contractor has to carryout the refilling with
approved earth without any extra cost.
4.2.11
Variation in excavation:
a)
Bad Ground: Should the, bottom of any excavation appear to be soft, unsound or
unstable, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Engineer and if the Engineer so
directs, shall excavate the same to indicated depths. In case of such extra excavations,
the extra depths shall be filled up with concrete or such other materials as the Engineer
shall direct and all such extra excavations and filling shall be valued and paid for as
authorised.
b)
Excavation too deep: If the Contractor excavates to levels lower than those shown on
the drawings for any unauthorised reasons, he shall fill it up at his own expense to the
proper level with concrete or such other materials as directed. No payment shall be
made for excavation taken down to depths lower than those shown on the drawings
and for the filling carried out as directed.
I c)
Slips and falls: Every precaution shall be taken against slips and falls of earth, clay,
Ideal Structures
Page 57 of 185
sand or other materials in the excavations, but in the event of any such occurrence, the
Contractor shall at his own
expense make good the space affected by the slips or falls, even if the affected area may
be outside the dimensions of the work ordered. The Engineer shall determine in each
case whether such affected area is to be filled up in whole with concrete, brickwork or
masonry of the quality used in the adjoining work or where only a part is to be so
filled, the materials to be used for the remaining part. If, in the opinion of the Engineer,
there is a possibility of the newly constructed work having been damaged or disturbed
by such collapse, the work shall be laid bare at the expense of the Contractor for
inspection. Any damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his expense.
4.2.12
Filling under floors:
a)
i)
Filling under floors with excavated earth:
The excavated earth shall be used for filling in the sides of the foundations and under
floor where specified between the plinth walls in layers not exceeding 200mm properly
watered and rammed. No lumps or rubbish are to be used in filling.
ii)
All surplus leftover shall be either spread, deposited on the side or shall be carted
away to desired places as per direction of the Engineer.
iii)
Original ground within the plinth walls shall be scraped to make it absolutely free
from grass, vegetation growth or any other objectionable materials before earth filling
is taken up without any extra charges.
a)
Filling under floors with borrowed earth:
i)
The earth required for filling under floors with borrowed earth shall be free from saltpetre,
white ants and organic matters and shall be approved by the Engineer.
ii)
Filling shall be' done in layers not exceeding 200mm and is to be well watered and rammed
in respect of each layer. No lumps or rubbish are to be used in filling.
b)
The borrowed earth shall only be brought from the site as directed and approved by the
Engineer and the Contractor shall allow in his rate for any lead and lift in this regard
including necessary excavation.
4.2.13 Sand filling under foundation and floor:
a) Sand for filling under foundation and floor wherever indicated shall be river sand of
approved quality and free from salt, earth, dust or other impurities. Sand filling shall be
done in layers not exceeding 200mm and is to be profusely watered and rammed in
respect of each layer.
4.2.14 Blasting:
4.2.13.1 Codes and standards:
IS: 4081
Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations.
4.2.14 Permission required:
Ideal Structures
Page 58 of 185
a) Blasting is normally not permitted, unless specifically permitted by the Engineer in
writing, based on the Contractor's proposal, wherein all aspects pertaining to its absolute
necessity, local statute, site constraints, safety aspects, detailed programme, etc. are
elaborated.
4.2.16 Compliance to rules:
a) All aspects of work in connection with blasting and the materials used for the purpose,
which includes interalia transportation, storage, drilling and loading of holes, circuiting,
firing, post explosion search and disposal of misfired / unused materials are governed
by the Indian Explosives Act and the provisions thereunder shall be strictly observed.
Protection shall be taken against lightning in accordance with the Indian Electricity Act
and the rules framed thereunder.
b) Personnel:
i) The Contractor shall employ a competent and experienced licensed supervisor incharge for the blasting works. This supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that all
the safety regulations are followed. All activities pertaining to the blasting work,
including the firing, shall be conducted by the designated Supervisor only, in person.
4.2.17 Work methodology:
Storage and transport:
i)
Explosives shall be stored in clean, dry and well ventilated magazines to be built for
the purpose. Fuses and detonators shall be stored in separate magazines.
iii) Explosive shall be kept dry and away from the direct rays of the sun, naked lights,
steam pipes or heated metal, etc.
iii) Detonators and explosives shall be transported separately to the blasting site. Only the
quantity of explosive required for a particular amount of firing to be done shall be
brought to the site of work.
Precautions:
i) Due precautions shall be taken to keep the firing circuit insulated from the ground,
bare wires, rails, pipes or any other path of stray currents and to keep the lead wires
short circuited until ready to fire.
ii) Before any blasting is carried out, the Contractor shall ensure that all workmen,
vehicles and equipments on the site are cleared from an area of 300 metres radius from
the firing point, atleast 15 minutes before the firing time by sounding a warning siren.
iii) The area shall be encircled by red flags.
Blasting operation:
A wooden stemming rod shall be used to push the cartridge into the shothole.
ii) Metal rod or hammer shall not be permitted on the site of the works.
iii) The charges shall be pressed firmly into place and not rammed or pounded.
iv) The explosive shall be fired by means of an electric detonator placed inside a cartridge
and connected to the firing cable.
v) The number of shots fired at a time shall not exceed the permissible limits.
Ideal Structures
Page 59 of 185
vi) All explosive left surplus after filling the holes shall be removed atleast 400 metres
away from the firing point.
4.2.18 Drilling rock for blasting:
a) Holes for charging explosives shall be drilled with pneumatic drills, the drilling pattern
being so planned that rock pieces after blasting would be suitable for handling without
secondary blasting.
b) The rock pieces so blasted shall be neatly stacked at allotted places.
4.2.19 Controlled blasting:
a) When blasting is conducted in the neighbourhood of roads, structures, buildings or any
place which requires controlled blasting, the Contractor shall drill only shallow shot
holes.
b) These holes shall be filled with a light charge of explosives and the blast controlled by
placing steel plates loaded with gunny bags filled with sand or earth over the hole and
covering them with wire net fixed to the ground, so as to ensure that the blasted
materials do not scatter.
c) In such cases, short delay detonators shall be used for blasting purposes.
Misfire:
a) In case of misfire, the unexploded charges shall be carefully located after half an hour
and shall be exploded by drilling a fresh hole alongside the misfired hole (but not
nearer than 600mm from it, and by exploding by drilling a new charge.
b) The workmen shall not return to the site of firing until at least half an hour after firing.
4.2.20 Classification and measurement:
4.2.20.1 Classification of soil and its measurement for payment shall be according to IS: 1498 and
IS: 1200, respectively, and / or as per the items of the BOQ.
a) Depths, areas and volumes shall be measured / calculated to the nearest 0.0 lm, 0.01
sq.m. and 0.01 cu.m., respectively. Where in-position measurements are not possible,
stacks shall be measured, deducting 20%, 40% and 12% in the case of earth, debris /
rock and dry silt / dry slush, respectively.
b) Unless otherwise mentioned the initial lead, for which payment is covered under the
respective activity necessitating the movement, shall be 50 m, measured from the edge
of the excavation.
c) Lift shall be measured from local ground level/average ground level of a particular
portion of work. Lifts inherent in the lead due to ground slopes shall not be accounted
for.
d) The Engineer shall decide on the sequential/phased operation of the various
earthwork Items in the BOQ. Lift shall be reckoned with referring to the ground level
as available at the start of work under the particular BOQ Item, irrespective of the
virgin ground levels.
e) Cleaning and grubbing work, stripping, shoring and strutting, protection work,
keeping works free from water, pumping and de-silting, as described herein, and
consolidation, testing and clearing non-excavated debris shall be carried out by the
Ideal Structures
Page 60 of 185
Contractor at no extra cost. Blasting, where required and permitted, is considered
covered under the respective Items of the BOQ, such as for excavation, drilling, etc.
4.2.20.2
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for earthwork
are deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages, watering,
transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery, testing,
documentation and clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.2.20.3
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, costs for transporting out earth and
debris generated through specific dismantling activities to suit the Owner's changed
requirements are paid for, under separate Items.
4.3.
4.3.1
PLAIN & REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORK
Codes and standards:
Cement:
IS:269
IS:455
IS:4032
IS: 1489
IS:6452
IS:6909
IS:8112
IS: 12269
Aggregate:
IS:383
IS:2386
IS:2430
Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.
Specification for Portland cement.
Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.
Specification for Portland pozzolana cement.
Specification for high alumina cement for structural use.
Super sulphated cement.
Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources for concrete.
(All the parts) Method of test for aggregates for concrete,
Method of sampling of aggregates for concrete.
Concrete plain & reinforced:
IS:456
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS:460
(All the parts) Specification for test sieves
IS:516
Methods of test for strength of concrete.
IS: 1199
Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS: 1607
Method of dry sieving.
IS: 1834
Hot applied sealing compounds for joints in concrete
IS:2204
Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof liquid
retaining structure bins chimneys etc.
IS: 4997
Bins.
IS:4998
Chimneys ..
IS:2645
Specification for integral cement water proofing compound.
IS:2911
(All the parts) Code of practice for design and construction of pile
foundations
1S:9013
Method of making, curing and determining compressive strength of
accelerated cured concrete test specimens.
IS:9103
Specification for admixtures for concrete.
IS:10262
Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
Ideal Structures
Page 61 of 185
IS:14687
Steel
IS:432
(All the parts) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel
wire for concrete reinforcement.
Specification of high strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete
reinforcements.
Hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
Specification wire cloth for general purpose.
Steel for general structural purposes.
Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement.
Recommended practice for welding of mild steel bars deformed for reinforced
concrete work.
IS:1786
IS:1566
IS:1568
IS:2062
IS:2502
IS:2751
4.3.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Guidelines for false work for concrete structures.
Materials:
Cement: Ordinary Portland cement of grade 33 shall conform to IS:269 and grade 43
shall conform to IS:8112. Portland blast furnace slag cement shall conform to 18:455
and super sulphated cement shall conform to IS:6909.
Aggregates shall conform to IS:383. Fine aggregates shall be approved river or pit
sand. Coarse aggregates shall be approved crushed stone.
Reinforcement shall be MS bars conforming to IS:432 or IRC mesh fabric
reinforcement conforming to IS: 1566 or mild steel and medium tensile steel
deformed bars conforming to or cold twisted steel bars conforming and shall be free
from oil, paint, rust coatings. The binding wire shall be of 20 gauge black annealed
wire.
Jointing Materials such as rubber and PYC water stops, joint fillers, sealing materials
etc, used in Joints in concrete work shall be of standard manufacture as per relevant
IS codes wherever applicable and / or as approved by the Engineer. Usage of these
materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Admixtures, where used, shall be of approved quality and shall conform to relevant
IS codes. The extent, type, method of use and control shall be subject to approval of
the Engineer in all cases.
Water shall be as per Clause-4.3 of IS:456. Sea water or water from sources
susceptible to salinity shall not be used for mixing and curing of concrete.
Concrete:
4.3.3
4.3.3.1 Production and control of concrete shall be as per IS:456.
a)
b)
Ideal Structures
The grades of concrete shall conform to Table-2 of IS:456, and shall be as indicated on
the drawings and / or the BOQ. The Contractor shall at his own cost, grade the
aggregate and control the water cement ratio, design the different mixes to required
strength and workability.
The design mix concrete shall conform to the requirement of IS:456. Minimum
cement content and maximum water cement ratio of concrete shall also fulfill the
requirement of durability considered by the condition of exposure in case of
superstructures and exposure to sulphate attack in case of underground structures
and as per Table-19 and Table 20 of IS:456 and / or as indicated in the drawings or
the BOQ.
Page 62 of 185
c)
d)
e)
The maximum size of aggregates used shall be as indicated in the drawings and / or
the BOQ. Where reinforcement is too closely spaced for the maximum size of stone in
a range, the largest suitable range shall be used with the approval of Engineer.
Before commencement of work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his
approval,' complete details of the tests for design mixes together with the grading
analysis and mix design calculations. No concrete shall be placed on site until the
Engineer has approved the mix design.
If any change is made in the source / grading of the aggregates, water content of the
mix, manner of making or compacting the concrete or any other deviations from the
preliminary test procedure, the Engineer may instruct for fresh mix design and fresh
preliminary test which shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost. Over
the full period of construction, the Contractor shall carry out the work test at his own
cost to satisfy the. Engineer that correct grade of concrete is being used.
4.3.3.2
Where 'nominal mix concrete' as defined by IS:456 is permitted by the Engineer for any
specific reason, proportion of materials shall be as indicated in Table-3 of IS:456.
However, for concrete grade M10 and above, minimum cement content and maximum
water cement ratio requirements for durability shall also be considered taking into
account the exposure and subsoil conditions as indicated in Table 9 of IS: 456 -2000
4.3.3.3
Plain cement concrete in foundation under the floors, etc.:
a)
Unless otherwise specified, all plain cement concrete shall be composed of the following:
Stone aggregate 40mm to 10mm; Cement, Fine aggregate and Coarse aggregate in the
ratio of 1:4:8
b) Before laying concrete, the bed shall be well watered, rammed and dressed properly.
Concrete shall be deposited gently in the trenches in horizontal layers of not more
than 300mm thick, gently rammed and finished off in perfect level. The concrete shall
be kept wet for a week.
c) The specification for plain cement concrete work shall generally comply with that for
reinforced cement concrete work as given under this section. For large areas, concrete
shall be laid in panels with proper construction joints as directed with proper floor
drainage sloped as per drawing or direction of the Engineer.
d) The top surface shall be finished evenly with straight edge, and when hard, chipped
and left clean to receive floor finishing as per requirement.
4.3.4
Reinforced cement concrete work:
4.3.4.1
Unless otherwise specified, all reinforced cement concrete work shall be of design mix
only, consistent with the grade / strength indicated in the BOQ and / or drawings.
4.3.4.2 Where strengths are specified in the BOQ, the mixes to be adopted and the slump to be
allowed to give the specified strengths and proper workability shall be determined
previously by experiment as per IS:456 with representative samples of the materials used
and under conditions similar to those to be adopted in actual job. The experiments are to
be done by the Contractor at his own cost under the direction and supervision of the
Engineer, as and when necessary. When the mix to be adopted is decided upon, it shall in
no case be altered without specific written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall, however, remain fully responsible for producing concrete of specified strengths in
the actual job. This is herein referred to as 'design mix' concrete, the specifications for the
Ideal Structures
Page 63 of 185
same being elaborated elsewhere in these Specifications.
Design mix concrete:
4.3.5
4.3.5.1
At the commencement of each major concreting work, and well ahead of the same, the
contractor shall get the proportion by mass of the prescribed grade of concrete or get the
correct grade of concrete with proportions fixed to meet the required strength and
workability as specified from an authorised laboratory or an expert design mix consultant
and obtain the detailed design mix calculations from the agency preparing the design mix
and get the same approved by the Engineer who in turn shall examine if the condition of
minimum cement content is strictly followed and also any other properties required to
ensure durability.
4.3.5.2
Details to be furnished by the contractor for the Engineer's approval shall include
information on the proposed grade of concrete and the source of aggregates, cement for
the use in the particular grade of concrete and also the water / cement ratio, degree of
workability etc.
4.3.5.3
Trial mixes:
a) When the design mix calculations submitted by the contractor are approved by the
Engineer, the contractor before taking up the actual construction shall prepare the trial
mixes for the proposed grade of concrete in accordance with SP-23 of Bureau of Indian
Standards, preferably under full-scale production conditions and get six cubes made
from each of three batches and get three out of six cubes cured and tested with
accelerated regime and remaining three cubes tested after curing for 28 days.
b) Trial mixes are required even after commencement of work, and the procedure as
explained above shall be adopted for full-scale production conditions. These trial mixes
are separate from and shall not be linked to the "Testing works Concrete".
c) The workability of each batch of trial mix shall be determined by slump test as described
in IS:1199 or by an alternative approved method.
4.3.5.4
When the proportion of the design mix has been approved no variation shall be made in
the accepted proportion, the original source of cement and aggregates without the
approval of Engineer in writing, who may insist on further test.
4.3.6
Testing works concrete:
a) The concrete shall be sampled from time to time in accordance with the norms specified in IS:456:
i) The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in accordance
with the following:
Number of samples
Note: Atleast one sample shall be taken From each
Concrete Quantity in the work (cu.m.)
shift.
1 to 5
1
6 to 15
2
16 to 30
3
Ideal Structures
Page 64 of 185
31 to 50
4
4, plus one additional sample for each additional 50
51 and above
ii)
iii)
iv)
cu.m. or part thereof.
Where concrete is produced as continuous production unit, such as ready mix concrete
plant frequency of sampling may be agreed upon mutually by supplier and purchaser.
Test Specimen: Three test specimens shall be made for each sample for testing at 28 days.
Additional samples may be required for various purposes such as determine the strength
of concrete at 7 days or to determine the duration of curing, or check the testing error,
additional sample may also be required for testing samples cured by accelerated methods
as described in IS:9103. The specimen shall be tested as described in IS:516.
Test Results of Samples: The test results of the samples shall be the average of the strength
of three specimens. The individual variation should not be more than + 15 percent of the
average: If more, the test results of the sample are invalid.
Ready mix concrete:
4.3.7
4.3.7.1 The Contractor may be allowed to use Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) with the permission of
Engineer, provided that the RMC manufacturer assures in writing that the minimum
cement content shall be strictly maintained and also that he would submit the necessary
design mix calculations along with the details of source of ingredients for each batch of
concrete. The manufacturer of RMC shall agree to the sampling and testing procedures,
which shall include onsite casting of test cubes, in addition to those cast at the
manufacturing point.
4.3.7.2
The manufacturer of RMC shall agree to the sampling and testing procedures, which shall
include onsite casting of test cubes, in addition to those cast at the manufacturing point.
4.3.7.3 Any consignment of RMC not consumed at site within three hours of its manufacture shall
be rejected and shall forthwith be destroyed and removed from the site.
4.3.8
Placing of concrete:
4.3.8.1
Concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as practicable by methods which would prevent segregation or loss of ingredients;
it shall be placed in forms within twenty minutes of its being mixed with water. It shall be
deposited as early as practicable in its final position to avoid re-handling or flowing
unless specially permitted by the Engineer. Concrete shall not be dropped freely from a
height of more than 600mm. A properly constructed inclined chute must be used in such
cases where it is necessary to exceed this height.
4.3.8.2
Before placing the concrete, the form shall be cleared off shavings or pieces of wood or
other rubbish, and thoroughly damped with water. When placing the concrete, the fine
materials must be carefully worked against the forms so that the faces of concrete shall be
perfectly smooth and free from honeycombing after withdrawing the forms. The defects
in this respect shall be dealt with by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. If
honeycombed concrete is allowed to remain, grouting shall be done with I: I cement and
sand slurry to the satisfaction of the Engineer without any extra charges immediately after
removal of shuttering.
4.3.8.3
Where concrete is deposited against stone work, brickwork or other surfaces likely to
Ideal Structures
Page 65 of 185
absorb moisture, such surfaces must be well watered immediately prior to deposition of
concrete.
4.3.8.4
During placing and immediately after deposition, the concrete shall be thoroughly
compacted with mechanical vibrators until it fills all the space between and around the
rods to ensure a solid mass entirely free from voids and air-bubbles. Excessive vibration
must be avoided.
4.3.8.5
It is imperative that the work shall be done quickly and efficiently and adequate number
of hands, therefore, must be employed to ensure this to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.3.8.6
Great care must be taken in placing and vibrating the concrete so that the reinforcement is
not displaced.
4.3.8.7
Concrete shall be placed and compacted in its final position before setting has commenced
and shall not subsequently be disturbed. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up
to construction joints, the positions and arrangements of which shall be pre-determined
by the Engineer. Any rest pauses, such as for meals, shall also be subject to his approval.
All concreting work shall be so programmed as not to necessitate work at night. If for any
reason, this becomes imperative, the Contractor shall obtain previous written permission
of the Engineer and make proper lighting arrangement at his own cost.
5.3.9
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Construction joints in concrete:
The work of concreting in beams and slabs shall be completed in one operation, as far as
possible. If concreting has to be stopped, pennissi0I1 shall be obtained from the Engineer
and it shall be stopped at places approved by the Engineer.
Joints in slabs shall be made in a direction parallel to the main reinforcements.
All joints in beams and other horizontal members are to be formed inserting temporary
vertical boards against which concrete deposited can be properly rammed.
When the work has to be commenced on a surface which has hardened, each surface shall
be well roughened and all laitance removed. The surface then shall be brushed clean,
thoroughly wetted and well grouted with cement and sand slurry of I: I proportion. Such
works are to be covered by the rates for concrete work.
Application of approved speciality bonding agents and / or water stops shall be as per
manufacturer's instructions and paid for separately where indicated in the BOQ.
4.3.10 (
a)
b)
c)
Protection and curing of concrete:
The Contractor shall adequately protect freshly laid concrete from too rapid drying due to
strong sunshine, dry winds, etc., and also from run off water from any other source. During
the first 21 days after deposition, the concrete shall be kept thoroughly damp by suitable
means as approved by the Engineer. Watering during this period required for this purpose
shall be continued daily including Sundays and holidays and the cost to be covered by the
rates for concrete work.
The Contractor shall make satisfactory arrangement to protect freshly laid concrete during
showers by providing tarpaulin on top and sides, failing which the casting of all concrete
work shall be stopped at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
No heavy extraneous load shall be placed on the structural concrete until after 28 days from
the date of completion of concreting in that particular portion.
4.3.11 Steel Reinforcement:
Ideal Structures
Page 66 of 185
4.3.10.1 Reinforcement work shall be done accurately as per drawings and directions of the
Engineer. The bars shall be cut to exact lengths,' accurately bent cold to specified shapes,
placed and fixed in position as per drawing and tied tightly at each and every intersection
with double 20 gauge black annealed binding wire, the loops of which must be tightened
with pliers without snapping.
4.3.10.2 The Contractor shall, without extra charges, provide all the supports and fixtures
required and shall take precaution to see that all such temporary fixtures are removed before
concreting and ensure cleaning of bars, removing rust or scales, if any, and other incidental
works in this connection.
4.3.10.3 The Contractor shall also provide without any extra charges pre-cast cover blocks in
cement mortar 1:2 and steel chairs of suitable dimension as per direction of the Engineer at
regular intervals under the reinforcement bars for keeping the bars in position and to ensure
correct depth of cover to the bars. Unless otherwise mentioned in the drawings,
reinforcements shall be placed in position so as to allow concrete cover to reinforcements as
per IS:456.
4.3.10.4 The Contractor shall get the reinforcement work approved by the Engineer before
concreting can be started.
5.3.10.5 Where bars of exact required length are not available, these shall be cut from such
length of available bars as would involve minimum wastages of cut pieces. No lapping shall
be allowed and paid for within available stock lengths. However, if any lapping is required
due to short length of bars, the lapping should be provided as per relevant IS specification
and / or code of practice and the bars shall be bound together by wires tightly. The Engineer,
at his sole discretion, may call for welding together of bars.
4.3.12.
Shuttering of RCC work:
5.3.11.1The Contractor shall supply all necessary centering and shuttering including props, bracings,
runners, staging, nails, bolts and nuts, etc., as required and all necessary labour, plant and
machinery, etc., for fixing shuttering and boxing as well as labour and tools for striking and
removing them.
4.3.11.2 Shuttering and formworks for reinforced cement concrete work shall be composed of either
steel plates or 19 mm thick shuttering plywood, with adequate bracings and supports with
cross bearers and vertical and horizontal struts in such a manner that the shuttering or
formwork remains perfectly rigid during the filling, ramming, vibrating and setting of the
concrete. The shuttering and formwork are to be close-boarded and joints lined with kraft
paper or other types of approved materials to make it reasonably water-tight. Formwork for
beams, lintels and columns shall be framed up perfectly true with all necessary bracings or
battens, distance pieces and bolts, so that the beams, lintels or columns when cast, shall be
perfectly true to plumb and precise alignment. Spacing of the runners and props shall be
approved by the Engineer. Rough-dressed timbers or sal ballahs or steel pipe supports of
adequate stiffness and strength and not bamboo are to be used as supports for centering or
formwork. Care is to be taken that no timber chips or shavings are left and cast in with the
concrete. The supports shall be resting on base plates.
If shuttering is to be re-used, it should be carefully cleaned before such re-use, properly
aligned and open joints repaired.
4.3.11.3 In fixing shuttering, the levelling shall be done with levelling instrument and the
shuttering shall be to perfect, specified levels. Before concrete can be laid, shuttering shall
be approved by the Engineer.
4.3.11.4
Drawings showing shuttering details shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer
Ideal Structures
Page 67 of 185
for his approval, if required by him.
5.3.11.5 All shuttering shall be removed without shock and vibration. The wedges are to be first
eased gently and violent movements avoided. The shuttering shall be removed with the
utmost care in all cases. so as not to cause any injury to any construction or to any stored
material. Before the shuttering is stripped, the concrete surface shall be exposed where
necessary in order to ascertain that the concrete has hardened sufficiently. The Contractor
shall take previous written permission from the Engineer before removal of the
shuttering. Where necessary in the opinion of the Engineer, temporary supports shall be
installed to support any concrete work when the shuttering is removed.
a) Forms shall not be struck until the concrete has attained a strength atleast twice the stress to
which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of formwork. The strength
referred to shall be that of concrete using the same cement and aggregates, with the same
proportions and cured under conditions of temperature and moisture similar to those
existing on the work. Where so required, formwork shall be left longer. In normal
circumstances and where ordinary portland cement is used, forms may generally be
removed after the expiry of the following periods:
a)
Walls, Columns and vertical faces of all structural members
b)
Slabs (Props left under)
c)
Beams Soffits (Props left under)
d)
Removal of Props under Slabs
Spanning unto 4.5 m
ii) Spanning over 4.5 m
e)
Removal of Props under beams and arches
i) Spanning unto 6 m
ii) Spanning over 6 m
2
3
7
days
days
days
7
14
days
days
14
21
days
days
i)
b) In case of bad weather, these periods may be increased at the discretion of Engineer. The
stripping time recommended for ordinary portland cement may be suitably modified for
other cements.
c) The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to be able to
safely carry full dead load of the slab, beam or arch, as the case may be, together with any
live load likely to occur during curing or further construction.
d) No plugs, bolts, ties, holdfasts or any other appliances whatsoever for the purpose of
supporting the shuttering are to be fixed in the structure or placed in such a way that these
would damage the structure or its elements when the shuttering is struck down. Shuttering
shall never be nailed to the door and window frames.
4.3.13
Sundry items:
4.3.13.1
All chases and holes are to be formed as may be shown or directed without any extra
charges. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and labour and do all grouting
required for filling chases and holes. Grouting shall be done with cement concrete 1:2:4,
20mm and down aggregate / cement mortar 1: I or done with cement concrete 1:2:4 as
indicated in the drawing and / or as directed by the Engineer.
4.3.13.2
The Contractor shall fix all necessary inserts in all concrete works for the supports of
Ideal Structures
Page 68 of 185
4.3.13.3
hangers for pipes, cables, etc., as directed by the Engineer and no extra payment on this
account shall be made unless measured separately.
Expansion joints shall be provided in such position and in such manner as indicated in the
drawing or as per direction of the Engineer.
4.3.13.4
All exposed faces of concrete shall be properly chipped, at Contractor's own cost, to
receive sand cement rendering or plastering as specified in the BOQ.
4.3.13.5
The general specification for all plain cement concrete shall comply with that for RCC
work as per IS 456.
4.3.13.6
No separate payment shall be made for any moulding, throating, drip course, etc. either
in the concrete itself or in the finishing work to the concrete unless otherwise mentioned
or provided for in the BOQ.
4.3.13.7
At the junction of RCC column or beam with brickwork! RR masonry, 6mm dia MS
dowel bars of required length shall be provided for bonding brickwork with RCC work at
suitable intervals as per direction of the Engineer.
Precast concrete work:
4.3.14
4.3.14.1
In addition to specifications listed above, following specifications shall apply for pre-cast
concrete work:
a)
The formwork and ! or moulds for pre-cast concrete members shall be made of metal and
true to shape and dimension of the finished product as indicated on the drawings. The
moulds shall be close-jointed and perfectly smooth with joints caulked to prevent leakage
of cement slurry. The moulds shall be of rigid construction to prevent distortion and
bulging of sides and base and shall be designed with suitable fastenings to allow them to
be struck without injury to the casting. The moulds shall generally be vibrated on a
mechanically operated vibrating table.
b)
Marking of units: The pre-cast members shall be marked distinctly in a manner approved
by the Engineer in a conspicuous place, with date of manufacture and marking number,
to ensure proper handling and incorporation in the exact intended paIt of the works.
c)
Erection of the pre-cast members shall be carried out as per the approved sequence. All
pre-cast concrete work to be set in masonry, etc. shall be set in cement mortar 1:3 unless
otherwise specified. The rate of the pre-cast concrete work is to include for such setting,
mortar, shuttering, finishing exposed surface smooth and even.
Coverage of rates:
4.3.15
4.3.15.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for plain and
reinforced cement concrete works are deemed to include the cost of all materials,
consumables, wastages, curing, transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant,
machinery, testing, documentation and expert services for designing mix, apart from
Ideal Structures
Page 69 of 185
4.3.15.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, waterproofing compounds, formwork,
centering, shuttering, de-shuttering and reinforcement costs are paid for, under separate
Items.
4.3.15.3
The cost of admixtures, such as plasticisers and retarders, for RMC are deemed to be
covered under the rates for the respective concrete Items only, and no extra is payable to
the Contractor.
5.4
PILES
4.4.1 Codes and standards:
IS:1200
(All the parts) Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works.
IS:1498
Classification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes.
IS:2720
(All the parts) Methods of tests for soils.
IS:2911
IS:3764
(All the parts) Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations.
Safety code for excavation works.
4.4.2
Bored cast-in-situ reinforced concrete piles:
4.4.2.1 Bored &cast-in-situ concrete piles shall be installed by making a bore into the ground and
removing out the material.
4.4.2.2 Boring bore for installing pile:
a) Installation of piles shall be accurate as possible and as per design and drawings. The
vertically or the required batter should be correctly maintained. Particular care shall be taken
in respect of installing either single pile or piles in a row or pile groups.
b) Deviation and tolerance for alignment and position of piles shall be as per IS:2911 (Part
1/Sec.I). The piles should not deviate more than 75mm or D/4 whichever is less (75mm or
D/l 0 whichever is more in case of piles having diameter more than 600mm) from their
designed position at the working level. In case of a single pile under a column the positional
deviation should not be more than 50mm or D/4 whichever is less (100 mm in case of piles
having diameter more than 600mm). Greater tolerance may be prescribed for piles driven
over water and for raking piles. The above guide on deviation is prescribed as a limit of
tolerance for the installation of piles. In case the eccentricity of piles cannot be controlled by
redesigning the pile cap or pile ties, replacement or supplementing by additional pile is the
only alternative.
4.4.3
Procedure for driving pile bore:
a) The ground shall be roughly levelled and position of pile marked. The boring shall be done
with or without the use of temporary casing. The sides of bore hole shall be stabilized with
the aid of temporary casing or with the aid of drilling mud of suitable consistency.
b) The e4uipment and accessories shall depend upon the type of bored pile chosen for the job,
consideration of sub-soil strata, ground water conditions and type of founding material.
Ideal Structures
Page 70 of 185
Boring operations normally are to be done by rotary or percussion type drilling rigs using
direct mud circulation or reverse mud circulation method. In loose sand and soft clay bailer
and chisel method may be used, with caution to avoid the effect of suction. The size of
cutting tool shall be as detailed in IS:2911 (Part I/Sec.2).
c) Permanent casing shall be used to avoid the inflow of under ground water. In case bore is
filled with water, the bottom part shall be concreted using termie method so that the casing
is effectively sealed against entering of ground water.
d) In case permanent / temporary casing are not used, or where the soil condition requires so,
the bored pile shall be stabilised with drilling fluid such as bentonite, which shall conform
to IS:2720 (Part 5). Certificates from the manufacturer showing properties of each
consignment shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer. Bentonite
shall be mixed thoroughly with fresh clean water to make a suspension which will maintain
the stability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place concrete and complete
construction. The temperature of the water used in mixing the bentonite suspension and
when supplied to bore hole shall not be lower than 50°C. Consistency of the drilling fluid
suspension shall be controlled throughout the boring as well in concreting operations, to
keep the hole stabilised as well as to avoid concrete getting mixed up with thick suspension
of mud.
e) Frequency and methods of testing drilling fluid shall be as specified and the test results shall
be as specified in IS:2720 (Part V).
f) Bored cast-in-situ piles in soils which are stable may often be installed with a small casing
length at the top. A minimum of2.0m length of top of bore shall invariably be provided with
casing to ensure against loose soil falling in to drilling mud, or a suitable steel casing. The
casing may be left in place permanently especially in cases where the aggressive action of the
ground water is to be avoided, or in the cases of piles built in water or in cases where
significant length of piles could be exposed due to scour.
g) For bored cast-in-situ piles, casing / liner shall be driven open ended with a pile driving
hammer capable of achieving penetration of the liner to the length shown on the drawing or
as directed by the Engineer. Materials inside the casing shall be removed progressively by air
lift, grab or percussion equipment or other approved means.
h) Where bored cast-in-situ piles are used in soils liable to inflow, the bottom of the casing shall
be kept low enough in advance of the boring tool to prevent the entry of soil into the casing,
thus preventing the formation of and settlements in the adjoining ground. The water level in
the casing should generally be maintained at the natural ground water level for the same
reasons. The joints of the casing shall be made as tight as possible to minimize inflow of
water or leakage of slurry during concreting.
i)
Boring shall be carried out using rotary or percussion type equipment. Unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer the diameter of the bore holes shall be not more than the inside
diameter of the liner.
j)
After the boring has reached the required depth, the steel reinforcement shall be lowered in
position maintaining the specified size of cover on all sides. The bore shall then be flushed
with bentonite slurry and concreting shall be taken up.
k) A proper record of pile driving and other details such as sequence of installation of piles,
Ideal Structures
Page 71 of 185
dimension of piles, depth bored, cut off level / working level, time taken for concreting,
nature of strata encountered, measures taken to keep the borehole sides stable, etc. shall be
maintained in sequence of occurrence at site.
I)
Chisel penetration energy data shall be generated at each pile location, from start of
weathered rock and up to termination depth. Detailed record of number of blows,
corresponding penetration and time shall be made. Recovered rock samples from every 3Dminute chiseling shall be preserved in properly labelled and secured plastic bags.
m) Rock shall be deemed to have been encountered when the chisel energy level is at 50Tm/sq.m.lcm. Minimum socket length from the point of this energy level shall not be less
than five times the pile diameter.
n) Minimum chisel penetration energy at pile termination zone, after applying correction factor
of 0.80 for bentonite / water slurry drag, etc. shall be 175T -m/sq.m/cm.
o) Where drilling mud is used, the specific gravity of fresh supply and contaminated mud in
the hole before concreting is taken up shall be recorded for first ten piles and subsequently at
interval of 10 piles or as specified.
p) Rope-operated grabbing tool kelly-mounted hydraulically operated grab may be used where
required, especially when suction is to be avoided as the hole advances. The size of cutting
tool shall of as per IS:2911 (Part 1 Section 2) and not less than the diameter of pile by more
than 75mm.
4.4.4
Reinforcement:
a) In soft clays or loose sands, or where there is likelihood of danger to green concrete due to
driving of adjacent piles, the reinforcement should be provided up to full pile depth,
regardless of whether or not it is required from uplift & lateral load considerations or
indicated as such in the typical drawings. However, in all cases, the reinforcement indicated
in the drawings shall be considered as the minimum.
b) Piles shall always be reinforced with a minimum amount of reinforcement as dowels keeping
the minimum bond length into the pile shaft below its cut-off level, and with adequate
projection into the pile cap, irrespective of design requirements. The possibility of the cage
lifting at the bottom or at the laps during withdrawal of casing shall be minimized by
making the reinforcement U-shaped at the bottom and up to well secured joints. The lifting
of 5% of the length should be considered not to affect the quality of pile.
c) Clear cover to all main reinforcement in pile shaft shall be not less than 50mm and shall be
maintained by suitable spacers. The laterals of reinforcing cage may be in the form of links or
spirals.. The minimum diameter of links or spirals shall be 6mm and the spacing of the links
or spirals shall be not less than 150mm. The minimum clear distance between two adjacent
main reinforcement bars should normally be 100mm for the full depth 'of the cage.
d) The reinforcing cage should be left with adequate protruding length above the cut off level
for proper embedment in the pile cap. Prior to the lowering of reinforcement cage into the
pile shaft, the shaft shall be cleaned of all loose materials.
e) Reinforcement in the form of cage shall be assembled with additional support, such as
Ideal Structures
Page 72 of 185
spreaders, forks and lacings, necessary to form a rigid cage. Hoops, links, or helical
reinforcement has to fit closely around the main longitudinal bars and shall be tied by
binding wire of approved quality. The ends of the binding wire shall be turned into the
interior of the pile. Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in correct position. The
reinforcements shall be joined wherever necessary by welding, as per the procedure
described in IS:2751.
4.4.5 Concrete:
a) Concreting of piles shall be done only with design mix of appropriate grade, prepared,
tested and handled as specified for RCC works, unless herein specified otherwise. High
alumina cement shall not be used for concrete meant for piles.
b) When concreting under water or drilling mud, 10% additional cement in addition to the
minimum cement content for the particular grade shall be used.
c) The minimum slump should be 100 mm when the concrete for the piles is being vibrated and
when the concrete is not vibrated the maximum slump that can be permitted is 150mm.
4.4.6 Placing of concrete:
a) Before commencement of pouring concrete, it shall be ensured that there is no ingress of
water in the casing tubes from bottom. Further, adequate control during withdrawal of the
casing tube shall be exercised so as to maintain sufficient head of concrete inside the casing
tube at all stages of withdrawal.
b) Wherever practicable, concrete should be placed in a clean dry hole. Where concrete is
placed in dry hole and when casing is present, the top 3m pile shall be compacted using
internal vibrators.
c) The concrete should invariably be poured through a tremie, with a funnel so that the flow is
directed and concrete can be deposited in the hole without segregation. Care shall be taken
during concreting to prevent segregation of the ingredients. Displacement or distortion of
reinforcement during concreting and while extracting the tube shall be avoided.
d) Where the casing is withdrawn from cohesive soils for the formation of cast-in-situ pile, the
concreting should be done with necessary precautions to minimize the softening of the soil
by excess water. Where mud flow conditions exist, the casing of cast-in-situ piles shall not be
allowed to be withdrawn.
e) The concrete shall be self-compacting and shall not get mixed with soil, excess water, or
other extraneous matter. Special care shall be taken in silty clays and other soils with
tendency to squeeze into newly deposited concrete and cause necking. Sufficient head of
green concrete shall be maintained to prevent inflow of soil or water into concrete.
f) To ensure compaction by hydraulic static heads, rate of placing concrete in the pile shaft
shall not be less than 6m length of pile per hour.
g) In exceptional case of interruption of concreting, but which can be resumed within one or
two hours, the tremie shall not be taken out of the concrete. Instead, it shall be raised and
lowered slowly from time to time to prevent the concrete around the pipe from setting.
Concreting should be resumed by introducing a little richer concrete with a slump of about
200mm for easy displacement of the partly set concrete. If the concreting cannot be resumed
before final set of concrete already laid, the pile so cast may be rejected or accepted with
modifications, at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
h) In case of withdrawal of tremie out of concrete, either accidentally or to remove a choke in
Ideal Structures
Page 73 of 185
the tremie, the tremie may be re-introduced in the following manner to prevent
impregnation of laitance or scum lying on the top of the concrete already deposited in the
bore.
i)
The tremie shall be gently lowered on to the old concrete with very little penetration initially.
A vermiculite plug should be introduced in the tremie. Fresh concrete of slump between
150mm and 175mm should be filled in the tremie, which will push the plug forward and will
emerge out of the tremie displacing the laitance / scum. The tremie shall be pushed further
in steps making fresh concrete sweep away laitance / scum in its way. When the tremie is
buried by about 600mm to 1m, concreting may be resumed.
j)
The top of concrete in a pile shall be brought above the cut-off level to permit removal of all
laitance and weak concrete before capping and to ensure good concrete at the cut-off level
for proper embedment into the pile cap.
k) Where cut-off level is less than 1.5m below the working level concrete shall be cast to a
minimum of 300rum above cut-off level. For each additional 0.3m increase in cut-off level
below the working level additional coverage of atleast 50mm shall be allowed. Higher
allowance may be necessary depending on the length of the pile.
l)
When concrete is placed by tremie method concrete shall be cast to the piling platform level
to permit overflow of concrete for visual inspection or to a minimum of one metre above cut
off level. in the circumstances where cut-off level is below ground water level the need to
maintain pressure on the unset concrete equal to or greater than water pressure should be
observed and accordingly length of extra concrete above cut-off level shall be determined.
m) The minimum embedment of cast-in-situ concrete piles into pile cap shall be 150mm. Any
defective concrete at the head of the completed pile shall be cut away and made good with
new concrete. The clear cover between the bottom reinforcement in pile cap from top of pile
shall not be less than 30mm. The reinforcement in the pile shall be exposed for full anchorage
length to permit it to be adequately bonded in to the pile cap. Exposing such length shall be
done carefully to avoid damaging the rest of the pile. In cases where the pile cap is to be laid
on ground, a leveling course with cement concrete shall be provided, to the dimensions
shown in the drawings.
n) The diameter of the finished pile shall not be less than specified and a continuous record
shall be kept by the Engineer as to the volume of concrete placed in relation to the length of
pile cast. After each pile has been cast any empty pile hole remaining shall be protected and
back filled as soon as possible with approved material.
4.4.7
Placing concrete under water:
a. Before concreting under water, the bottom of the hole shall be cleared of drilling mud and all
soft loose materials very carefully. In case the hole is bored with use of drilling mud,
concreting should not be taken up when the specific gravity of bottom slurry exceeds 1.2.
The drilling mud should be maintained at l.5m above the ground water level.
b. Concreting under water for cast-in-situ concrete piles may be done either with the use of
tremie method or by the use of approved method specially designed to permit under water
placement of concrete. The method of deposition should not be changed part way up the pile
to prevent the laitance from being entrapped within the pile.
Ideal Structures
Page 74 of 185
c. General requirements and precautions for concreting under water are as follows:
The concreting of pile must be completed in one continuous operation. Also for bored holes,
the finishing of the bore, cleaning of the bore, lowering of reinforcement cage and concreting
of pile for full length must be accomplished in one continuous operation without any
stoppage.
I. The concrete should be coherent, rich in cement with high slump and restricted water
cement ratio.
II. The tremie pipe shall be large enough with due regard to the size of the aggregate. For
20mm aggregate, the tremie pipe should be of diameter not less than 150mm and for
larger aggregate, larger diameter of tremie pipe shall be used.
III. A temporary casing should be installed to the full depth of the bore hole or 2m into noncollapsible stratum, so that fragments of soil cannot drop from the sides of the hole into
the concrete as it is placed. The temporary casing may not be required except near the
top when concreting under drilling mud.
IV. The first charge of concrete should be placed with a sliding plug pushed down the tube
ahead of it to prevent mixing of water and concrete.
V. The tremie pipe should always penetrate well into the concrete with adequate margin of
safety against accidental withdrawal if the pipe is surged to discharge the concrete.
d)All tremie tubes should be scrupulously cleaned before and after use.
4.4.8
Driven precast reinforced concrete piles:
Workability of concrete: The degree of workability in this case is "low" since the concrete is
placed where the section is not heavily reinforced, and also since the concrete in the pile is
vibrated with both internal as well as external vibrators. The minimum slump shall therefore
be 25mm to 50mm.
4.4.9
Formwork & moulds:
a) Only steel moulds manufactured out of sturdy steel sections and sheets to cast the
required size of the pile are to be used. Timber moulds shall not be permitted, under any
circumstances.
b) The mould shall sustain the stresses generated due to the use of immersion/plate
vibrators and some time even form vibrators, depending upon the size and strength of
the pile to be cast.
c) The manufacturing of the mould shall be simple and permit three sides to be opened
within 16 to 24 hours of casting by loosening the bolts without damaging the edges of the
pile.
d) Fixing' supports for the sides of the. mould shall be done from outside and no use of
through bolts through the concrete shall be permitted to support the opposite sides of the
Ideal Structures
Page 75 of 185
mould.
e) Proper mechanism shall be introduced to fix the sides to the top of the casting platform
so that the plate form vibrators can be operated without disturbing the mould.
f)
In case of square piles, provision for forming champers of the pile for the corners shall
be made in the mould itself.
g) The mould should be such that when the pile is de-moulded, all the surfaces of the pile,
except the side from which the concrete is laid, should get form finish.
h) No rendering or finishing shall be permitted on any surface of the concrete after demoulding. Piles whose surfaces are plastered or rendered, edges repaired, etc., shall be
rejected and removed from site.
i)
After every casting, when the sides of the mould are opened, the same shall be
cleaned thoroughly and form-oil shall be applied over the surface before the mould is
adjusted for filling the concrete for the next pile. The normal practice of applying grease
mixed with diesel or waste oil instead of the form-oil shall not be permitted.
4.4.10 Pre-casting concrete piles:
a) The casting yard shall be planned and laid out to ensure that the piles that are cast can be
lifted directly from their beds and transported to the storing yard with minimum
handling and avoiding any damage to the pile.
b) The casting yard shall have a well drained surface so that the water used for curing the
already cast piles does not accumulate on the yard inconveniencing the working on
subsequent piles.
c) The size of the casting platform shall be large enough to accommodate the minimum
number of piles to be cast for full 11 days depending upon the proposed progress of
work per day, as a pile once cast cannot be lifted from the casting bed till the expiry of
ten days, therefore no piles can be cast on these spaces till the expiry of ten days,
therefore no piles can be cast on these spaces till the piles more than 10 days old are
shifted.
d) The casting yard shall be well covered at its top and sides to avoid the direct sunrays
falling on the piles that are under set. The piles should also be protected from rain and
wind.
e) Before taking up actual concreting, the moulds to be concreted for full day's work shall
be fixed in position and preferably moulds for concreting on the subsequent day shall
also be kept ready in advance.
f) The inner faces of the mould shall be cleaned and form-oil of approved brand and
manufacture shall be applied.
g) The reinforcements shall be lowered carefully in the mould and fixed in position with
proper cover blocks and spacers on all surfaces.
Ideal Structures
Page 76 of 185
h) On getting formal approval of the Engineer for the fixing of formwork in position and on
getting the pre-measurements of the reinforcements recorded, concreting with specified
grade shall be taken up. The slump should be checked frequently and constant w/c ratio
shall be maintained.
i)
The piles should be cast from end to end, using immersion, form vibrators, avoiding over
vibration.
j)
Proper care should be taken to see that the concrete is packed in the mould and
consolidated. When the mould is full the top surface of concrete shall be neatly trowelled
and finished smooth.
k) Proper precaution shall be taken to ensure that the vibration from the adjoining work
does not affect the previously placed concrete for piles during setting period. On
completing the concreting for a particular pile the following information shall be
engraved (not painted) on each pile: Date of casting; Grade of concrete used; No. of lot.
The lot no. will help to locate the exact position where the particular pile has to be used.
4.4.11 Testing of concrete shall be as for RCC works.
4.4.12 Curing shall be as for pre-cast RCC works. In addition, the following shall apply:
a) The piles shall not be lifted from the casting bed for a minimum period of 10 days from
the date of casting.
b) When the piles are shifted to stacking yard after the expiry often days, where the piles
will have to be kept for a period of 28 days from the date of casting, the piles in stacks
shall be covered with sacks so that the piles do not come in contact with sun rays till they
attain full strength.
c) The Engineer may fix up the exact period of curing for a particular project considering
various factors.
4.4.13 Storage and handling:
a) After the expiry of 10 days from the date of casting, the piles arc to be removed from the
casting bed and shifted to the stacking yard where the piles shall be kept for a further
period of 18 days i.e., 28 days after casting and later till they are carried for driving.
b) The piles shall be stored on a firm ground which will not be liable for unequal
subsidence or settlement under the weight of the stack of piles.
c) Timber sections of suitable size shall be placed over the level ground to stack the piles on
top. The spacing between the timber sections shall be so adjusted that the piles in stack
are not subjected to undue bending stresses.
d) Spaces shall be left around the piles in the stack so that they can be lifted without
difficult and if necessary piles can be cured beyond 10 days.
e) The order of stacking the piles shall be such that the older piles can be withdrawn
without disturbing the newly placed piles. Separate stacks shall be provided for the piles
Ideal Structures
Page 77 of 185
of different lengths.
f) If ordered by the Engineer or if weather conditions so require, arrangements for curing
the piles for further period shall be made when the piles are stored in the stack.
g) Care shall be taken to see that the piles are not damaged or cracked at the time of lifting,
handling, transportation, etc.
h) While transporting from the stocking yard to the site, the piles shall be supported at
approximate lifting holes provided for the purpose. In case during transportation if the
piles are to be unloaded temporarily they shall be placed on trusties or blocks located at
the lifting points.
4.4.14 Driving piles:
a) The heads of the pre-cast concrete piles to be driven shall be protected with packing of
resilient material against the possible damage due to the use of heavy hammers. Care
shall be taken to see that packing is evenly spread and placed securely. On top of the
packing a helmet should be placed and provided with a dolly of hardwood or any
suitable material not thicker than the width of the pile.
b) The maximum set for a given stress shall be obtained by using heaviest hammer and
softest packing. The drop of the hammer shall be adjusted to suit the allowable stress in
the concrete.
c) Optimum driving conditions shall be maintained by regular replacement of packing
materials.
d) For driving a pile, any type of hammer can be used, provided the pile penetrates to the
prescribed depth or attains the specific resistance without getting damaged.
e) The hammer, helmets, dolly, the pile below should be co-axial and should sit perfectly
one over the other. However, the heaviest possible hammer should preferably be used
and the stroke should be so managed so as not to damage the pile. .
f) If a satisfactory set is achieved for ten consecutive blows with an appropriate hammer
and drop the method of driving should be repeated with caution. However, after the pile
has almost ceased to penetrate, the driving should be stopped, especially when a
hammer with moderate weight is used.
g) Where the rate of penetration suddenly changes without any satisfactory reasoning or
soil conditions, the pile driving shall suspended until the matter has been investigated
and a remedy arrived at.
h) Jetting with driving pile:
i. Jetting operations shall be carried out only when specifically ordered by the Engineer.
Jetting shall be carried in a manner that the stability of soil and the bearing capacity of
piles already driven is not in any way impaired. Similarly,' the safety of the adjoining
Ideal Structures
Page 78 of 185
structures shall be taken into consideration.
ii. For effective jetting, the quantity of water required shall be related to the cross sectional
area of the piles, including external jet pipes. In dense cohesion less soils, up to 2 liters of
water per minute per sq.cm. of pile cross section may be required. Less quantity of water
may be needed in loosely compacted soils. The water jet pressure shall be maintained
around 5.6 kg/sq.cm. or more. In case large quantity of water is used the draining
arrangement for the water that emerges on the ground shall be made.
iii. To minimize the risk of blockages, the nozzle should not be positioned at the point of the
toe. The arrangement of jets should be balanced to ascertain the penetration of the pile
vertically. It is advisable to surge down an independent pile or two pipes may be
attached to the opposite sides of the pile for effective jetting operation.
iv. The pile shall be allowed to enter the ground gradually after operating the water, under
the weight of pile and the hammer. Acceptable verticality shall be achieved by use of
rigid leaders, duly controlling the rate of penetration with a pile winch.
v. On achieving maximum apparent penetration with light driving by the method
prescribed above and when the water jets are running the further penetration may be
attained in the cohesion less soils. The piles shall be driven to the final position or set
when the jetting is complete.
vi. Before closing the driving operation, the jetting should be stopped and the driving shall
be continued by ordinary driving methods. If due to the ground disturbances, the pile
tips tend to be drawn towards the piles already driven, jetting should be stopped
immediately.
vii. The correct working of jets should be tested before the work on driving the pile is
commenced. If the pile is not provided with a built-in jet arrangement, independent jet
pipes down the outside of the pile can be used, and to achieve the best results, jets
working on several faces of the pile can be practical which will also assist maintained the
verticality.
4.4.14.1Deviation and tolerance for alignment and position of piles shall be as per IS:2911 and as for
bored cast-in-situ piles.
4.4.14.2Stripping pile-heads shall be done in such a manner that a minimum 50mm length of pile
projects into the pile cap. Sufficient length of reinforcement from the pile shall be
exposed for embedding the same inside the pile cap.
a) The stripping operation or exposing the reinforcement of the pile shall be done very
carefully without damaging the pile proper. In case any portion of the concrete cracks,
the defective portion shall be cut and the portion repaired with new concrete joining
properly with old concrete.
b) Lengthening piles: Where the length of a pile has to be increased either before Or during
driving, this may be done by casting additional concrete over the old pile. In such cases,
the original head of the pile is to be cut to expose minimum 200mm length of bars.
Ideal Structures
Page 79 of 185
c) On completion of welding / overlapping the reinforcement and tying the spirals, for the
extended length of reinforcements, the extra portion of the pile may be concreted, thus
extending the original pile.
4.4.15 Risen piles:
a) Where due to ground heave, when piles already driven to the final depth start rising
when adjacent piles are being driven, the measurement shall be noted at frequent
intervals during the driving on adjacent piles. On completion of driving the adjacent
piles, the piles that have risen shall again be driven back either to their original level or
up to a point of resistance.
4.4.16 Defective piles:
4.4.16.1
In case defective piles are formed, they shall be removed or left in place whichever is
convenient without affecting performance of the adjacent piles or cap as a whole and / or
as directed by the Engineer. Additional piles shall be provided to replace them as
directed, all costs and liabilities thereof being borne by the Contractor.
4.4.16.2
Any deviation from the designed location, alignment or load capacity of any pile shall
be noted and adequate measures taken well before concreting of the pile cap and plinth
beam, if the deviations are beyond permissible limit.
4.4.16.3
During chipping of the pile top, manual chipping may be permitted after three days of
pile-casting. Where the Engineer permits pneumatic tools for chipping, the chipping shall
be done not earlier than seven days after pile casting.
4.4.16.4
After concreting, the actual quantity of concrete shall be compared with the average
obtained from observations actually made in the case of a few piles initially cast. 1 f the
actual quantity is found to be considerably less, special investigations shall be conducted
and appropriate measures taken as directed by the Engineer.
4.4.17 Measurement:
a) Dimension shall be measured nearest to a cm. Measurement of length on completion
shall be along the axis of pile and shall be measured from top of shoe to the bottom of
pile cap. No allowance shall be made for bulking, shrinkage, cut off tolerance, wastage
and hiring of tools, equipment for excavating, driving, etc.
b) The rate includes the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described
above including pile embedded in pile cap except reinforcement, pile cap and grade
beam.
4.4.18 Load test on piles:
4.4.18.1
General:
a) Piles shall be tested as specified in IS:2911 (Part 4).
b) The load test on a concrete pile shall not be carried out earlier than 28 days of its casting.
Initial test shall be carried on test pile which is not used as working pile and routine tests
Ideal Structures
Page 80 of 185
shall be carried out as a check on working pile. Routine test shall be one-half to two
percent of total number of piles or as specified, applicable to vertical and lateral load.
4.4.18.2
Vertical load test:
a)
General: Compressive load shall be applied to the pile top by means of a hydraulic jack
against suitable load frame capable of providing reaction and the settlements recorded
QY suitable dial gauges.
b)
Preparation of pile-head: Pile-head shall be chipped off to horizontal plane and the
projecting steel shall ¥ cut or bent and top finished smooth and leveled with material as
specified to give a plane surface which is normal to the axis of the pile. A bearing plate
with a hole at the centre shall be placed on the head of pile for the jacks to rest.
c)
Loading platform: A proper loading platform which shall remain stable at the maximum
specified load shall be designed and installed by the Contractor. For single pile, two dial
gauges, placed in diametrically opposite positions and equidistant from the pile axis,
shall be fixed to the pile and bear on surfaces on the reference frame. Four dial gauges
are to be used for groups having 0.0 I mm sensitivity. The arrangement shall be
approved by the Engineer.
d) Application of load: The test is to be carried out by applying a series of downward
incremental loads (20 percent of safe load on pile). This method of application of
increment of test load and taking of measurement or displacement in each stage shall be
maintained till the rate of displacement is either 0.1 mm in the first 30 minutes or 0.2mm
in the first one hour or 2 hours, whichever occurs first. The test load shall be maintained
for 24 hours. This method is applicable for both initial and routine test.
e) Safe load on single pile for initial test shall be deduced as the least of the following:
i)
Two-thirds of the final load at which the total displacement attains a value of 12mm
unless otherwise stated, in which case the safe load should correspond to total
displacement permissible.
ii) 50 percent of the final load at which the total displacement equal 10% of the of pile
diameter.
f) Routine test shall be carried for a test load of one-and-a-half times the working load,
maximum settlement not to exceed l2mm or as stated.
g) Safe load on group of piles for initial test shall be the least of the following:
i) Final load at which total displacement is 25mm Or as stated.
ii)
Two -thirds of final load at which the total displacement is 40mm.
h) Routine test shall be carried for a test load equal to working load, the maximum
settlement not to exceed 25mm or as specified.
4.4.18.3Maintained load method:
Ideal Structures
Page 81 of 185
a) This is applicable for both initial and routine test. In this method, application of
increment of test load and taking of measurement or displacement in each stage of
loading is to be maintained till rate of displacement of the pile top is either 0.10mm in the
first 30 minutes or 0.2mm in the first one hour or till 2 hours, whichever occurs first. If
the limit of permissible displacement is not exceeded, testing of pile is not required to be
continued further. The test load shall be maintained for 24 hours.
b) Pile test data such as load, displacement and time shall be recorded in suitable prescribed
tabular form.
c) Results shall be graphically presented by suitable curves.
d) Test shall be carried out in proper manner and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
After the test is completed the test cap shall be dismantled and pile surface shall be
resorted to original shape.
e) Measurement: Each completed test shall be enumerated for initial test, routine test
separately and for different load ranges. The rate includes the cost of labour, material
and all the operations described above such as preparatory work, trimming of pile head,
etc" complete.
4.4.18.4Cyclic vertical load testing:
a) General: This process shall be used in case of initial test to find out separately skin
friction and point bearing load on single piles of uniform diameter. For guidance, IS:2911
(Part 4) shall be referred.
b) Preparatory pile head, loading platform and application of load shall be as for vertical
load test.
c) Alternate loading and unloading shall be carried out at each stage as for vertical load
test. Each loading stage shall be maintained as for maintained load method. Each
unloading stage shall be maintained for 15 minutes and the subsequent elastic rebound
in the pile should be measured accurately by dial gauges as for lateral load test.
d) The analysis of test results shall be done as per instructions of the Engineer, conforming
to procedures in IS: 2911.
e) After the test is completed, the test cap shall be dismantled and pile surface shall be
restored to original shape.
f) Measurement: Each completed test shall be enumerated for different load ranges. The
rate includes the cost of labour, materials and all the operations described above, such as
preparatory work, trimming of pile-head, etc., complete.
4.4.18.5Lateral load testing:
a) Load platform: A proper loading platform shall be installed as specified. Hydraulic jack
shall be mounted with gauge between two piles or pile groups under test.
b) Application of load: Full load imposed by the jack shall be taken as lateral resistance on
Ideal Structures
Page 82 of 185
each pile or group. Load should be applied in increments of about 20 percent of the
estimated safe load. The next increment shall be applied after the rate of displacement is
approximately equal to 0.1 mm per 30 minutes.
c) The safe lateral load on pile shall be reckoned as the least of the following:
Fifty percent of the final load at which total displacement increases to 12mm.
Final load when total displacement is 5mm.
Load corresponding to any other specified displacement as per requirement.
i.
ii.
iii.
d) Pile group shall be tested as per actual conditions as far as possible.
e) Dial gauge tips shall rest on central portion of glass plate fixed on the side of pile.
f) Displacements: Displacement shall be read by atleast two dial gauges of 0.1 mm
sensitivity spaced at 300mm and kept horizontally one above the other and displacement
is interpolated at cut-off level. One gauge placed diametrically opposite to jack shall
directly measures displacement. Where, it is not possible to locate one of the dial gauges
in the line of the jack axes, two dial gauges may be kept at a distance of 300mm at a
suitable height and the displacement interpolated at load point from similar triangles.
g) Arrangement and test procedure shall be duly approved by the Engineer.
h) Measurement: Each completed test shall be enumerated for different load ranges. The
rate includes the cost of labour, materials and all the operations described above.
4.4.19
Coverage of rates:
4.4.19.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for pile works are
deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages, temporary liners,
bentonite slurry, curing, transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant,
machinery, testing, pile integrity tests, documentation and expert services for designing
mix, apart from clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.4.19.2.1 Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, load tests, waterproofing compounds,
permanent liner, formwork, centering, shuttering, de-shuttering and reinforcement costs
are paid for, under separate Items.
4.4.19.2 The cost of admixtures, such as plasticisers and retarders, for any RMC used are deemed to
be covered under 1jhe rates for the respective piling Items only, and no extra is payable to
the Contractor.
4.5 BRICK WORK
4.5.1
IS:432
Codes and Standards
Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement.
IS:I077
Common burnt clay building bricks.
IS:1200
(Part 3) Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works: Brickwork
Ideal Structures
Page 83 of 185
IS:2185
. (All the Parts) Specification for concrete masonry units.
IS:2212
Code of practice for brickwork.
IS:2572
Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete block masonry.
IS:2691
Specification for Burnt clay facing bricks.
IS:3495
(All the parts) Method of test for burnt clay building bricks.
IS:3696
(All the parts) Safety code for scaffolds and ladders.
IS:5454
Method of sampling of clay building bricks.
IS:604 I
Code of practice for construction of autoclaved cellular concrete block masonry.
IS:6042
Code of practice for construction of lightweight concrete block masonry.
IS:6441
(All the parts) Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products.
IS: 12440
Specification for pre-cast concrete stone masonry blocks.
4.5.2 Materials
a) Cement used shall conform to IS:269, IS:81 12 or IS:455.
b) Sand shall be salt-free, well-graded river or pit sand and it shall conform to IS: 1542 for
plaster and to IS:2116 for masonry mortar. Sand for the mortar shall be evenly graded
from coarse to fine, free from loam, clay, dust, organic matter, etc.
c) Water shall be clean and reasonably free from deleterious materials such as oil, acids,
alcohol, salts and vegetable growth.
d) Bricks used shall be machine-moulded, chamber-burnt and conforming to 18:1077. Brick
shall be whole, sound, well burnt, free from cracks, well defined edges, well shaped,
uniform in size and shall emit a clear ringing sound when struck. The required
compressive strength of the bricks is given in the BOQ.
e) Reinforcement: Mild steel bars conforming to IS 432, 6mm diameter, shall be used for
half brick masonry. Alternatively, galvanized wire netting of woven hexagonal wire of 20
gauge conforming to IS:3150 of width suiting the thickness of the wall, may be used.
f) The workmanship shall conform to IS:2250, for preparation of masonry mortars, and to
IS: 1661 for plaster mortars
g) The cement and sand shall be proportioned by volume in gauge boxes and thoroughly
mixed dry. The water shall be added by sprinkler just sufficient to make a stiff and
workable paste. In case of mechanical mixing, the mortar shall be mixed for atleast 3
minutes and for hand mixing the mortar shall be shoved back and forth for 10 to 15
minutes with additions of water.
Ideal Structures
Page 84 of 185
h) Mortars shall be used up within two hours of the first contact of the cement with water.
All materials remaining after this period shall be discarded.
i)
Scaffolding, in general shall conform to IS:2212, and shall be designed to withstand the
required loads and to ensure complete safety of workmen and materials. The scaffolding
shall be double, i.e., it shall have two sets of stands. Where this is not possible, the inner
end of the scaffolding poles shall rest in a hole provided in a header course only. Only
one header for each pole shall be left out. Holes, if provided, shall be filled in and made
good by the Contractor at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.5.3 Workmanship:
The whole of the brickwork shall be carried out in a uniform manner according to
IS:2212.
a) Brickwork shall set out and built to the dimension, thickness and heights shown on the
drawings, true to plumb, line and level. All brickwork shall be in English bond and half
brick shall not be used where required for bond.
b) All the bricks shall be kept under water till they are completely soaked and used on the
works on their becoming skin dry.
c) Bricks shall be laid in full mortar beds with shoved joints. The joints shall not exceed
10mm in thickness and shall be full of mortar, close, well finished and neatly struck.
d) The vertical joints in any course shall not be nearer than quarter of brick length from
those in the course below. All joints shall be of same width except for small variations to
maintain the bond. No portion of brickwork shall be raised more than 1 metre above
another in a day. If the mortar in any course has begun to set, the joints shall be raked out
before another course is laid.
e) The topmost course of brickwork under a reinforced concrete beam shall be wedged
against reinforced concrete surface and the joint well filled with mortar.
f) The joints shall be flushed up thoroughly with mortar as the work proceeds. Where
brickwork is to receive plaster, the joints shall be raked to a depth of 12mm to provide
proper bond. The brickwork, as it progresses, shall be thoroughly watered on its faces
and top. New work shall be properly bonded with the old work. Old surface of
unfinished work shall be cleaned and thoroughly watered before joining new work to it.
g) Any work in which the mortar perishes shall be dismantled and rebuilt by the Contractor
at his own expense. Half brickwork walls shall be reinforced with 2 nos. 6mm dia mild
steel bars, provided at every fourth course or as directed by the Engineer. The
reinforcement shall be quite straight on the mortar. Half the mortar for the joint shall first
be laid, the reinforcement placed, and then the other half laid, so that the reinforcement
is fully embedded in the mortar. In case of 75mm thick brickwork, it shall be reinforced
with 20 gauge galvanised wire of 12.5mm aperture size. The free ends of the
reinforcement shall be keyed into the mortar joint of the main brickwork.
h) The Contractor shall carry out work in as clean a manner as possible and shall remove
Ideal Structures
Page 85 of 185
excess materials and mortar droppings and rubbish daily. Where brick walls and stone
masonry are to receive plaster, the joints shall be cleaned of excess mortar and raked to a
depth of 12mm and the surface shall be brushed clean. During cleaning operations,
adjacent work shall be protected and any damage resulting from improper protection
shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.5.4
Curing:
a)
4.5.5
All brickwork shall be kept wet for atleast 10 days after it is laid.
Concrete block masonry:
Various types of concrete block masonry, such as with solid blocks, hollow blocks and
autoclaved aerated blocks, shall be carried out using material, testing procedures and
workmanship specified in the relevant BIS codes.
4.5.6
Coverage of rates:
4.5.6.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for brickwork are
deemed to, include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages, curing,
transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery and documentation,
apart from clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.5.6.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, waterproofing compounds and
reinforcement costs are paid for, under separate Items.
4.6. STONE MASONRY
4.6.1
Codes and Standaards
IS: 1121
IS: 1124
Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones
Method of tests for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and
porosity of natural building stones.
Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stone for
masonry work.
Recommendations of dressing of natural building stones.
IS:1127
IS: 1129
IS:1597
Code of practice for construction of stone masonry.
IS:3696
4.6.2
Safety code for scaffolds and ladders.
Materials:
a) Cement mortar shall be as specified for brickwork.
b) Water shall be clean and reasonably free from deleterious materials such as oils, acids,
c) Stone shall conform to IS: 1127. Rubble stone shall be strong, dense, compact, closegrained and uniform in texture and colour with reasonable facility of working. It shall be
free from cracks, flaws, decay and sad holes and shall be taken from approved quarries.
A fresh fracture of stone should be bright, clean and sharp without loose grains and free
Ideal Structures
Page 86 of 185
from any dull earthy appearance. The stone shall be properly dressed after quarrying
before they are put to use in the structure.
4.6.3 Workmanship:
4.6.3.1 General requirements for construction shall conform to IS: 1597 (Part-I) and as specified
herein.
4.6.3.2 Stone masonry shall set out and built to the dimension, thickness and heights shown on the
drawings, true to plumb, line and level.
4.6.3.3 Dressing:
a)
The stones after being fully cleaned and wetted are to be set in the work as received from
the quarry and without further dressing of any sort except that of knocking off weak
corners and edges with the mason's hammer. All necessary chases for joggles, dowels
and cramps shall be formed in the stones beforehand.
4.6.3.4 Bond and laying:
a)
The stones shall be carefully laid, ensuring that vertical joints are staggered as far as
possible, atleast by atleast 75mm and solidly bedded. No joint shall exceed 20mm in
thickness. Chips of stones and spalls are to be wedged into the work, wherever necessary
so as to avoid thick beds or joints of mortar. No dry work or hollow spaces shall be
allowed in the masonry anywhere.
b)
All joints shall be full of mortar. The maximum thickness of joints shall be 20mm for
random rubble and 10mm for square rubble. Raking the joints to expose the edges of all
face stones for a depth of atleast 20mm shall be done at the time of building the masonry
wherever separate sunk pointing is to be done. All surfaces shall be brushed clean to
expose rock face after every day's work.
c)
Every stone whether large or small shall be set flush in mortar, smaller stones used in the
filling being carefully selected to fit into interstices between the larger ones roughly. The
outside and the inside faces of masonry in walls must be carried out in the same place as
the faces of the preceding length.
d)
Chips and spalls of stones shall be used wherever necessary to avoid thick mortar beds
or joints and it shall also be ensured that no hollow spaces are left in the masonry. The
use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of interstices between adjacent stones in
hearting and these shall not exceed 20 per cent of
the quantity of stone masonry. Chips shall not be used below hearting stones to bring these up to
the level of face stones.
4.6.4
a)
Hearting stones:
The hearting or interior filling of a wall face shall consist of rubble stones not less than
150mm in any direction and shall be carefully laid by hammering down with a wooden
mallet into position and solidly bedded in the mortar.
4.6.5
a)
Face stones:
The face' stones shall be laid as far as possible without pinnings in front and they shall be
selected from the mass of quarry stone for greater size, good beds and uniform in colour.
They shall be laid so that they shall tail back and bond well into the work and shall not
be of greater height than either the breadth or face or length of tail in the work.
4.6.6
Bond or header stones:
Ideal Structures
Page 87 of 185
a)
Atleast two per square metre of front face area shall be through stones evenly distributed
throughout the wall.
The through stones shall fulfill all the conditions of the face stone except as regards their
length which must be not less than the wall thickness for wall up to 600mm thickness
and must run right through the wall. In thicker wall, a line of two or more through
stones must be laid from face to back overlapping each other atleast 150mm.
Through stones should not be in the same vertical plane in successive courses. For facility
of checking, they shall be marked and the marks shall be capable of being easily rubbed
out.
Plain cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement, 3 coarse sand, 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) may be used in bond stones, if approved by the Engineer.
b)
c)
d)
4.6.7
a)
Quoins
` The quoins or corner stones shall be selected stones neatly dressed with hammer and I or
chisel to form the requited corner angle and laid header and stretcher alternatively.
b)
The bed and top surface of quoins shall be chisel dressed to give horizontal joints. The
quoins shall have a uniform chisel draft of atleast 25mm width at four edges of each
exposed face, all the edges of the same face being in one place.
No quoin stone shall be smaller than 0.025 cu.m. (25 cubic decimetre) in volume and it
shall also not be less than 300mm in length, 25% of them being not less than 500mm in
length.
At all angular junctions, the stones at each alternate course shall be well-bonded into
the respective courses of the adjacent masonry.
c)
d)
4.6.8.
Jamb stones
a)
The jambs shall be made with stones specified for quoins except that the stones provided
on the jambs shall have their length equal to the thickness of the wall for walls up to
600mm and a line of headers shall be provided for walls thicker than 600mm as specified
for bond.
4.6.9
Finishing:
a)
Where lime mortar is used, the exposed faces of work shall be cement flush pointed,
unless otherwise specified. When cement mortar is used the joints may be flushed as the
work proceeds.
b)
Where stone work is to receive plaster or to be pointed other than flush pointing, the
joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 12mm to provide proper bond.
c)
Any work in which mortar perishes shall be dismantled and rebuilt by the Contractor at
his own expense.
Scaffolding:
4.6.10
a)
The scaffolding shall be strong enough to withstand all loads likely to come on it.
b)
Single scaffolding having one set of vertical supports shall be used and one end of the
horizontal scaffolding member shall rest in a hole provided in the masonry. The support
shall be sound and strong tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding
Ideal Structures
Page 88 of 185
planks / jallis shall be fixed.
c)
4.6.11
a)
b)
Holes meant as resting space for horizontal members shall not be left in pillars less than
one metre in width. All holes in the masonry shall be made good as the scaffolding is
dismantled.
Cleaning:
The Contractor shall carry out work in as clean a manner as possible and shall remove
excess material and mortar droppings and rubbish daily.
Where stone walls are to receive plaster, the joints shall be cleaned of excess mortar and
raked to a depth of 12mm and the surface shall be brushed clean.
c)
During cleaning operations, adjacent work shall be protected
and any damage resulting from improper
protection shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.6.12
Curing shall be done for a period of seven days.
4.6.13
Coverage of rates:
4.6.13.1 Unless otherwise indicated ii1 the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for stone masonry
are deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages, curing,
transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinely and documentation,
apart from clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.6.13.2 Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, waterproofing compounds, if any are
specified, are paid for, under separate Items.
Ideal Structures
Page 89 of 185
4.7
4.7.1
WOOD WORK & JOINERY
4.7.2 Woodwork:
IS:287
4.7.3
IS:303
IS:399
Recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content of timber used
for different purposes.
Specification for plywood for general purposes.
Classification of commercial timber and their zonal distribution.
IS:707
Glossary of terms applicable to timber technology & utilization.
IS:883
Code of practice for design of structural timber in buildings.
IS:1003
(All the parts) Timber panelled and glazed shutters.
IS:1120
Coach screws.
IS:1658
Specification for Fibre hardboards.
IS:1659
IS:2191
IS:2202
IS:4021
Specification for Block boards.
(All the parts) Wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type).
(All the parts) Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type).
Specification for Timber door, window and ventilator frame.
Treatment of timber:
4.7.3.1 The treatment shall be done after each individual piece forming a frame or a shutter has
been worked upon and before they are joined to form the frame shutter.
4.7.3.2 Wherever treated country wood is specified, the treatment shall be done either with
pentachlorophenol (organic solvent type) or copper-chrome-boric composition (water
soluble type). Pentachlorophenol shall be a fully chlorinated derivative of phenol.
Copper-chrome-boric composition is to consist of boric acid, copper sulphate and sodium
dichromate or potassium dichromate in the proportion of 1.5:3:4 respectively. The
anhydrous solid preservatives shall contain atleast 95% of the above chemicals.
4.7.3.3 The moisture content in the timber to be treated shall be reduced to a maximum of 25%
by suitable means. Two coats of the chemical is to be applied by brushing, the second
coat not to be applied until the first has dried. The timber members thus treated shall be
allowed to dry for 4 to 5 weeks before incorporation in the works.
4.7.2
Woodwork in general:
4.7.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, all woodwork shall be done with first class teakwood
perfectly dry, well seasoned, uniform in colour, sound, straight, free from gap, crack,
knots, shakes and other defects and any appearance of rot. Country wood wherever
specified shall be locally available hardwood like Sal, Maddi and Kamba or its approved
equivalent.
a) All wood shall be well-seasoned, best quality, from approved places and shall be free
from defects.
b) All woodwork shall be neatly and truly finished to exact dimensions and details as per
drawings without patching or plugging of any kind. Woodwork which would be
Ideal Structures
Page 90 of 185
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
4.7.5
4.7.5.1
4.7.5.2
a)
b)
c)
exposed to view when the work is complete shall be accurately planed and smoothened
by means of rough paper.
Unless otherwise specified or directed, all joints shall be mortise and tenon joints with
the ends of tenons exposed to view. Joints shall fit truly and full without fillings. Joints
shall be painted with white or red lead, as approved, before frames are put together.
Holes of correct sizes shall be drilled before inserting screws. Screws shall be dipped in
suitable oil before being inserted in the woodwork. Heads of screws shall be sunk and
puttied.
Portions of woodwork built into or against masonry or concrete and all the faces of
rafters, purlins, beams, wall plates or framework for dropped ceiling or wall panelling
shall be treated with two coats of hot so lignum or creosote oil or other wood
preservatives as approved by the Engineer and rate quoted for woodwork must include
for this.
Running members shall be in single lengths where possible. Joints, if any necessary shall
be made in a first class manner and based on approval of the Engineer only.
All the woodwork shall be of high standard of workmanship and shall have to be subject
to the approval of the Engineer before these can be finally fixed in position. If desired by
the Engineer, the exposed surfaces shall be retouched and finished up after the
woodwork has been fixed in position. No primer shall be applied to the woodwork until
and unless the woodwork is inspected and passed by the Engineer.
The rate for woodwork shall include the cost of materials, all sawing, jointing, framing,
smoothening, labour and materials for raising and fixing in position and all
workmanship. It shall also include fixing and supply of all straps, bolts, nails, spikes,
keys, wedges, pins, screws, glue, wood preservative treatment etc., necessary for the
completed work in all respects unless measured separately.
Joinery:
I .
The general specification shall conform to the specification for woodwork described
above.
Door, window and ventilator frames shall be of exact sizes and in strict accordance
with the drawings.
The frames are to be dovetailed tenonned joints and fixed to the masonry work or
concrete work with mild steel holdfasts. The holdfasts shall be 40mmx3mmx400mm
long, unless otherwise mentioned in the BOQ, fish-tailed at end and screwed to the frame
in formed rebates with 3 nos. 50mm long countersunk woodscrews of approved quality.
Unless otherwise stated, each door shall be provided with 3 nos. and each window with
2 nos. holdfasts on each extreme vertical member of the frame. The holdfasts shall be
fixed only on the face of the frame which butts against the masonry or concrete work.
The holdfasts shall be embedded in cement concrete block 300xl00xl50mm 1:3:6 (I
cement,3 coarse sand, 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) or as specified in the
BOQ and approved by the Engineer.
Particular care shall be taken to see that the frames are fixed perfectly in plumb, line and
level, and the junction of the frame and masonry or concrete faces packed fully with
cement mortar I :3. In case of doors, the vertical members shall be either 25mm or 40mm.
more in length depending on the thickness of the flooring concrete to enable the feet of
the members to be embedded in the flooring concrete. Where plaster butts against the
frame, 10mm deep rebate shall be given to serve as key to the plaster as shown in the
drawings.
All doors and window members shall be cut and framed together as soon as possible
after commencement of work and stacked as directed to final season and to be edged and
Ideal Structures
Page 91 of 185
d)
4.7.5.3
a)
c)
d)
e)
4.7.5.4
a)
b)
c)
glued prior to being hung. I
All hinges shall be countersunk into the frame as well as the shutter, recess being of exact
size. Screws, 38mm, shall be used for 100mm hinges and under. Screw-heads shall be of
such diameter as to fit completely the holes and cups in the fittings which they secure.
Hanging floor stopper or box type or wooden cleat of size 35x35x75mm shall be fixed to
all the doors as indicated in the BOQ and shown in the drawings. Hooks and eyes of the
sizes indicated in the schedule of fittings shall be provided to all windows. During the
progress of the work, the frames shall be adequately protected from injury as directed by
the Engineer. The rate shall include all labour and materials herein mentioned and is for
the completed work unless otherwise specified in the BOQ.
Panelled shutters:
The materials and general workmanship shall conform to specification described earlier.
b)The styles and rails shall be 35mm thick unless otherwise specified, moulded and
mortised and glued together in a workman like manner. The styles and top, bottom, lock
and frieze rails shall be moulded and of widths as per drawing. In wooden panelled
shutters, unless otherwise shown in the drawing, panels shall be splayed and fielded on
both sides and recesses of the frame receiving the panel finished with a mould.
The thickness of the panels of the shutter, unless otherwise specified, shall be 19mm for
35mm shutters and 12mm for 25mm shutters. Panels shall be of one piece upto 300mm
clear width for teak and no joint shall be allowed in the panel for such width of panels. In
case where the clear width exceeds 300mm, the Contractor may be allowed by the
Engineer to use minimum number of joints in the panels, provided that the joints are
tongued arid grooved and glued together and filled fully and perfectly and finished with
a high standard of workmanship.
In particleboard panelled shutters, the particleboards shall be made of wood particles
bonded with phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin as per IS:3087 / IS:3097. It shall be of
12mm thick veneered or unveneered finish as mentioned in the BOQ.
The rate shall include all labour and materials, fittings, fixing in position etc., and is for
the completed work. Factory made panelled doors wherever specified in the BOQ shall
conform to the relevant IS quoted therein.
Glazed shutters:
Unless otherwise specified, the glazing shall be patent, flattened sheet glass of the best
quality and of approved make. It shall be plain, pin-headed, frosted or wired glass as
shown in the BOQ and shall be free from flaws, specks, bubbles or distortions. The
thickness shall be 4mm and 5.5mm for window and door shutters, respectively, unless
otherwise indicated in the BOQ.
The thickness of wired glass shall be 6.4mm+004mm. The wire-mesh used in the wired
glass shall be made of steel wire 0.46 to 0.56mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be
square or diamond with wires welded or hexagonal with wires twisted. The wire mesh
shall be embedded completely in the glass sheet atleast I mm from the surface and shall
not be exposed at any place. Wire mesh shall not contain more than 3 broken wires per
square metre of the wired glass.
The general specification for glazed shutters shall be similar to that for panelled shutters
described above. Styles and rails in the glazed shutters shall be rebated to the size as
shown in the drawings to receive the glass. Sash bars shall be of full thickness of the
shutter and of width as shown in the drawing. These shall be moulded, rebated and
Ideal Structures
Page 92 of 185
mitred on side to receive the glass as per drawing. Unless otherwise specified, glass
panes shall be fixed by means of beads and suitable brass nails. The rate shall be for the
completed work fitted and fixed in position.
4.7.5.5
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
4.7.5.6
a)
4.7.5.7
a)
4.7.5.8
a)
b)
4.7.5.9
Flush door shutters:
Unless otherwise specified, all flush doors shall be 35mm thick made width solid core
(block board / particleboard) construction with a frame, well-balanced battens, faced
with superior quality plywood and commercial or decorative matched teak veneered on
both sides. The core stock shall be made from well-seasoned selected timber and treated
with preservative chemicals. The particle boards shall be made of wood particles bonded
with phenol formaldehyde resin as per IS:3087 / IS:3097. The plywood face and the teak
veneer shall be glued into the solid core with water proof resinous glue under pressure
and heat. Teak veneers shall be well selected, well matched for colour, figure and grains.
The shutters shall be rebated in case of double leaf door. Where specified, flush doors
shall be fitted with vision panels, rectangular or round, and louvres.
The workmanship and overall finish shall be of very high standard and shall be to the
entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
'.
The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's specifications to get the same approved
by the Engineer before the flush doors are procured and fixed.
The construction of the flush doors shall be such that no difficulty should arise in fixing
mortise locks, hydraulic closers, floor springs etc.
Ledged and braced shutters:
Door shutters shall have battens secured to three ledges with two braces between the
ledges. Battens shall have rebated joints. Each batten shall be fixed by means of 2 screws
with each edge and brace. The width of battens shall not be less than 150mm or as shown
in the drawings. Unless otherwise mentioned, the thickness of battens, ledge and brace
shall be 19mm or as per drawings in case of 35m thick shutters. The width of the ledges
and braces shall be as per drawing.
Wire gauze shutters:
These shall be similar to glazed shutters except that the glazing shall be replaced by
galvanized MS wire gauze of IS gauze designation 85G with wire of diameter 0.56mm
or as approved by the Engineer. In case of wooden joinery these shall be fixed in the
rebates of rails and styles by means of suitable treated country wood / teakwood
beading as per drawings, with suitable brass nails. All wire gauze panels shall be in one
piece, no joints being allowed. Where specified, galvanized wire mesh / stainless steel
mesh shall be of the above gauze. The rate shall be for the completed work.
Cupboards:
The cupboard shutters shall be of 19mm / 12mm thick particleboard bonded with phenol
formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive as indicated in the BOQ.
Shelves shall be of required thickness as indicated in the BOQ with particle board
bonded with Phenol Formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive.
Wooden handrails:
Ideal Structures
Page 93 of 185
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.7.5.10
I
a)
Wooden handrails wherever shown in drawings shall be of specially selected first class
teakwood fixed to concrete or metal balustrade with concealed steel or metal lugs and
bolts as per drawing.
Wherever specified, approved treated country wood shall be used for handrails in place
of teakwood.
Joints shall be made with concealed screws and dowels. All bends, mitres, covers,
moulds, etc., shall be strictly to proper profile and finely smoothened by sand paper.
The hand rail shall be finished with wax polishing or French polishing or painting as per
direction of d)
Engineer. The rate shall include the cost of polishing / painting also
and is for the completed work.
Ferrocement doors:
Ferrocement doors shall be made of 16G wire mesh with size 20x60mm diagonals and
3.25mm wide strands 1.6mm thick weighing not less than 3.633 kg/sq.m., embedded in
rich cement mortar 1:3 (I cement and 3 fine sand) laid in two layers totalling to 12mm
thick of required sizes and shapes. The shutters shall be fixed with hinges of approved
quality and with bolts and nuts as per details.
Builder's hardware:
4.7.6
4.7.6.1
Codes
IS:204
Tower bolts.
IS:205
Specification for non-ferrous metal butt hinges.
IS:208
Specification for door handles.
IS:281
Mild steel sliding door bolts aldrops for use with padlocks.
IS:363
Specification for hasps and staples.
IS:412
Expanded metal steel sheets for general purpose.
IS:419
Putty for use on window frames.
IS:451
Wood screws.
IS:723
Steel countersunk head wire nails.
IS:1823
Specification for floor door stoppers.
IS:2209
Specification for mortise lock (vertical type).
IS:2681
Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use
with
padlocks.
4.7.6.2
IS:3 I 78
Hexagonal bolts and nuts.
IS:3564
Specification for door closers (hydraulically regulated).
IS:3847
Door handles for mortise night latches.
IS:42 18
Commercial bolts and nuts.
IS:6607
Specification for rebated mortise Iocks (vertical type).
Builder's hardware shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards and shall be provided
as shown in the drawings or as indicated in the BOQ. They shall be of the best quality
and complete with all necessary screws, bolts, plugs and other fittings. The finish on all
Ideal Structures
Page 94 of 185
the exposed faces of lever handles, plates and fittings shall be of silver anodized
aluminium.
4.7.6.3
Hardware fittings for doors, windows & ventilators:
a)
All mortise or rim locks, latches; cabinet and wardrobe locks, hydraulic door closers,
floor springs, etc., shall be of approved make. The rate shall include for all necessary
screws, other adjuncts, fixing in position and is for the completed work. The finish shall
be as specified in the BOQ.
b)
Door, window and ventilator fittings shall be as per the BOQ. The rates for doors,
windows and ventilators shutters shall include the cost of fixing the fittings, with
necessary brass screws to the shutters and the frame. The cost of fittings only shall be
separately paid.
4.7.6.4
Fixing or ironmongery:
a)
Ironmongery shall be fixed solidly to all doors, cupboards and panels and in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
b)
Hinges shall be carefully housed or led into doors and frames.
c)
Ironmongery shall be carefully wrapped and protected until completion.
d)
The Contractor should allow for removing and re fixing of fitting during any painting
operations.
e)
Metal sockets shall be provided to all tower, barrel and drop bolts where the shoots enter
brick masonry, stone masonry or concrete. These shall be securely fixed flush with the
surface into mortise and cemented. M011ise plates shall be used over holes in woodwork.
f)
On completion, all locks, catches and similar items of ironmongery shall be properly
cleaned, tested and oiled. All keys shall be clearly labelled with metal or hardboard tags
of approximate size 50mm x 20mm securely fixed to the keys and handed over to the
Engineer.
4.7.7
Coverage of rates:
4.7.7.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for woodwork and
joinery works are deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages,
curing, transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery and
documentation, apart from clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.7.7.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, finishing works, if any are specified, are
paid for, under separate Items. '.
4.8 STEEL & ALUMINIUM WORKS
4.8.1
IS:412
Expanded metal steel sheets for general purposes.
Ideal Structures
Page 95 of 185
4.8.2
a)
b)
4.8.3
a)
IS: I 038
Steel doors, windows and ventilators.
IS: 1361
Steel windows for industrial building.
IS: 1977
Structural steel (Ordinary quality).
IS:2062
Steel for general structural purposes.
IS:2108
Blackheart malleable iron casting.
IS:4351
Specification for steel door frames.
IS:6248
Metal rolling shutters and rolling grills.
Steel grills:
The grills of windows, verandahs, balconies, etc. shall be of mild steel. The design of
grills and shapes and sizes of various components shall be in accordance with the
drawings. The edges, angles and co
rners shall be clean and true to shape. The joints
shall be interlocked and over-lapping and neatly spot-welded in such a way that the grill
is rigid.
Where moulded grills are specified, the moulded work shall be according to the
drawings and shall have clear, straight and sharply defined profile.
Steel gates:
Steel gates shall be fabricated and fixed in position strictly as per design and drawing.
All intersections or meeting of all members shall be welded and the workmanship shall
be of high quality to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. After fixing in position, these
shall be cleaned off dust, dirt, rust or scales and rubbed with emery paper. Two coats of
synthetic enamel paint over a coat of zinc chromate primer shall be applied. The rates for
the gate shall include the cost of locking arrangements, hanging arrangements, jamming
pintels with PCC I :3:6 with 20mm nominal size aggregate, etc. The rate is for the
completed work in all respects.
4.8.4
Rolling shutters:
4.8.4.1
Rolling shutters shall be of approved make and conforming to IS:6248, including
necessary locking arrangement and handles etc., suitable for fixing in the position as
specified i.e. outside or inside on or below lintel or between jambs of the opening. The
door shall be either push-pull1:ype or operated with chain and crank device. Shutters
upto 10 sq.m. shall be of push-pull type and shutters with an area of over 10 sq.m. shall
generally be provided with reduction gear operated by mechanical device with chain or
handle. Where bearings are specified for ease of operation, these shall be paid for
separately.
Shutters shall consist of MS laths 1.25mm thick and 80mm wide or as specified, machinerolled and straightened with an effective bridge depth of l6mm, interlocked together
throughout their entire length, jointed together at the end with end locks and mounted
on specially designed pipe shaft. Each lath section shall be a contiQuous single strip
piece without any joint.
The springs shall be preferably of coiled type, manufactured from high tensile spring
steel wire or strip of adequate strength to balance the shutters in all positions. The spring
pipe shaft, etc. shall be supported on strong mild steel brackets.
a)
b)
Ideal Structures
Page 96 of 185
c)
Guide Channels shall be of mild steel deep channel section and of rolled, pressed or
built up (fabricated) construction. The thickness of the sheet used shall not be less than
3.l5mm. Minimum depths for guide channels shall be as follows:
Clear width of shutters
Depth of Guide Channel
Upto 3.5m
60mm
3.5mm and above
75mm
d)
The gap between two legs of the guide channel shall be sufficient to permit free
movement of curtain but close enough to prevent the rattling of the curtain due to wind.
Each guide channel shall be provided with a minimum of three fixing cleats or supports
for attachment to the walls or column by means of bolts or screws. The spacing of cleats
shall not exceed O.75m. Alternatively, the guide channels may also be provided with
suitable dowels, hooks or pins for embedding in the walls.
The guide channels shall be attached to the jambs, plumb and true, either in the
overlapping fashion, projecting fashion or embedded in grooves, depending on the
method affixing.
Top cover of shaft, spring etc. shall be of the same material as that of lath.
Fixing brackets shall be fixed on the lintel or under the lintel as specified with rawl plugs,
and screw bolts, etc. The shaft along with the spring shall then be fixed on the brackets.
The lath portion (shutter) shall be laid on ground and the side guide channels shall be
bound with it with ropes etc. The shutter shall then be placed in position and top fixed
with pipe shaft with bolts and nuts. The side guide channels and the cover frame shall
then be fixed to the walls through the plate welded to the guides. These plats and bracket
shall be fixed by means of steel screw bolts, and rawl plugs drilled in the wall. The plates
and screw bolts shall be concealed in plaster to make their location invisible. Fixing shall
be done accurately in a workman like manner that the operation of the shutter is easy
and smooth.
Measurements: Clear width and clear height of the opening for rolling shutter shall be
measured correct to a mm. The clear distance between the two jambs of the opening shall
be clear width and clear distance between the sill and the soffit (bottom of lintel) of the
opening shall be the clear height.
The areas shall be calculated in square metres correct to two places of deci!11al.
Rate: The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above il1cluding cost of top cover and spring except ball bearing and
mechanical device of chain and crank operation, which shall be paid for separately.
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
I)
4.8.5
a)
b)
Collapsible steel gates:
The components of collapsible steel shutters shall be of mild steel and as per details
given in the description of the item. Either steel pulleys or ball-bearings shall be
provided in double channels.
Wherever collapsible gate is not provided within the opening and is fixed along the outer
surface, T-iron at the top may be replaced by flat iron 40x 10 mm. Special fittings like
springs, catches and locks shall be provide where so specified in the description of the
item. The shutters shall be obtained from the approved manufacturer.
MS sliding shutters:
4.8.6
a)
These shutters shall be fabricated of mild steel components as given in the description of
the item. MS . sheet as specified shall be fixed to the frame with rivets or welds as
approved by the Engineer. The shutters shall be provided with top and bottom guide
Ideal Structures
Page 97 of 185
rails of angles or T -irons, as specified, and 25mm dia. Steel pulley or with 25mm dia. ball
bearings at the bottom and guide block with steel pulleys at the top. The frame shall be
riveted and / or welded and wherever riveting shall be done, 3.15mm gusset plates shall
be provided at the junctions.
4.8.7
Aluminium joinery:
4.8.7.1
Aluminium joinery comprises doors, windows, ventilators, partitions and the like
fabricated from aluminium extruded sections, wood / cement-based boards, glass, wire
meshes and the like, complete with all necessary accessories such as gaskets and fittings,
such as handles, etc.
4.8.7.2
Aluminium sections shall be approved make, anodised transparent or dyed as required.
4.8.7.3
The materials and method of fabrication shall be as per applicable BIS Standards and as
directed by the Engineer.
4.8.7.4
4.8.7.5
a)
b)
c)
The joinery shall be true to dimensions as shown in the drawings.
Measurement and rate:
Where indicated in the BOQ with area units, the breadth and the height of the finished
work shall be measured in metres and cm and the net quantity for payment shall be
calculated in sq.m. upto two places of decimal.
Where the BOQ indicates weight units for the aluminium work, the net weight of the
aluminium parts, excluding any wastages, is to be considered for measurement. The
measurement for panelling and glazing shall be on area basis, in sq.m. upto two places of
decimal, including the portions inserted into the aluminium sections.
The rate shall include the cost of all operations described above including the cost of
materials, labour, falfrication, erection, finishing and any scaffolding, but excluding the
cost of floor springs and door closers.
4.8.8
Aluminium curtain wall and structural glazing systems:
4.8.8.1
The Contractor shall design, test, fabricate, deliver, install and guarantee all construction
necessary to provide the complete aluminium curtain wall and structural glazing
systems as per specification and all relevant construction regulations including
providing any measures that may be required to that end, notwithstanding any
omissions or inadequacies of the drawings.
4.8.8.2
The curtain wall and structural glazing systems shall be executed through subcontractor!
specialist agency approved by the Engineer.
5.8.8.3
The aluminium curtain wall and structural glazing systems shall comprise the
following:
a)
b)
c)
Metal frames, glass glazing, spandrels, windows, ventilators, finish hardware, copings,
metal closures, windows, etc., complete with anchors, attachments, reinforcement and
steel reinforcing required for the system.
Thermal insulation associated with the system.
Fire protection associated with the system.
Ideal Structures
Page 98 of 185
d)
e)
f)
5.8.8.4
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
4.8.8.5
a)
Copings and closure and metal cladding and all sealing and flushing including sealing at
junctions with other trades to achieve complete water tightness.
Isolation of dissimilar metals and moving parts.
Polyester powder coating to aluminium sections and anticorrosive treatment on all metal
components.
The Contractor shall also carry out the following:
Engineering proposal, shop drawings, engineering data and structural calculations in
connection with the design of the systems.
Mock-ups, samples and test units and performance testing of the framing and glazing
assembly.
All final exterior and interior cleaning and finishing of the systems.
As-built drawings and photographs, guarantees and warranties.
All hoisting, scaffolding, staging and temporary services.
Conceptualising and design of a suitable maintenance system for the systems, inclusive
of all metal parts, glass and finish, etc.
Any additions and extra provisions that will have to be made as per theoretical
requirements or site conditions, during detailed design scrutiny and also during the
actual execution of the work, at the contractor's own cost, no extra payment admissible
under any circumstances.
Design requirements:
Curtain walls and structural glazing systems shall comply with all government codes
and regulations, building bye-laws, if any.
b)
All components of the systems, including individual aluminium and glass components
and all completed work shall be designed and erected to comply with the basic design
and architectural requirements, the parameters to include size of windows, net glass
area, ventilator, configuration of windows and spandrels to be retained.
c)
Alternatives, where found necessary, in the construction details of the building, provided
that all basic functional and architectural requirements are fulfilled.
d)
Tolerances in the curtain walls and structural glazing systems when completed:
Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle not to exceed 3 mm per 3.5 m
length of any member, or 6 mm ion any total run in any line.
Deviation from theoretical position on plan or elevation, including deviation from plumb,
level or dimensioned angle not to exceed 9 mm total at any location.
Change in deviation not to exceed 3 mm for any 3.5 m run in any direction.
e)
f)
Provision for expansion and contraction of components to avoid buckling, stress on
glass, failure of joint sealants, undue stress on structural elements or other detrimental
effects.
Accommodation of thermal and building movements.
g)
Water tightness and structural stability of the whole system. i
h)
Metal quality, finishes and thickness.
i)
ii)
iii)
Ideal Structures
Page 99 of 185
i)
Glass quality, coating and thickness and proposed manufacturer's brand names.
j)
Aluminium extruded sections including mullions and transoms together with structural
calculations and proposed manufacturers' brand name and also the name of agency
proposed for fabrication work.
k)
Arrangement and jointing of components.
l)
Field connections especially mullion to mullion and transoms to mullion.
m)
Fixing and anchorage system of typical wall unit together with structural calculations.
n)
Drainage system and provision in respect of water leakage in the curtain wall system.
o)
Provisions for thermal movements.
p)
Sealant and sealing methods.
q)
Glazing Method.
r)
Wind load and seismic load and any other specific load considered in the design.
s)
Design concept over lightning protection link-up system for connection and
incorporation into the lightning conductor system of the building of the Owner.
t)
The maximum permissible structural tolerances of the building that the systems have
been designed to accommodate in case these tolerances exceed those specified in the
specification.
4.8.8.6
Specification for materials:
a)
Framing system: Aluminium anodized extruded sections, including brackets, mullions,
transomes, etc., of approved make.
b)
Sealant: As specified in the item or silicon sealant.
c)
Insulation: Glass wool, 50mm thick and of minimum density 48 kg/cu.m. sandwiched
with black polythene sheet 100 micron on one side and aluminium foil of 100 micron on
the other side or as specified by manufacturer at spandrel area. The surface after fixing
insulation shall be plain without any distortion.
d)
Glazing: Sheet glass, frosted sheet glass, heat reflective toughened glass of any shade
approved by the client/Engineer-in-charge/ Architect.
e)
Aluminium anodized extruded glazing beads or snap beading to be used should also be
the product from the manufacturer of aluminium extruded sections used for fabricating
the doors windows, etc., No beading manufactured by local units shall be permitted to
be used.
f)
Adhesives for bonding shall conform to IS:848
Ideal Structures
Page 100 of 185
g)
4.8.8.7
a)
b)
c)
4.8.8.8
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Panelling, including aluminium alloy sheet panelling conforming to the requirements of
IS:737.
Samples:
The contractor shall submit samples of the various items that would be incorporated in
the works and proceed with procurement only based on Engineer's approval to the same.
Samples of aluminium extruded sections, mullion and transome sections shall be in
lengths of 300mm with the same finish and workmanship as are intended to be achieved.
Samples of glass shall be in 300mmx300mm size and shall include exposed screws and
other exposed securing devices, if any.
Fabrication and erection:
Frames shall be square and flat, both the fixed and openable frames being constructed of
sections which have been cut to length, mitred and mechanically jointed at the corners.
Sub-dividing bar of units shall be tenoned and riveted into frame.
All frames shall have comers welded to true right angles. For jointing hollow sections
flash butt welding, argon arc welding or mechanical jointing by inserts shall be used. Gas
welding or brazing shall not be done. Concealed screws shall be used for joining the subunits.
The grid for the systems shall be fabricated carefully with aluminium extruded sections
like mullions and transom in exactly the same pattern as per the final drawings with
amendments if any received from the laboratory after conducting the mock-up unit test.
The sizes of different members of the systems shall be exactly as adopted for the mockup unit tests and the grid shall be fixed to the building member as shown in the drawing,
received after conducting the mock-up unit test.
The required size of panels keeping sufficient margin to be inserted inside the section
shall be cut to correct size and fixed firmly in the frame with CP brass or aluminium
screws.
Any gap between the frame and support and the frame itself is sealed with silicon
sealant.
Finish grid frame shall be either anodized, organic coating, backed enamel finish or as
specified in the item of work, no visual variation in anodizing / colour being accepted.
The systems shall not get deformed or damaged during erection. They shall be protected
from direct contact with wet or intermittent wet cement concrete, mortar, etc.
4.8.8.9
Performance testing shall be carried out well ahead of the date for commencement of
actual work at site. Mock-up units shall be constructed by the contractor and tested to
determine the structural stability as well as air and water infiltration or leakage at
glazing beads and all other joints designed into the face of the building.
i)
After the approval of structural calculations and the drawing for construction of the
systems, one test unit for performance testing shall be constructed by the contractor at an
independent laboratory or at a laboratory approved by the Engineer.
ii)
Mock -up shall be installed under manufacturer's/ fabricator's direct supervision and
workmen deployed as they would be during the actual erection at the job site.
iii)
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer the test procedures to be adopted, test
Ideal Structures
Page 101 of 185
schedule and location for testing before the work of actual testing is taken up.
iv)
Prior to the fabrication of test units, the contractor shall submit shop drawings and
design calculations of the test unit for the approval of the Engineer.
v)
The contractor shall not start the work of erection of the systems on site till the approval
for the successful completion of the mock up test and clear instructions in writing to start
the work is received from the Engineer.
vi)
The decision of the Engineer in respect of the procedure to be adopted, in conducting the
mock-up test and the judgment over the net results, shall be final and binding on the
contractor.
b)
Test of wind pressure:
j)
The equivalent load of wind pressure or wind suction shall be given to the test unit by
increasing or decreasing the inside pressure in the "pressure chamber" at which the test
unit is fixed.
ii)
The static wind pressure shall be applied upto 1.5kpa at maximum wind pressure.
iii)
The variation of dynamic pressure shall be of any approximate sine curve line.
v)
Deflection on each observational points of the test unit shall be observed and recorded
under static pressure as described above.
v)
vi)
c)
Any damage and harmful permanent deformation on any parts except sealing materials
shall not be found at maximum wind pressure.
he deflection on the main structural parts in this condition shall not exceed 1/175 of the
span between supports or 20 mm, whichever is less for vertical elements and 1/250 of the
span between supports for horizontal elements. The extent of recovery of deformation, IS
minutes after the removal of the test load, is to be atleast 95%.
Test of lateral deflection per floor height:
i)
For static deflection test deflection of every ±2.5 mm shall be increased upto ±13 mm.
ii)
The dynamic deflection shall be applied upto ± 13 mm. The variation of dynamic
deflection shall be of an approximate sine curve line, one period of 3 seconds.
vi)
The dimensions of the deflection on each observational point of the test unit shall be
measured under the conditions as described above and the damage shall be observed.
vii)
Any damage and harmful permanent deformation shall not be found in any parts of the
system except the damage to sealant at maximum deflection.
d)
i)
Water-tightness test:
Water shall be sprinkled to the test unit under wind pressure. Pressure shall not be
applied to the test unit. The volume of the sprinkling water in one minute shall be 5 litres
Ideal Structures
Page 102 of 185
per sq.m. minimum.
ii)
All water leakage and drainage system at the joint and the openable sash of the curtain
wall system shall be observed from the outside of the chamber.
e)
Sequence of tests: The above tests shall be conducted two times, in the following
sequence:
i)
Install :the test unit.
ii)
Conduct first water-tightness test.
iii)
Conduct test of wind pressure as described above.
iv)
Conduct second water-tightness test.
v)
Conduct lateral deflection test.
f)
.
Water leakage shall not be observed inside at all parts of the test unit during first watertightness test.
g)
Test report: The contractor shall submit five copies of test report to the Engineer.
4.8.8.10 Cost of samples and performance tests:
4.8.8.11
All costs towards the samples, performance testing and fabrication, erection, corrections
to and demolition of the test units including any special provision required in the testing
laboratory are to be at the Contractor's own cost.
i)
The contractor shall allow for and carryout, at no extra cost, amendments and
adjustments to the mockup unit as instructed and required by the Engineer.
ii)
Where the mock-up test unit falls to pass the initial testing, the contractor shall make the
necessary corrections to the test unit and shall get the test unit retested by the testing
laboratory until it passes the test, all at his own cost.
4.8.8.12 Record of tests and drawings:
a)
The testing laboratory shall keep the approved copy of the shop drawing and
calculations of the test unit at testing laboratory during testing of test unit.
b)
The testing laboratory shall accurately and nearly record on the above mentioned shop
drawings all changes, revisions, modifications, made to test unit, which shall become the
record drawing.
c)
On completion of testing and after approval of the test reports the testing laboratory shall
submit the final record drawings to the clients/engineer-in-charge/architects.
4.8.8.13
a)
Measurement and rate:
The breadth and the height of the finished work including the openable windows shall
be measured in metres and cm and the net quantity for payment shall be calculated in
sq.m. upto two places of decimal.
Ideal Structures
Page 103 of 185
b)
The area to be considered for measurement shall be the net area of the exterior face of the
curtain wall as fixed including the openable windows if any as part of the curtain wall.
c)
The rate shall include the cost of all operations described above including the cost of
materials, labour, design shop drawings, erection and testing, mock-up test units,
fabrication, erection, finishing, scaffolding, undertaking performance guarantee. No
other claims of any kind pertaining to this work shall be entertained.
4.8,8.14
Coverage of rates:
4.8.5.14.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for steel and
aluminium works are deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages,
4.8.8.14.2 Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, finishing works, if any are specified, are
paid for, under separate Items.
Ideal Structures
Page 104 of 185
4.9 WATER – PROOFING & DAMP – PROOFING
4.9.1
Code and Standards:
IS:73
Paving bitumen.
IS:702
Industrial bitumen.
IS:3067
Code of practice for general design details and preparatorywork for damp
proofing, and water proofing of buildings
Bitumen primer for use in water-proofing and damp proofing.
IS:3384
4.9.2
a)
b)
c)
Materials:
Bitumen primer shall conform to requirements ofIS:3384. Binding material shall consist
of blown-type bitumen conforming to IS:702 or residual bitumen conforming to IS:73 or a
mixture thereof.
Cement shall conform to IS:269 or IS:455.
Aggregates shall conform to IS:383. Fine aggregates shall be approved river or pit sand.
Coarse aggregates shall be stone chips of size not exceeding 6mm.
Damp-proof course:
4.9.3
49.3.1
4.9.3.2
4.9.4.
4.9.4.1
The proportion of cement and aggregate and thickness of damp-proof course shall be as
shown on the drawings or as indicated in the BOQ.
The brick or stone masonry shall be levelled, flushed up and prepared as directed to
receive the damp proof course. Damp-proof course shall be provided at positions as
shown on the drawings. It shall be laid for the full width of the wall. The top surface shall
be kept rough or ribbed, for proper adhesion of masonry coming over it. All exposed
surface of the damp-proof course shall be finished fair and smooth. After the surface
partially sets, hot bitumen shall be applied at the rate of 1.7 kg/sq.m. and dry sand sprea1
over it.
Lime concrete terracing:
IS:712
Specification for building limes.
IS:1344
Specification for calcined clay pozzolana.
IS:1635
Code of practice for field slaking of building and preparation of putty.
IS:2250
Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars.
IS:2541
Code of practice for preparation and use of lime concrete.
IS:3036
Code of practice for laying lime concrete for a water proofed roof finish.
IS:3068
Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in lime
concrete.
4.9.4.2
a)
Material
Lime: As far as possible, class C lime (fat lime) conforming to IS:712 shall be used.
Ideal Structures
Page 105 of 185
b)
c)
4.9.4.3
Quicklime shall be slaked in accordance with IS:1635. Surkhi shall conform to the latest
IS:1344.
Aggregate shall be from well-burnt bricks and shall be graded having a maximum size of
25mm and shall generally conform to IS:3068.
Water used for making concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of
deleterious materials. Preferably, potable water shall be used.
Preparation of lime concrete:
a)
One part of. slaked lime and two parts of Surkhi by volume shall be mixed on a
watertight platform. This shall then be sprinkled with the required quantity of water and
shall be well ground in a mill or using mechanical grinders.
b)
The lime concrete shall be obtained by thoroughly mixing the aggregate and lime Surkhi
mortar in the proportions of 2.5: 1 parts by volume. Burnt-brick aggregate shall be
soaked thoroughly in water for a period not less than six hours before use in the concrete
mix, 12 kg bar soap and 4 kg alum dissolved in water shall be added to each cubic metre
of lime concrete. Detergent soap shall not be used.
The lime concrete shall be used in the work within 36 hours of the preparation of lime
surkhi mortar.
c)
4.9.4.4
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Laying:
The roof surface shall be wire brushed and cleaned of all dust and foreign matter.
Where indicated, a coat of hot bitumen 80 / 100 shall be evenly applied at the rate
mentioned in the BOQ mentioned.
The average thickness of lime concrete shall be 100mm. The slope required for drainage
shall be given in the lime concrete layer.
After the lime concrete is laid, it shall be initially rammed with a rammer weighing not
more than 2 kg and the finish brought to the required evenness and slope. During this
preliminary ramming, the surface shall be tested and kept perfectly true and even by
means of a trowel, straight edge and spirit level. The concrete shall then be further
consolidated by two rows of labourers sitting close and beating the concrete lightly and
in rhythm with wooden thappies across the entire width of the roof and thus slowly
traversing the length of the roof. The wooden thappies should weigh from 1 to 2 kg.
The beating shall be carried on for three to four days until the thappi makes no
impression on the surface and rebounds readily from it when struck.
If the surface during the process of compaction becomes so uneven that water lodges in
pools, the surface shall be pricked up and fresh lime concrete spread and consolidated
as is necessary so as to ensure that proper slopes and levels are being maintained.
Special care shall be taken to properly consolidate the concrete at its junction with the
parapet wall.
During compaction by hand beating, the surface shall be sprinkled liberally with lime
water and small portion of sugar / kadukkai solution.
The sugar solution shall be prepared by mixing around 3 kgjaggery and 1.5 kg bael
fruit to 100 litres of water. The kadukkai solution shall be prepared with 600 grams of
kadukkai (terminalia chebula), 200 grams of jaggery and 40 litres of water for each 10
sq.m. work. This solution shall be brewed for 12 to 24 hours. The resulting liquor shall
be decanted and used for the work.
As soon as the beating is completed, the mortar that has come on top shall be
Ideal Structures
Page 106 of 185
smoothened with a trowel or float, if necessary, with the addition of sugar solution.
All along the junction of the roof surface with the masonry of the parapet wall, a strip
of lime concrete shall be laid and finished smooth, to the required batter.
i)
4.9.4.5
Curing shall be for six days after compaction or until it hardens, by covering it with a
thin layer of grass or straw which shall be kept continuously wet.
4.9.4.6
The terracing shall afterwards be covered with pressed clay tiles of approved quality,
grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement, 3 fine sand) mixed with crude oil at 5% of
the weight of the cement, over a 12mm layer of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement, 3 fine
sand) and finished neat.
4.9.4.7
Coverage of rates:
4.9.4.7.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for
waterproofing and damp proofing works are deemed to include the cost of all
materials, consumables, wastages, curing, transportation, labour, supervision, tools,
tackles, plant, machinery and documentation, apart from preparing the surfaces and
4.9.4.7.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, priming works, if any are specified, are
4.10
FLOORING & FACING WORK
4.10.1
GENERAL
4.10.1.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of the surface to be paved or
faced to the satisfaction of the Engineer with particular reference to the levels in subfloor, etc. which are laid unevenly, plus or minus of the level given must be rectified by
him in order that paving above may be laid to the requisite thickness.
a)
Proper floor drainage slopes, dishing of floors particularly in bath rooms, WC, etc.,
cornering at internal angles and also nosing at plinth, steps. or window sills, cutting to
line and fair finish to top edge of skirtings and dados shall be achieved as directed by
the Engineer, no extras being paid for the same.
b)
The surface to be covered shall be picked and hatched, brushed, thoroughly cleaned of
dust and other foreign matters and well watered before the paving is laid.
4.10.1.2
The thickness mentioned shall be finished and minimum thickness only.
4.10.2
IS:1237 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles.
IS:1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles.
IS:2114 Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish.
IS:2571 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring.
IS:4457 Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid-resisting tiles.
IS:4832 (All the parts) Specification for chemical resistant mortars.
Ideal Structures
Page 107 of 185
IS:54!: Code of practice for laying in-situ granolithic concrete flooring topping.
IS:9197 Specification for epoxy resin hardners and epoxy resin compositions for floor
topping.
IS:13630 (All the parts) Methods of test for ceramic tiles.
IS:13711 Sampling and basis of acceptance for ceramic tiles.
IS: 13753/4 (All the parts) Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles.
Cement concrete flooring:
4.10.3
4.10.3.1 Preparation of sub-base:
a) The ground or earth filling shall be thoroughly compacted so that there are no loose
pockets left anywhere in the whole area.
b)
This shall then be covered with clean sand well consolidated to a thickness indicated in the
drawing.
c)
Great care is necessary in the preparation of the sub-base, as a settlement in the sub-base
may cause the failure of the whole floor.
4.10.3.2 Laying the base concrete:
a)
The base concrete may be deposited in the whole area at a stretch. Before placing the
concrete, the sub-base shall be properly wetted and rammed.
b)
The concrete shall then be deposited between the forms, where necessary, thoroughly
tamped and the surface finished level with the top edges of the forms.
c)
The surface of base concrete shall be left rough to provide adequate bond for the topping.
Two or three hours after the concrete has been laid in position, the surface shall be brushed
with a hard brush to remove any scum or laitance and swept clean so that the coarse
aggregate is exposed.
d)
When the topping is to be laid separately but directly over the structural slab without any
cushioning layer, the structural concrete, three to four hours after its laying in the forms,
shall be thoroughly brushed with a coir or steel wire brush to remove any scum or laitance
and swept clean to expose the coarse aggregate and leave the surface rough.
e)
Before the operation of laying the topping is started, the surface of structural slab shall be
thoroughly cleaned of the dirt, loose particles, cake mortar droppings and laitance, if any,
by scrubbing with coir and steel wire brush. Where the concrete has hardened so much that
roughening of surface by wire is not possible, the entire surface shall be roughened by
chipping / hacking.
4.10.3.3 Laying the topping:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Before the operation for laying the topping is started, the surface of base concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles, caked mortar droppings and laitance, if any,
by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush.
Where the concrete has hardened so much that roughening of surface by wire brush is not
possible, the entire surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking.
Before laying the topping, the surface shall be soaked with water, atleast for twelve hours
and surplus water shall be removed by mopping immediately before the topping is laid in
position.
Floor finish shall be divided into panels of size not exceeding 4 sq.m., by fixing the screed
Ideal Structures
Page 108 of 185
e)
f)
g)
strips over the base concrete. The screed strips shall be so arranged that the joints, if any, in
the base concrete shall coincide with the joints in the topping. Before placing the concrete
mix for topping, neat cement slurry shall be thoroughly brushed into the prepared surface
of the base concrete just ahead the finish. The topping shall then be laid very thoroughly
tamped, struck off level and the surface floated with a wooden float. The surface shall be
tested with the straight-edge and mason's spirit-level to detect any inequalities in the
surface which, if any, shall be made good immediately.
The topping shall be laid in alternate panels, the intermediate panels. The screed strips
should be removed the next day after the concrete has been deposited in the panels. The
edges of panels shall be examined for any honeycombing or undulation which, if found,
shall be repaired straight and smooth by cement mortar / slurry.
When the concrete is being compacted in new panels, care shall be taken to avoid damage
to the panels already laid.
If glass or aluminium strips are provided for effective separation of panels, the topping
may be laid in all the panels simultaneously.
4.10.3.4 Finishing the surface:
a)
b)
c)
d)
After the concrete has been fully compacted, it shall be finished by trowelling or floating.
Finishing operations shall start shortly after the compaction of the concrete and shall be
spread over the period of one to six hours depending upon the temperature and
atmospheric conditions. The surface shall be left for some time till moisture disappears
from it.
Use of dry cement or cement and sand mixtures sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the
concrete or absorb excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
Fresh quantity of cement, at 2.2 kg per sq.m. of flooring, shall be mixed with water to form
a thick slurry and spread over the surface while the concrete is still green. The cement
slurry shall then be properly pressed twice by means of iron floats, once, when the slurry is
applied and the second time when cement starts setting, and finished floated smooth. Floor
finish over ramps, stairs and other similar locations shall be finished in chequered pattern
to make them non-slip.
4.10.3.5 Curing:
a)
Immediately, after the flooring surface is finished, it shall be protected from rapid drying
by erecting barriers against wind or drought and strong sunlight. As soon as the surface
has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to it, it shall be kept continuously moist for
atleast fifteen days by means of wet gunny bags, 50mm thick layers of damp sand spread
over the surface or pooling water on the surface. During this period, the flooring shall not
be exposed to any traffic. Regular traffic on the floor should be allowed only after 28 days.
4.10.4
Terrazzo flooring and facing:
4.10.4.1 The terrazzo work shall be done by an approved firn of specialists. Marble chips used for
facing coat of terrazzo work shall be best quality and of uniform tint and colour and shall
be approved by the Engineer before using in the work. All terrazzo work shall be machinepolished on completion followed by a final wax polish of approved quality.
4.10.4.2 Terrazzo work shall be done either cast-in-situ or with pre-cast tiles to a thickness as
specified in the BOQ.
Ideal Structures
Page 109 of 185
4.10.4.3 The rate for terrazzo work shall include any coving of internal angles, nosing at plinth,
steps and sills, set backs, mitres, flashing as per direction of the Engineer.
4.10.5 Cast-in-situ flooring:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
The base shall be 1 :2:4 cement concrete (1cement, 2 coarse sand, 4 stone chips 12.5mm and
below, graded) and shall be laid in the same manner as that for cement concrete flooring.
Unless otherwise specified, the thickness of base shall be 34mm for 40mm terrazzo flooring
and 19mm for 25mm terrazzo flooring, laid with proper slopes. The surface shall be
levelled with straight edge and steel trowel, but shall be left rough to receive the topping
with sufficient grip.
The topping shall be 6mm finished thickness in all cases and shall be laid over the base
when the latter is still green. While laying topping, adequate allowance shall be given over
the finished thickness stated above for cutting down for polishing. The topping shall be
with mixed marble chips, the colour and the proportion of which shall be approved by the
Engineer and mixed with either grey, white or any coloured cement, also to be approved by
the Engineer. When coloured cement is not available, the pigment, the shade, proportion,
etc., shall also be got approved by the Engineer before use. Experimental blocks shall be
provided by the Contractor at his own cost to arrive at the right proportion for the right
shade and texture desired.
The proportion of cement and marble powder shall be 3 parts of cement and 1 part of
marble powder by weight. 4 parts of cement marble powder mix shall be mixed with 7
parts of marble chips by volume.
Cast-in-situ terrazzo work shall be carried out in sections not exceeding around 2 sq.m. in
the case of floors. The sections shall be separated by means of glass strips 3mm thick which
shall penetrate through the full thickness of the surfacing including the base. Curing shall
be done atleast 14 days by keeping the floor marble under water. After proper hardening,
the top surface shall be polished evenly and smoothly by means of machine-polisher so as
to ensure the even exposure of all marble chips. The polishing shall be of high standard and
to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Carborandum stones of coarse, medium and fine
grades and pumice stone shall be used for polishing. For surfaces where machine-polishing
is not possible, the polishing shall be done by skilled hands.
The surface shall be finally wax-polished with floor polish such as 'Mansions' or similar
approved
polish.
Terrazzo cast-in-situ facing, skirting and dado:
The work shall be carried out in the same manner as that for terrazzo cast-in-situ floors
except that the base shall consist of 1:3 cement mortar (1 cement, 3 medium sand) of 12mm
thickness and as specified. The topping shall be 6mm thick finished and shall be laid when
the backing plaster is still green. Special care shall be taken to see that the .surfaces are
properly cured.
10.4.5 Pre-cast terrazzo work:
4.10.6 Precast terrazzo work:
a)
b)
Unless otherwise mentioned pre-cast terrazzo tiles shall be 20mm thick and of standard
sizes as decided by the Engineer. The underside of the tiles shall be kept round for bond
with underbed and shall have suitable frogs.
Pre-cast terrazzo tiles shall invariably be machine-made and machine-polished and shall be
manufactured under a hydraulic test pressure of 140 kg/sq.m. as per IS:1237 in an
approved workshop fitted with necessary hydraulic upto date plants and equipments. The
edges of the tiles shall be m perfect line and square.
Ideal Structures
Page 110 of 185
c)
The tiles shall be laid on 20mm mortar bed in cement mortar 1:3 (l cement, 3 coarse sand) or
lime mortar 1: 1:2 (1 lime putty, 1 surkhi, 2 coarse sand) as specified in the BOQ and finally
laid with sprinkling of cement (half a bag to every 10 sq.m.). After laying, the joints shall be
well filled in with cement mixed with pigment to match the tiles. The Joints shall not be
more than 1.5mm thick m any case. After the tiles have properly set, the surface shall be
machine-polished to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
The surface shall be finally wax-polished with 'Mansion' or similar approved floor polish.
The ingredients with proportion for the pre-cast terrazzo tiles shall be same as that for castin-situ terrazzo tiles. The topping of terrazzo tiles shall be 6mm (finished thickness) thick in
all cases.
Tiles for facing, dado and skirtin'g work in-situ be laid on 1:3 cement mortar (1 cement, 3
coarse sand) backing.
The rates quoted for all terrazzo work in-situ or with tiles to include the cost of base
concrete, mortar bed or backing plaster as mentioned above and are for the complete work.
d)
e)
f)
g)
4.10.7
Natural stone flooring:
4.10.7.1
Unless otherwise mentioned, Cuddappah / Kota / Shahabad / marble / granite stones
shall be 20 to 25mm thick and of standard sizes or sizes indicated in the drawings / BOQ
and as decided by the Engineer.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
The stone slabs shall be machine-cut and machine-polished to size, except in the case of
certain Cuddappah where chisel-cutting is permitted.
The slabs shall be of approved quality and of specified thickness and sizes, with
straight edges and even surface, free from cracks and flakes and of uniform colour.
Slabs meant for each individual area shall be perfectly uniform in shade and pattern.
The base concrete or RCC slab on which the flooring is to be laid shall be cleaned,
wetted and mopped.
The bed for the flooring shall be cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement, 4 coarse sand) or lime
mortar 1: 1: 1 (I lime putty: 1surkhi: 1 coarse sand) as specified in the BOQ. In case of
certain marbles, only white cement shall be used for the bed mortar.
The bed thickness shall be 20mm, or as specified in the BOQ. Required slopes in the
flooring are to be achieved considering this as the average thickness. Thickness of the
mortar at any point shall however be not be less than 12mm.
The bed shall be laid as above, spreading it carefully, avoiding voids. The required
fluidity in the mortar shall be achieved by adjusting the water content of the mortar
while mixing only, and not by adding water while laying it.
The stone slab shall be placed in position and tapped with wooden mallet and brought
to required level and slope, considering the already laid adjoining slabs. It shall then be
lifted and laid aside. The top surface of the mortar bed shall then be corrected by
adding fresh mortar at hollows, and allowed to harden a bit. Cement slurry of honeylike consistency shall then be spread over the bed, using 4.4 kg cement per sq.m. The
edges of the adjoining slabs already laid shall be buttered with grey / white cement, as
required, with or without an admixture of pigment to match with the shade of the
stone.
The previously set aside slab shall then be gently lowered and placed in position with
as fine a joint as possible and tapped home to the correct level and slope with wooden
mallet. Any surplus cement or mortar on the face of the slab shall be cleaned off.
The flooring shall be cured for a minimum period of seven days.
The polishing shall be done in steps, varying the coarseness of the grinding stones and
Ideal Structures
Page 111 of 185
ensuring atleast 1 to 2mm water layer. Granites and certain Cuddappahs shall not be
subjected to grinding, in which case finishing shall be as directed by the Engineer.
k)
l)
m)
Where specified, the polished floor shall be subjected to further finishing using wax /
tin-oxide.
Slabs that are laid in the floor shall enter atleast 12mm under the skirting / dado.
The placement of slabs shall be done carefully, matching the grain / veins / streaks
and alignment of joints to the required patterns.
4.10.7.2 Natural stone skirting / dado:
a)
The general procedures for laying and finishing skirtings and dadoes shall be as in the
case of flooring, except that the thickness of the slabs and thickness and mix of mortar
backing shall be as per drawings and BOQ.
b)
Where specified, speciality adhesives shall be used, in lieu of mortar backing.
c)
Coving of internal angles, nosing at plinth, steps and sills, setbacks, mitres, flashing
shall be as per directions of the Engineer, these being covered in the rate.
4.10.8
a)
4.10.9
Glazed tiles work:
The tiles shall be of approved make and 5mm minimum thickness with straight edges,
true and even and of approved colour and the surface free from warping. These shall
be laid truly vertical for walls or to slope on floors as directed. In the case 'of flooring,
the tiles shall be laid on a bedding of 20mm thick lime mortar (1 lime, 3 surkhi) with
sprinkling of cement (half a bag per 10 sq.m.) and in the case of skirting risers of steps
or dado, these shall be laid on 12mm thick cement mortar (1 cement and 3 coarse sand).
The joints shall be invisible and filled in with non-staining white cement.
Manufactured tile flooring / skirting / dado:
a)
Manufactured tiles shall of approved brand and make, conforming to the relevant BIS
code. The types include ceramic glazed / unglazed / vitreous / porcelain, white or of
required shade, with / without designed veins / streaks.
b)
The pattern of laying and the sizes of tiles shall be as per drawings and as directed by
the Engineer. Thickness of tiles shall be as specified in the BOQ.
c)
Laying shall in general be as per manufacturer's guidelines, using cement mortar or
speciality adhesives.
d)
All junctions shall be provided with angles wherever required, the cost thereof deemed
covered under the rates for flooring / skirting / dado.
4.10.10
Coverage of rates:
4.10.10.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for flooring and
facing works are deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages,
Ideal Structures
Page 112 of 185
curing, transportation, labour, supervision tools, tackles, plant, machinery and
documentation, apart from clearing waste and debris out of the kite.
4.10.10.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, waterproofing compounds, if any are
specified, are paid for, under separate Items.
Ideal Structures
Page 113 of 185
4.11 PLASTERING, POINTING & SURFACE TREATMENTS
4.11.1
Codes and Standards:
1S:712
Specification for building limes.
1S:1542 Sand for plaster.
1S:1661 Code of practice for application of cement and cement-lime plaster finishes.
1S:2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortar in buildings.
Mortar proportion:
4.11.2
a)
Unless otherwise specified, cement plaster shall be composed of I part of cement and 6
parts of sand. The composition for ceiling plaster shall be of 1 part of cement and 3
parts of sand.
The proportion of cement mortar for pointing shall be one part of cement and four
parts of sand (I :4) or as shown in the drawings in volumetric measure.
b)
Thickness of plaster:
4.11.3
a)
The thickness of plaster shall be as shown in drawings, specified in the BOQ and as
directed by the Engineer.
Cleaning of joints:
4.11.4
a)
All the joints must be raked, cleaned and well wetted as directed by the Engineer
before pointing / plastering, at the Contractor's own cost.
4.11.5
Type of pointing:
a)
The pointing shall be sunk pointing or flush pointing as indicated in the drawings / BOQ
and as directed by the Engineer.
4.11.6
Workmanship:
4.11.7
Pointing:
4.11.7.1
For sunk pointing, the mortar shall be applied firmly to raked out and well-wetted joints
with a trowel and pressed well home. It shall not spread on the face of rubble / brickwork
but shall be strictly restricted to the width of the joint. All superfluous mortar shall be
properly removed with a trowel. When pointing is air dry, it shall be rubbed smooth with
the trowel and pointing tool. The pointing line shall be regular and uniform in breadth and
depth. No false joints shall be made. The size of the finished sunk pointing shall be
indicated in the drawing and / or the BOQ and the edges of all face stone / bricks shall be
clearly exposed.
4.11.7.2
For flush pointing, the mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished flush
and levelled. The edges shall be neatly trimmed and made straight.
4.11.7.3
All surplus mortar shall be properly removed.
Ideal Structures
Page 114 of 185
4.11.8
Plastering:
4.11.8.1
Proportion:
a)
Unless otherwise specified, all plaster work shall be carried out according to IS: 1661.
The thickness and proportion of cement plaster shall be as shown in the drawing and
indicated in the BOQ.
4.11.8.2
Workmanship:
4.11.8.3
The surface to be plastered shall be cleaned of all extraneous matter and rubbish. In
brickwork the joints shall be raked and in case of concrete the surface roughened by
chipping or hacking. Any shuttering material adhering to the concrete shall be
removed. The surface shall be thoroughly watered and soaked, aerated and all putlog
holes shall be closed before starting plastering operation. Plaster pads of required
thickness of plaster for correctness of plumb, line and level shall be established before
starting plaster work. For single coat plaster work, the plaster shall be laid slightly
thicker than the specified thickness and the surface then levelled with a wooden rule to
the required thickness. The plaster shall be well pressed into the joints and the surface
finished as specified. Single coat plaster shall be followed to a maximum thickness upto
15mm.
4.11.8.4
Where two coat plaster work is specified, the backing coat shall be applied as described
above except that the surface shall be left rough and keys formed for the application of
second coat. The finishing coat shall be applied a day or two after the backing coat has
set, but the backing coat shall not be allowed to dry. The second coat shall be laid on
with a wooden rule to a specified thickness, rubbed smooth and levelled and the
surface plastered completely on the same day. The levelling shall be continued fill the
plaster cannot be wiped off with fine cloth. The surface shall be kept dry until
exudation of moisture ceases, during the process of rubbing. In case of 20mm thick
plaster, backing coat and finishing coat shall be of 12mm and 8mm thickness
respectively.
4.11.8.5
Rough cast plastering:
The surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt and the brickwork / stone masonry
thoroughly watered. The backing coat shall be 12mm thick of cement plaster 1:4 (1
cement, 4 coarse sand) and keys shall be formed on the surface. After curing this coat
sufficiently, the finishing coat 10mm thick consisting of either grey or white cement of
cement mixed with pigments for required colour and fine sand to required gradation (1
:3) mixed with 10% finely ground hydrated lime by volume of cement shall be applied
and then while green, dashed with a mixture of sand and crushed stone of 2.36mm to
12.5mm size.
4,11.9
Coverage of rates:
4,11.9.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for plastering,
pointing and surface treatment works are deemed to include the cost of all materials,
consumables, wastages, curing, transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles,
Ideal Structures
Page 115 of 185
plant, machinery and documentation, apart from forming bands and grooves and
4,11.9.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, waterproofing compounds, bands and
grooves, if any are specified, are paid for, under separate Items.
Ideal Structures
Page 116 of 185
4.12 FINISHING WORKS
4.12.1
Codes and Standards:
IS:102
Ready mixed paint, brushing, red lead, non setting priming.
IS:106
Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming for enamels for use on wood.
IS:123
Ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing semigloss, for general purposes.
IS:337
Varnish, finishing, interior.
IS:347
Varnish, Shellac for general purposes.
IS:348
French polish.
IS:349
Lacquer, cellulose nitrate, clear, finishing, glossy for metal.
IS:427
Distemper, dry, colour as required.
IS:428
Oil bound washable distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required.
IS:524
Varnish, finishing, exterior synthetic air drying natural resin.
IS:525
Varnish, finishing, exterior and general purposes.
IS:1477 Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings.
IS:2074 Ready mixed paint, air drying red oxide zinc chromate priming.
IS:2339 Aluminium paint for general purposes in dual container.
IS:2932 Specification for synthetic enamel, exterior, (a) Undercoating (b) Finishing.
IS:5410 Cement paints, colour as required.
IS:6278 Code of practice for whitewashing and colour washing.
4.12.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Materials:
Paints and finishing materials shall be of approved make only and shall conform to
relevant Indian Standards. Application shall also be as per relevant Indian Standards
and as per the paint / material manufacturer's guidelines.
The materials for succeeding' coats on anyone surface shall be products of the same
manufacturer supplying the first coat for that particular surface.
Ready mixed paints shall be used for the work unless otherwise specified, or where the
Engineer is satisfied that they are not available they may be prepared at site. If paints
mixed at site are to be used, they shall be prepared by mixing appropriate ingredients
in approved proportions. The Contractor shall submit samples of each material for
approval of the Engineer.
Cement shall conform to 18:269 and 18:455.
Water shall be clean and reasonably free from deleterious materials such as oils,
Lime used shall conform to 18:712
Colour used for colour wash shall be of approved colour as specified and as indicated
in the drawings.
Distemper shall be of approved quality and shall conform to 18:427 and 18:428.
Gum and blue pigment for whitewash shall be of best quality.
Pigments for all colours shall be non-fading.
Ideal Structures
Page 117 of 185
k)
I)
Varnish shall conform to 18:347.
French polish shall be ready-prepared conforming to IS: 348.
m)
Primer for woodwork, steel and iron work shall be as indicated in the BOQ.
n)
Brushes for painting shall be of type and size suitable for the work, conforming to
relevant Indian Standards. Rags, inferior quality brushes or the like shall not be used
on the work.
4.12.3
a)
b)
c)
Storage of paint and materials:
Manufactured paints and other materials shall be stored strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. The storage area shall be well ventilated and protected
from spalls, flames, direct exposure to sun or excessive heat.
Proper care shall be taken not to damage the label identifying the paint, date of
manufacture, batch number and special instructions. The container shall be opened
only at the time of use.
Paint which was livered, grilled or otherwise deteriorated during storage or otherwise
shall not be used. Paints for which shelf life specified by the manufacturer has expired
shall not be used without prior inspection and approval by the Engineer.
Varnishing:
4.12.4
4.12.4.1 Preparation of surface:
a)
b)
Surfaces to be varnished shall be prepared to produce a smooth, dry, matt surface. The
operation of varnishing calls for careful attention to cleanliness. All dust and dirt shall
be removed from the surface to be varnished and also from the neighbourhood. If the
surfaces are dampened to avoid rising of the dust, they shall be allowed to dry
thoroughly before varnishing is commenced. Damp atmosphere shall be avoided. For
exterior work, a normal dry day should be chosen. Exposure to extremes of heat or cold
or to a damp atmosphere will spoil the work.
In handling and applying varnish, care should be taken to avoid forming froth of air
bubbles. Brushes and containers shall be kept scrupulously clean.
4.12.4.2 Application:
a)
b)
c)
The varnish shall be applied liberally with a brush and spread evenly over a portion of
the surface with short light strokes to avoid frothing. It shall be allowed to flow out
while the next section is being laid-in. Excess varnish shall then be scrapped out of the
brush and the first section be crossed, re-crossed and then laid off lightly. Too much or
too little varnish left on the surface would mark the appearance of the finish. The
varnish, once it has begun to set, shall not be retouched. If a mistake is made, the
varnish shall be removed and the work started afresh.
In case of two coats of varnish work, the first shall be a hard-drying undercoating or
fatting varnish. This shall' be allowed to dry hard and then be flatted down before
applying the finishing coat. If two coats are applied, sufficient time shall be allowed
between the two coats.
When flat varnish is used for finishing, a preparatory coat of hard drying undercoating of flatting varnish shall be first be applied and shall be allowed to harden
thoroughly. It shall then be lightly rubbed down before the flat varnish is applied.
Sections of the work, such as panels, shall be cut-in clearly, so as to avoid any
overlapping during application, as this is likely to impart same measure of gloss to
Ideal Structures
Page 118 of 185
partially dried areas, worked up in lapping. On larger areas, the flat varnish shall be
applied rapidly, and the edges of each patch applied shall not be allowed to set but
shall be followed up whilst in free working condition.
5.12.4
4.12.5.1
a)
French polishing:
Preparation of surface:
All unevenness shall be rubbed down to smoothness with sand paper and the surface
shall be well dusted. The pores in the wood shall be filled up with filler made of a paste
of whiting in water or methylated spirit (with a suitable pigment like burnt sienna or
umber, if required), to achieve a good gloss and to prevent the french polish getting
absorbed.
4.12.5.2 Application of polish:
a)
b)
A pad of woolen cloth covered by a fine cloth shall be used to apply the polish. The
pad shall be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface in a series of
overlapping circles applying the polish sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to
give an even surface.
A trace of linseed oil on the face of the pad may be added which shall facilitate this
operation. The surface shall be allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the
same way. To finish off, the pad shall be covered with a fresh piece of clean fine both,
slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with circular
motions. The finished surface shall present a uniform texture and high gloss.
4.12.5.3 Where the Engineer is satisfied that the required ready prepared varnishes or polish are
not available, he may approve site-preparation. In such cases, only approved ingredients
shall be used for its preparation, ingredients for resin varnish being Resin: Linseed oil:
Spirit of turpentine 2:2: 1 and for copal varnish being Copal: Linseed oil: Oil of turpentine
3:2:5.
4.12.6Bees waxing:
4.12.6.1 Preparation of bees wax:
a)
In case of bees wax, it shall be prepared locally with the following specifications: Pure
bees wax free from paraffin or stearine adulterants shall be used. Its specific gravity
shall be 0.965 to 0.969 and melting point 63°C. The polish shall be prepared from
mixture of bees wax, linseed oil, turpentine and r varnish in the ratio 2:1.5:1:0.5 by
weight. The bees wax and boiled linseed oil shall be heated over a .slow fire. When the
wax is completely dissolved, the mixture shall be cooled till it is just warm and
turpentine and varnish added to it in the required proportions and entire mixture shall
be well stirred.
a)
This shall be as for varnishing.
4.12.6.3
a)
Application of bees wax or wax polish:
The polish shall be applied evenly with a clean soft pad of cotton cloth in such a way
that the surface is completely and fully covered. The surface is then rubbed
continuously for half an hour. After rubbing well, the work shall be covered with dust
proof sheet (cloth for preventing dust falling on the work). Subsequent coat shall be
Ideal Structures
Page 119 of 185
b)
applied after the surface is quite dry and shall be rubbed off with soft flannel until the
surface has assumed an uniform gloss and in dry, showing no sign of stickiness.
The final polish depends largely on the amount of rubbing which shall be continuous
and with uniform pressure, with frequent changes in the direction.
4.12.7 Whitewashing and colour washing:
4.12.7.1
a)
b)
4.12.7.2
a)
4.12.7.3
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Mixing:
The slaked lime shall be dissolved in a tub with sufficient quantity of water and shall
be well mixed to give a thin creamy consistency. It shall then be strained through a
clean coarse cloth and gum dissolved in hot water added to it at the rate of 2 kg for
each Cu.m. of lime and ultramarine blue added to the mixture in small proportion just
sufficient to give a very light bluish tint.
Colour wash shall be prepared in the same way as for the whitewashing except that
necessary amount of colouring matter shall be added to lime wash in this case. The
entire quantity shall be mixed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions unless these are varied by the Engineer.
Before the prescribed finish is laid on new surface, it shall be well cleaned and brushed
and all patchings must be scrapped properly. After cleaning the surfaces, all holes,
cracks and patches shall be made good with approved materials.
Application:
Whitewashes and colour washes shall be applied with brush, each coat consisting of
vertical stroke from top downwards followed by opposite stroke upwards over the first
stroke and horizontal stroke from left to right followed by stroke right to left.
Each coat must be allowed to dry, before the next coat is applied. On completion, the
surface when it becomes dry, shall present a uniform appearance. When dry, no coat
shall show any patches, hair cracks or strokes nor shall it come off when rubbed with
hands.
During application, the solution shall be stirred continuously and wash' shall be
applied with care to avoid any cut shade or brush marks on the walls when the work is
completed.
Whitewash shall be done in three coats unless otherwise specified.
Unless otherwise specified, two coats of white wash shall be applied before colour
wash is applied. Number of coats of colour wash shall be specified in the drawings and
/ or in the BOQ. The colourwash, whether applied inside or outside of a building shall
be of uniform tint and shade.
Doors and windows, floors etc., must be protected from splashes. Any splashes and
dropping shall be removed and cleaned.
4.12.8
Distempering:
4.12.8.1
a)
Mixing:
Distemper shall not be mixed in larger quantity than actually required for a day's work.
Hot water shall be used in preparing the mixture.
Ideal Structures
Page 120 of 185
4.12.8.2
a)
4.12.8.3
a)
Before distemper is applied the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, dirt grease,
oil marks, cement marks, loose scale etc. After cleaning the surface all holes, cracks,
patches, etc., shall be made good with approved material and finally rubbed with a
sand paper to give a uniform surface. The distemper shall not be applied on damp
walls and shall be applied in dry weather.
Workmanship: .
The workn1anship for distempering shall conform to IS:427 and IS:428. Distempering
shall be done with proper distemper brushes of approved quality. The finished surface
shall be of absolutely uniform shade throughout and free from brush marks. On drying
the distemper shall not come off when rubbed with hands or shall not crack. The
priming shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
Succeeding coats shall not be applied until the previous coat has been approved. The
first coat shall always be of a lighter tint and shall be applied with care. In case the
finish be not up to satisfaction, the entire surface shall be sandpapered to remove the
work and fresh coats of distemper shall be applied by the Contractor without any extra
cost, to produce the desired result. All splashes of distemper shall be removed by the
Contractor at his own cost.
Cement paint:
4.12.9
4.12.9.1
a)
b)
Mixing:
Cement paint shall be of approved manufacture and quality. It should be mixed and
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions / directions.
To start mixing, only half the required amount of water shall be added to the powder
and thoroughly mixed to a stiff paste. Water shall then be gradually added till desired
consistency is obtained. The paint shall be kept stirred during use and no paint which
has been mixed for a period longer than one hour shall be used.
a)
Before painting is commenced on a surface, all dirt, oil, grease, efflorescence and paints
of organic type shall be completely removed. Traces of formwork oils remaining on the
concrete shall be carefully removed by steel brushes or abrasive stone. If there is a
general coating of oil on the surface, the entire area to be painted shall be lightly sand
blasted. Efflorescence on concrete surface shall be removed by wetting the surface and
then scrubbing with 20% solution of muric acid.
b)
When the surface to be painted is very smooth it shall be acid washed or rubbed with
abrasive stone to obtain a slightly Toughened surface.
Before the paint is applied, the surface to be painted shall be damped uniformly. The
surface shall be sprayed several times with a few minutes interval between each
praying to allow the moisture to soak in the surface.
c)
a)
The cement paint shall be applied only in specified number of coats. After the first coat
of paint has hardened sufficiently, it shall be cured by keeping the surface damp for
Ideal Structures
Page 121 of 185
b)
c)
atleast 24 hours.
The surface shall be wetted again just before applying the second coat. Atleast 24 hours
should elapse between application of two coats. The second coat shall be moistened
with a fine spray' as soon as the paint has hardened sufficiently to prevent marring the
surface. It shall be kept wet for atleast two days.
I In so far as practicable, cement paint shall be applied in the shade. Open sunshine
shall be avoided especially during warm, windy weather.
4.12.10
Enamel painting:
4.12.10.1
a)
Mixing and thinning:
All ingredients in a paint container shall be thoroughly mixed to break-up lumps and
disperse pigments before use and during application to maintain homogeneity. All
pigmented paints shall be strained after mixing process and the type and quality of the
thinner shall be in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer.
4.12.10.2
a)
Preparation of paint:
Normally, only ready mixed paints shall be used. Where ready mixed paints are not
available and if oil base paints are prepared at site, the ingredients shall be thoroughly
ground and thinned with double boiled linseed oil in specified proportion to the
required consistency and added to the prepared base. The mixture shall be well stirred
and strained through a piece of cloth. The painting materials, when applied, shall
spread evenly in a thin coat and flow on smoothly without showing any brush marks
or cracks.
a) The surface of iron and steel work to be painted shall be cleaned free of dirt, oil, rust, mill
scale and be r thoroughly dry before painting. Cleaning, degreasing, derusting and
descaling wherever necessary shall I be carried out as specified in IS: 1477 (Part-I).
b)
The surfaces of woodwork to be painted shall be cleaned and rendered dry, free of dirt,
grit and grease and shall be rubbed with the appropriate quality of sand paper. All
knots, pitch streaks and sappy spots shall be touched up with shellac varnish.
4.12.10.4 Painting iron and steel work:.
a)
Painting of iron and steel work shall generally be carried out as per IS: 1477. The
number of coats including the primer coat shall be applied as specified in the BOQ.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry sufficiently before the succeeding coat is applied.
b)
The type of intermediate and finish coat and the number of coats to be applied shall be
as specified in the BOQ. Intermediate and finish coats may be oil bound, bituminous,
aluminium or other type of paints. Aluminium paint shall conform to IS:2339. The
intermediate and finish coats for structural steelwork, sheet metal work and cast iron
work shall be applied as specified in IS: 1477 (Part-II).
4.12.10.5
a)
Painting woodwork:
After the primer coat has dried, nail holes, cracks and the like shall be filled up with
approved wood putty and the surface finished smooth. The type of intermediate and
finish coats and the number of coats shall be as specified in the BOQ. The surface shall
be rubbed smooth before application of each coat.
Ideal Structures
Page 122 of 185
4.12.10.5 Iron work under water:
a)
Approved anti-corrosive black enamel paint shall be used for iron works in water such
as cast iron pipes, etc. Coal tar paint may also be used with the approval of the
Engineer.
4.12.11
Plastic emulsion paint:
4.12.11.1
Plastic emulsion paint shall be of approved manufacture and quality. It should be well
mixed 'and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
4.12.11.2
Preparation of Surface:
a)
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust, dirt, scale, smokes and
grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface
shall have received the approval of the Engineer after inspection, before painting is
commenced.
a)
The paint shall be applied only in specified number of coats. The paint dries by
evaporation of the water content and as soon as the water has evaporated, the film gets
hard and the next coat can be applied.
b)
The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. Thinning
with water is especially required for the undercoat which is applied on the absorbent
surface. The quantity of water to be added shall be as per manufacturer's instructions.
c)
The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary, more
coats shall be applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance.
I
4.12.12
Speciality paints:
4.12.12.1
Acrylic emulsion paints, textured paints and all speciality paints or undercoats shall be
applied as per relevant Indian Standards, manufacturer's instructions and as directed
by the Engineer. These painting / undercoating jobs shall be executed through
specialist agencies, limited to those identified by the manufacturer and as approved by
the Engineer.
4.12.13
Coverage of rates:
4.12.13.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for finishing
works are deemed to include the cost of all materials, consumables, wastages, curing,
transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery and
documentation, apart from preparing the surfaces and clearing waste and debris out of
the site.
4.12.13.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, primer works, if any are specified, are
Ideal Structures
Page 123 of 185
4.13 WATER SUPPLY WORKS
4.13.1 Codes and Standards:
IS:404
(All the parts) Lead pipe.
IS:458
Precast concrete pipes with or without reinforcement.
IS:638
Sheet Rubber and rubber insertion jointing.
IS:778
Gunmetal gate, 'globe and check valves for water services.
IS:781
Sand cast brass screw-down bib taps and stop taps for water services.
IS:782
Caulking lead.
IS:783
Code of practice for laying concrete pipes.
IS:804
Rectangular pressed steel tanks.
IS:1239
Mild steel tubes and tubulars.
IS:1536
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:1537
Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:1538
Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:1703
Ball valves (horizontal plunger type) including floats for water supply
purposes.
IS:1711
Self-closing taps.
IS:I729
Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings &
accessories.
IS:1742
Code of practice for building drainage.
Pillar taps for water supply purposes.
IS:1795
IS:2065
Code of practice for water supply in buildings.
IS:2104
Water meter boxes (domestic type).
IS:3004
Plug cocks for water supply purposes.
IS:3076
Specification for low density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies.
IS:3589
Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:3597
Method of test for concrete pipes.
IS:4346
Specification for Washers for use with fitting for water services .
IS:4984
High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and
industrial effluents.
IS:4985
Unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies.
IS:5822
Code of practice for laying of welded steel pipes for water supply.
IS:7634
(All the parts) Polyethylene pipes and UPVC pipes for potable water supplies.
IS:8008
(All the parts) Injection moulded HDPE fitting for potable water supplies.
IS:10910
Polypropylene and copolymers for safe use in contact with foodstuffs,
pharmaceuticals and drinking water
4.13.2
4.13.2.1
Galvanised steel water supply pipes:
Screwed galvanised steel pipes withstanding hydraulic test pressure of 50 kglsq.cm.,
confonning to IS: 1239 shall be jointed with screwed socket joints and screwed fittings
of the same materials as that of the pipes. Any burrs remaining on the pipe ends after
the threads are cut shall be removed.
4.13.2.2
An approved jointing compound together with a grummet of a few strands of fine yarn
shall be used for jointing pipes and fittings. Any pipe threads exposed after jointing
shall be painted or in the case of underground piping, thickly coated with approved
bituminous compound to prevent corrosion.
4.13.2.3 The depth at which the underground water supply pipe is to be laid shall be as shown on
the drawings. The dimensions of trenches shall be as below:
Ideal Structures
Page 124 of 185
Dia of GS pipes (mm)
15 to 50
50 to 100
4.13.2.4
4.13.2.5
Depth (cm)
60
75
Width (cm)
30
45
The service pipe passing into or beneath the building shall be laid atleast 200mm below
the ground floor level and be accommodated in a previously laid sleeve in the structure
where it enters the building. The space between the sleeves and the pipe at its entry
into and exit from the building shall be filled with a bituminous material for a
minimum of 150mm at both ends.
Piping shall not be buried in walls or floors as far as possible. However, when
unavoidable, piping shall be buried for the shortest distance necessary and adequate
protection shall be provided against damage. The embedded part shall be painted with
bitumen. Piping buried in ground shall be provided with two coats of approved anticorrosive paint.
4.13.2.6
Galvanised steel piping shall be secured by iron or steel clamps and hooks when fixed
on walls.
Metallic contact shall be avoided by coating the inside of the clamp
with bitumen.
4.13.2.7
All pipe work shall be completely water-tight and the joints shall be such that there are
no projections of jointing materials or the like into the interior of pipes.
4.13.2.8
Before the pipeline is commissioned, all piping and fitting shall be flushed clean.
4.13.3
4.13.3.1
Polyethylene and UPVC pipes:
Polyethylene and UPVC pipes shall be laid to conform with IS:7634 (Part-II). The pipes
shall have screwed ends and of specified colour.
4.13.3.2
Ordinary metal cutting dies of adjustable and guided variety may be used to thread the
ends preferably in one operation. Before such threading, the end of the pipe. shall be
plugged to avoid distortion. Tapered threads shall be provided and their number shall
be such as to be totally enclosed in the fitting.
4.13.3.3
A jointing compound shall be used to avoid the condition of some permanent
deformation taking place under prolonged loading, loosening the thread.
4.13.3.4
For neat surface installations, straight lengths of pipe shall be used. Standard pipe clips
may be used but these should not be so tight as to restrain thermal movement.
4.13.3.5
Failing continuous support, clipping of the pipe should be performed at distances
recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Generally, the spacing shall not exceed
600mm on horizontal runs and l.2m on vertical runs.
4.13.3.6
These pipes shall not be installed near hot water pipes or other sources of heat and
never painted. Storage and handling should be such as to avoid damage by cutting
edges.
4.13.3.7
The radius of bends shall be greater than 20 times the outside diameter of the pipe for
cold bent high density polyethylene pipes (12 times for LDPE) operating at ambient
temperatures. For hot bent pipes of diameter up to 50mm, the radius shall be a
Ideal Structures
Page 125 of 185
minimum of 5 and 3 times the outside pipe diameter for HOPE and LDPE respectively.
4.13.3.8
4.13.3.9
Permanent bends shall be made by heating the pipe in boiling water for a few minutes
or by careful application of blow lamp, with fine, warm and dry sand packed inside the
bore.
Where Polyethylene and UPVC pipes are laid in ground, the trenches shall be as for GS
pipes and as per manufacturer's instructions.
4.13.4
4.13.4.1
Lead pipes:
Joints in lead pipes shall be wiped solder joints. Joints shall be wiped in a continuous
circular motion in one direction so as to leave neatly formed elliptical shaped joints free of
tears, burrs, droppings, etc. All exposed lead pipes, exceeding 25mm in diameter shall be
secured to walls by iron clips or lead ears. The spacing of the clips shall not exceed
900mm.
4.13.5
4.13.5.1
Storage of water:
All tanks for storage of water shall be completely water-tight and properly covered with
dust, light and mosquito-proof cover of approved type as shown on the drawings or as
described in the BOQ. They shall be fitted with an approved type ball valve securely fixed
to the inlet pipe. A mosquito-proof overflow pipe shall be fixed to the tank with pipe
invert about 25mm above the top of water line or at a height as shown in the drawing. A
stop valve shall be provided for every outlet pipe except for the overflow.
4.13.5.2
The outlet and drain pipes shall bf; as shown on the drawings. Support of the tanks shall
be as indicted on drawings. In case of galvanised steel tanks, inside surface shall be
painted with anticorrosive drinking water tank paints.
4.13.6
Testing of water system:
4.13.6.1
To eliminate the danger of unknowingly attaching the pipe system to a pressure source
higher than the pressure rating of the pipe, adequate pressure reduction devices shall be
installed. It may be necessary to isolate items of equipment from the pressure test if they
are not capable of withstanding the test pressure and where these items are removed,
blank flanges or plugs shall be installed temporarily.
5.13.6.2
The lines shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds and joints should be left
exposed for inspection during testing.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
After completion of each section, the line shall be carefully and slowly charged with
water so that all air is expelled from the main, allowed to stand full of water for one /
two days and then tested under pressure.
The test pressure shall be one-and-a-half times the maximum working pressure.
Precautions must be taken to see that the test pressure is not exceeded.
Pressure gauges must be accurate and if necessary they shall be recalibrated before the
test.
The test pressure shall be maintained as long as is necessary to inspect the whole of the
pipe work under test and in any event not less than half-an-hour.
Open ends of the mains shall be temporarily closed for testing under moderate
pressure, by fitting water tight expanding plugs.
4.13.6.3 Where the line terminates with a sluice valve, the wedge of the valve shall be not be used
Ideal Structures
Page 126 of 185
to retain the water, lest permanent distortion of the working parts of the valve occurs.
Instead, the valve shall be fitted with a blank flange or socket plug and the valve left in
the open position whilst testing. The end of the main and any test plug shall be well
secured to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the main, i.e. maximum test
pressure times the cross section area of pipe.
4.13.7
Sterilisation of water system:
4.13.7.1
a)
The Contractor shall carry out the sterilising process in accordance with the following:
After cleaning the tank of all debris, the tank and pipe work shall be filled with water
and whole thoroughly flushed out. The system shall then be filled with water a second
time, but as the tank is filling, a sterilising chemical containing chlorine shall be added
to ensure thorough mixing of the chemical and water. The dose shall be such as to give
50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is
employed, the proportion used shall be 150g of powder to 1,000 litres water. The
powder shall first be mixed with water to a creamy consistency before adding the full
quantity of water. Proprietary bands of sterilising chemicals shall be added in the
proportions as per the manufacturer's instructions.
b)
After filling the system, the incoming water supply shall be shut off and each tap of the
distributing pipes opened successively, starting with the nearest the tank. As the water
which issues from each tap begins to smell of chlorine, the tap should be closed. The
tank shall then be filled again to the water line with water to which has been added the
correct dose of chemical. The whole system shall then be allowed to stand charged with
treated water for a period of atleast three hours, after which a test shall be made by
smell of residual chlorine. If none is found, the sterilisation shall be repeated.
c)
Before any water is used for domestic purposes, the whole system shall be emptied and
thoroughly' flushed out with clean water.
4.13.8
CI pipes and accessories
4.13.8.1 The cast iron spigotted and socketed pipes required for the work shall be arranged by the
Contractor. These pipes may also be supplied on "free-issue" basis / "recovery" basis,
wherever indicated in the BOQ, depending on availability. The Contractor shall make
necessary arrangements for transporting the pipes from employer's stores, to the work
site and their safe custody at site.
4.13.8.2
All specials, fittings and accessories shall be of best quality and of reputed manufacture
and shall conform to the relevant codes and specifications.
4.13.8.3
The trench shall be so dug that the pipe can be laid to the required alignment and at the
required depth. The size of the trench shall be as per the following table unless specified
otherwise due to the site conditions.
SI. No. Dia of CI pipes (mm)
1.
80
2.
100
3.
150
Ideal Structures
Depth (cm)
105
105
105
Width (cm)
75
75
75
Page 127 of 185
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
4.13.8.4
a)
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
110
120
135
145
155
170
185
205
80
80
80
90
90
100
100
110
Laying of pipes:
The pipes shall be carefully aligned to the required line and level. The spigot end shall
be centered into the socket of the next pipe and forced home and aligned to gradient.
The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it
except at the socket.
On level ground, the socket ends should face upstream. When the line runs uphill, the
socket ends should face the upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect a pipe from a straight line either in the vertical or
horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or where long radius curves are permitted, the
deflection allowed at joint shall not exceed 2S as per IS:3114.
The cutting of pipe, for inserting valves, fittings or closure pieces, shall be done in a
neat and workman like man her without damage to the pipe so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
.
Flame cutting of cast iron pipes by means of an oxyacetylene torch shall be avoided.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
4.13.8.5
Jointing of socket and spigot pipes shall be carried out by the following techniques:
a)
i)
Rubber joints:
The joint is of the push-in-type in which a specially designed high grade rubber gasket
compressed against the inner surface of the socket by the insertion of the pipe spigot,
provides the seal.
The rubber gasket shall be wiped clean, flexed and placed in the annular recess of the
modified socket. It shall be ensured that the gasket fits evenly around the whole
circumference. Any bulge which would prevent the proper entry of the spigot end shall
be removed.
A thin film of lubricant such as soap solution or grease shall be applied to the inside
surface of the gasket and to the outer surface of the entering spigot for a distance
of25mm from the spigot end.
The spigot end of the entering pipe shall be forced past the gasket carefully, which is
thus compressed, until the spigot end reaches the bottom end of the socket. Crowbar or
any other fork tool shall be used to shove the spigot into the socket.
ii)
iii)
iv)
b)
Lead joints:
i)
The joint sealing is done by stuffing a packing material such as spun yarn and pouring
molten lead in the joint space and finally caulking thoroughly with lead.
ii) Lead jointing shall strictly conform to the specifications with regard to materials and
jointing procedure laid down in IS: 3114. Lead used for caulking purposes shall
conform to IS: 782.
iii) The packing may be done with anyone of materials specified in IS:3144 and approved
by the Engineer. The quantities of lead and packing materials shall be as under:
Ideal Structures
Page 128 of 185
Pipe dia
(mm)
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
c)
Depth of Lead in joint Weight of Lead per
(mm)
joint (kg)
44.45
1.814
44.45
2.195
44.45
2.940
44.45
3.447
50.80
4.600
50.80
6.740
50.80
7.330
63.50
9.140
63.50
11.208
63.50
17.010
63.50
18.951
63.50
22.757
Weight of yam per
joint (kg)
0.128
0.170
0.298
0.340
0.539
0.652
0.737
0.823
0.935
1.246
1.531
1.814
The packing materials shall be placed around the spigot of the pipe and shall be of
proper dimensions to centre the spigot in the socket. When a single strand of packing
material is used, it shall have an overlap at the top of not more than 50mm. When more
than a single strand is required for a joint, each strand shall be cut out to sufficient
length so that the ends shall meet without causing overlap. The ends of the successive
strands shall meet at sides of the pipes alternately and not at the top or at the bottom.
The spigot shall be shoved home into the socket and the packing material shall be
driven tightly against the inside base or hub of the socket with suitable packing tools.
Lead shall be heated in a melting pot kept close to the joint to be poured to avoid
cooling of the molten metal while being carried to the joint. The lead shall be rendered
thoroughly fluid and heated to such temperature that when stirred, it will show a rapid
change of colour. All scum shall be removed from the lead before pouring it. The
remainder of the joint space stuffed with packing materials shall be filled by running in
molten lead using a joint runner.
Finally the joint shall be thoroughly caulked with lead using pneumatic tools or a hand
hammer weighing not less than 2 kg. The joint shall be finished 3mm behind the socket
face and shall be water-tight.
Flanged joints:
i)
Wherever flanged joints are necessitated due to site conditions or otherwise, the
jointing material shall be rubber washers of approved make and thickness and shall
cover the full diameter of the flange.
ii)
Each bolt should be tightened a little at a time taking care to tighten diametrically
opposite bolts alternately. The practice of fully tightening the bolts in peripheral
sequence is highly undesirable.
Collar Joints:
Wherever rubber-joints and lead joints are not possible, the CI pipes and specials shall
be provided with CI collar joints using cement mortar.
d)
i)
4.13.8.6
a)
Anchors:
Suitable anchors of concrete and steel shall be provided at all bends and other locations
on the pipeline, where unbalanced pressure may exist or develop which will tend to
cause movement in the pipelines or fittings while the pipe is under normal or test
Ideal Structures
Page 129 of 185
b)
c)
d)
4.13.8.7
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
pressure.
Where the hydraulic thrust is in an upward direction, anchor blocks of sufficient
weight shall be provided to which pipes shall be secured with steel straps.
Suitable thrust blocks shall be provided wherever necessary in long stretches to
transmit hydraulic pressure. The distance between two successive thrust blocks shall
not exceed 50m.
Generally, the anchors will be indicated in the drawings, but unless mentioned in the
drawings as "Anchors Omitted" anchors shall be provided by the Contractor wherever
necessary.
Testing of CI pipes and joints:
After laying and jointing, the pipelines shall be subjected to pressure test and leakage
test as required by the Engineer. The entire length of the pipeline shall be carefully
inspected.
Any joint found leaking shall be redone and also all leaking pipes shall be removed
and replaced at no extra cost, i.e. replacement of burst pipes by new pipes shall be done
at the Contractor's cost.
The test pressures for CI pipes shall be 12 kg/sq. cm. and 18 kg/sq. cm for class-LA
and class-A, respectively. The pipes shall be slowly and careful1y charged with water
allowing air to escape and avoiding any shock or water hammer. The draw-off taps
and stopcocks shall then be closed and the specified hydraulic pressure shall be
applied gradually. Pressure gauge must be accurate and preferably should have been
recalibrated before the test. The test pump having been stopped, the test pressure
should be maintained without loss for atleast half an hour. The pipes and fittings shall
be tested in sections As the work of laying proceeds, having the joints exposed for
inspection during the testing.
The test should be done at the cost of the Contractor. The testing equipment such as
pump, pressure gauge, etc. and water required for testing should be provided by the
Contractor at his own cost.
Test gaps i.e. short lengths of pipelines which come in between the tested lengths shall
be carefully laid, jointed and rendered watertight. Any defect noticed during
commissioning shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
The valve section of the pipe shall be slowly filled with water and all air shall be
expelled from the pipe through hydrants and blow-offs. If these are not available at
high places, necessary tapings may be made at points of highest elevation before the
test is made and plugs inserted after the tests are completed.
All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints should be carefully examined
during the open trench test. When the joints are made with lead, all such joints
showing visible leaks shall be recaulked until watertight. Any cracked or defective pipe
fitting, valve or hydrant discovered during the pressure test shall be removed and
replaced by sound material and the test shall be repeated to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
If the trench has been backfilled to the top, the section shall be first subjected to water
pressure normal to the area and the exposed parts shall be carefully examined. If any
defects are found, they shall be repaired and the pressure test repeated until no defects
are found. The duration of the final pressure tests shall be atleast one hour.
Line testing log books are to be maintained at site. The log book shall be so prepared
that the following information can be recorded on each page: Cluster number, Name of
the branch, Diameter of pipe to be tested, Length of pipe to be tested, Date of pipe
laying and jointing, Date and time of testing, Duration of testing, Results and Remarks
on testing, signature of the Engineer.
Ideal Structures
Page 130 of 185
j)
Backfill of the trench shall be progressed only after obtaining the signature of the
Engineer in the Line Testing Log Book.
4.13.9
Valves:
4.13.9.1
Sluice valves with chrome-steel spindles, butterfly valves, wheel valves, scour valves,
air valves, water meters, fire hydrants and other water supply accessories shall
conform to the relevant BIS codes and shall be of approved make.
4.13.9.2
Where the valves are to be provided in ground, suitable masonry chambers as per
drawings shall be provided for housing the same. In case of air valves, necessary
arrangements for disposal of spill water shall also be provided as shown in the
drawings.
4.13.9.3
Fixing of valves and accessories in position shall be as per BIS codes and as directed by
the Engineer. 13.10 Disinfection of water mains:
4.13.11
All CI water mains shall be thoroughly and efficiently disinfected before being
commissioned, by flushing with water containing bleaching powder at 0.5 gram per
litre of water and cleaned with fresh water. This operation shall be repeated three
times. The samples of water from the disinfected water mains shall be tested in an
approved laboratory.
4.13.12
Coverage of rates:
13.12.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for water supply
works are deemed to include the cost of all earthwork, materials, consumables,
wastages, curing, transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery
and documentation, apart from preparing the surfaces, surface treatments and clearing
waste and debris out of the site.
13.12.2
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, surface treatments, if any are specified,
Ideal Structures
Page 131 of 185
4.14 SANITARY, PLUMBING, DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE WORKS
4.14.1
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.14.2
General:
All water supply, drainage and sanitary work shall be executed by a licensed or
authorised plumbing supervisor or a licensed or authorised plumber and shall be in
accordance with the requirements of relevant byelaws of municipal or other
Authorities in whose jurisdiction the work is being carried out.
Specifications for items such as earthwork, excavation, concrete, brickwork, stonework
and painting, etc., shall apply for these works also, unless otherwise specified.
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed metallic work, such as brackets, shall be
painted with one coat of red oxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved colour.
The diameter of pipes and fittings wherever mentioned shall mean the nominal bore,
unless otherwise specified.
IS:405
Lead sheet and strip.
IS:638
Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing.
IS:651
Salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings.
IS:771
(All the parts) Glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances.
IS:774
Flushing cistern for water-closets and urinals (valve-less siphonic type).
IS:775
Cast Iron Brackets and supports for wash basins and sinks.
IS:782
Caulking lead.
IS:1536
Centrifugally cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS: 1537
Vertically cast iron pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage.
IS:1538
Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:I726
Cast iron manhole covers and frames intended for use in drainage works.
IS: 1729
Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings
and accessories.
IS:1742
Code of practice for building drainage.
IS:2065
Code of practice for water supply in buildings.
IS:2326
Automatic flushing cisterns for urinals.
IS:2470
(All the parts) Code of practice for design and construction of septic tank.
IS:2548
(All the parts) Plastic water-closet seats and covers.
IS:2556
(All the parts) Vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous China).
IS:2963
Copper alloy waste fittings for wash basin and sink.
IS:3006
Chemically resistant salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings.
IS:3114
Code of practice for laying cast iron pipes.
IS:3589
Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS:4127
Code of practice for laying of glazed stoneware pipes.
IS:5329
Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings
IS:10910 Polypropylene and copolymers for safe use in contact with foodstuffs,
pharmaceuticals and drinking water
IS:12592 Specification for pre-cast manhole covers and frames.
4.14.3
Materials
4.14.3.1
The materials, fittings and appliances used in the work shall be as specified hereunder.
The type, quality, class, size, finish and make shall be as specified in the BOQ. The Contractor shall
submit the Engineer samples of all materials, fittings and appliances for approval well in advance
Ideal Structures
Page 132 of 185
of starting the work. All materials, fittings and appliances used in the work shall conform to the
approved samples which shall be retained by the Engineer until completion of the work, if he
deems it necessary.
a)
Lead pipes shall conform to IS:404. Weight and thickness of pipes shall be as indicated
in the drawings or in the BOQ.
b)
Sheet lead for finishing shall weigh atleast 30 kg/ Sq.m. unless specified otherwise, and
shall conform to IS:405.
c)
Bottle trap shall be of approved quality, heavy brass chromium plated trap and madE
'particularly smooth on the inside and shall have minimum 50mm water seal
(detachable),
d)
I
e)
Cast Iron pipes and accessories shall conform to IS: 1729, 1536, 1537 and 1538.
Manhole covers shall conform to IS.: 1726
f)
Salt-glazed stoneware pipes shall conform to IS: 651; Class AA.
4.14.4
4.14.4.1
a)
Cast iron pipes:
Laying of cast iron pipes shall follow IS: 3114. 14.4.2 Trenching:
The width of the trench at its bottom shall be such as to provide 200mm clearance on
either side of the pipeline. Trench shall be dug wider to permit convenient placing of
supports handling of specials, and at positions of sockets and flanges for jointing to be
made properly. At joints the depths of the trench' shall also permit easy finishing of the
joint.
b)
In case of rocky areas, the minimum clearance alround shall be l50mm for pipes below
600mm in diameter and 200mm for larger pipes. Normally, the trench shall be
excavated so that the pipe rests on a solid and undisturbed ground when laid. Where
drilling or blasting becomes necessary, the excavation shall be trimmed to a depth 80 to
150mm below the bottom of pipe and filled to a like depth with broken stone of size
13mm and below and well rammed to form a fair bed.
c)
All excavated material shall be placed on one side of the trench. All pipes, water mains,
cables or other utilities met within the course of excavation shall be carefully protected
and supported.
4.14.4.2
a)
4.14.4.3
a)
Handling:
Pipes shall be unloaded from trucks on wooden skids with a steadying rope to prevent
bumping with other pipes on that side of the 'trench, which does not have the
excavated material. All pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered
into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, tripod or other tools to prevent damage to
the materials or protective linings on the pipe.
Laying underground:
The pipe shall be checked for cracks by being rung with a hammer, preferably when
Ideal Structures
Page 133 of 185
suspended. Pipes shall be placed with their sockets facing upstream. After placing a
length of pipe in the trench the cleaned spigot end shall be centered in the socket and
the pipe forced home and aligned to gradient. Then it shall be secured in place and
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the socket. Then, the pipe shall be
jointed by caulking.
4.14.4.4 Jointing:
a)
If the pipes used are of the spigot and socket type, the spigot shall be carefully centered
in the socket by one or more laps of clean white hemp / spun yam with about 25mm
overlap. Sufficient yam only shall be forced into the socket to leave a correct depth for
caulking. The pipe shall then be examined again for line and level and the proper
depth of each joint shall be tested before running the molten lead. For pouring of
molten lead, a ring of sterilised hemp rope shall be wrapped round the pipe at the end
of the socket and the joint shall be covered with stiff damp clay. The top shall then be
removed carefully leaving a V -shaped large hole at the top of the joint to pour the
molten lead. Lead shall be poured in one operation only. After a convenient length of
pipe has been laid, lead shall be caulked sufficiently with a pneumatic tool or hand
hammer till the excess lead is removed and the joint shall be made neat and clean.
b)
If it is necessary to deflect the pipe from its desired alignment to avoid any obstruction,
the deflection at the joint shall not exceed 2.5°.
4.14.4.5 Backfill:
a)
The pipeline laid may be partially backfilled except at the joints in the following
manner:
b)
Upto the level of the centre line of the pipe by hand with sand, fine gravel or approved
material in layers of 80mm and compacted by tamping.
c)
Beyond (a) upto 300mm above the top of pipe by hand or mechanical methods without
injuring or moving the pipe. Approved material shall be used for backfill and well
rammed.
d)
Beyond (b) upto the finished ground level by hand or mechanical methods in wellcompacted 300mm layers. Suitable material containing stones upto 200mm as their
greatest dimension may be used.
4.14.4.6 Testing:
a)
The pipe shall now be pressure tested to double the maximum working pressure. The
pipe and joints shall be absolutely watertight while the test pressure is maintained for 5
minutes. Thirty six hours after the successful completion of the water tightness test, a
two hour leakage test shall be performed at 1.5m times the designed pressure by
slowly filling the pipeline with water and expelling all the air.
b)
The permissible leakage shall be allowed as specified at Clause-6.6 of IS:3114.
c)
On completion of testing, the trench shall be completely backfilled with approved nondeleterious material. The backfill shall be neatly rounded over the trench to a sufficient
height to allow for settlement to the specified level.
4.14.5
Salt-glazed stoneware pipes:
4.14.5.1 Laying of salt-glazed stoneware pipes shall conform to IS:4 127
4.14.5.2 Trenching:
a)
The width of the trench at its bottom shall be diameter of the pipe +300mm for trench
depths upto l.2m and diameter +400mm for greater depths but subject to a minimum of
750mm for trenches deeper then 0.9 metres. At joints, the width and depth of trench
Ideal Structures
Page 134 of 185
b)
shall such as to facilitate easy installation.
The trench shall normally be excavated to the specified gradient to give a continuous
bearing to the pipe. If any unstable area or unsound material is encountered, they shall
be removed and the specified gradient attained by backfilling with approved material
in uncompacted 80mm layers. Then the bed concrete shall be laid.
c)
Where rock is met, the trench shall be trimmed to a depth of 80mm, below the level of
the bottom of the pipe and filled to a like depth with broken stone of size 13mm and
below and well rammed.
d)
All excavated materials shall be cast on one side of the trench. All pipes, water mains,
cables and other utilities met with within the course of excavation shall be carefully
protected and supported.
4.14.5.3
Bedding: Where pipes are laid on a soft soil with maximum water table level lying at the
invert level of the pipe, the pipe shall be bedded in concrete as indicated in the drawings.
4.14.5.4
Haunching: Where pipes have to be laid in a soft soil with the maximum water table level
rising above the invert of the pipe, but below the top of the banel, the pipe shall be
haunched as indicated in the drawings.
4.14.5.5 Encasing: In the following cases, the sewers shall be completely encased with concrete as
indicated in the drawings:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Where the highest water table level is likely to rise above the top of the barrel.
Where sewers are to be laid adjacent to growing trees, to avoid damage to the pipe
likely to be caused by the roots of trees.
Where the depth of the pipe is less than 1.2 m under the road surface.
Where the intensity of load on the pipe exceeds 1,600 kg per metre length,
At water and sewer crossings, where the sewer lines runs above the water line.
At water and sewer crossings, where the water line runs above the sewer line but the
vertical separation is less than 0.5 metre.
Where the horizontal separation between water pipes and sewers is less than 0.3 metre.
4.14.5.6
No work shall be encased with concrete until it has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer.
4.14.5.7
a)
Materials for bedding, haunching and encasing:
The concreting wherever necessary shall be done with PCC of mix and dimensions
shown in the drawings.
4.14.5.8
a)
Handling:
Pipes shall be unloaded from trucks on timber skids with a steadying rope to prevent
bumping with other pipes on that side of the trench which does not have the excavated
material. In shallow trenches manual handling is enough but for deep trenches, tripods
and rope shall be used to lower the pipes.
4.14.5.9
a)
Laying and jointing:
The pipes shall be inspected for defects and be rung with a light hammer, preferably
when suspended to detect cracks. The pipes shall be laid with the socket ends
upstream.
Ideal Structures
Page 135 of 185
b)
c)
d)
After placing a length of pipe in the trench, on concrete bedding where so specified, the
cleaned spigot end shall be centered in the socket and the pipe forced home and
aligned to gradient. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material
except are the socket. Then the pipe shall be jointed.
Spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry or tarred gasket shall be passed around the
joint and inserted in it by means of a caulking tool and wooden mallet.
More skeins of yarn or gasket shall be added if necessary and shall be well caulked, till
they occupy one fourth of the depth of the socket. Cement sand mortar 1: 1 shall be
slightly moistened and inserted by hand to fill the remaining space and caulked tightly.
The mortar joint shall then be finished off neatly outside the socket at an angle of 45
degree to the face of the socket. The Cement mortar shall be cured for seven days by
covering with wet gunny bags.
4.14.5.10
a)
Testing:
All underground pipelines shall be subjected to a test pressure of 2.5m head of water at
the highest point of the section under test. A tolerance of 2 litres per centimeter of
diameter per kilometer may be allowed during a period of 10 minutes.
b)
In accordance with IS:4127, the test shall be carried out by suitably plugging the low
end of the drain and the ends of connections, if any, and filling the system with water.
A knuckle bend shall be temporarily jointed in at the top end and sufficient length of
vertical pipe jointed to it so as to provide the required test head.
c)
Subsidence of the test water may be due to one or more of the following causes:
Absorption by pipes and joints; sweating of pipes or joints; leakage at joints or from
defective pipes; trapped air. Allowance shall be made for absorption by adding water
until absorption has ceased, after which the test may be i commenced. Since any
leakage will be visible, the defective part shall be drained, cut out, made good and the
test repeated. Slight sweating, if uniform, may be over looked but excessive sweating
may be considered as indicating faulty pipes, joints or fittings. Any faulty joint shall be
rectified or embedded in M15 concrete, 300mm long and the relevant section re-tested.
Backfill:
Backfilling shall be commenced only upon satisfactory completion of testing. The
method and materials used shall be the same as specified for backfilling cast iron pipes.
4.14.5.11
a)
4.14.6
4.14.6.1
4.14.6.2
4.14.6.3
Unplasticized PVC pipes:
Unplasticised PVC pipes should conform to IS: 4985 to withstand continuous hydraulic
pressure. Rubber seal rings should conform to IS:5382.
Reasonable care should be taken in handling and storage of these pipes, while loading
and unloading. Pipe should be lowered / lifted and not dropped / dragged to prevent
image. Pipes should be stacked on an even surface free from loose stones and sharp
objects. They should be given adequate support at all times, the stacking not exceeding
1.5m if they have to be stored for long period. Pipes should preferably be stored in
shade during summer. Fittings should be stored in gunny bags and rubber rings
should be kept tension free.
For jointing the pipes, pipe and socket should be accurately cut. The ends of the pipes
and fittings should be absolutely free from dirt and dust. The outside surface of the
pipes and inside of the fittings shall be roughened with emery paper and solvent
cement shall be applied to the matching surfaces and pushed home and joint. Since
solvent cement is aggressive to PYC, care must be taken to avoid applying excessive
Ideal Structures
Page 136 of 185
cement to the inside of the pipe socket as any surplus cement cannot be wiped off after
jointing.
For above ground installations, pipe clips should be spaced at intervals of not more
than ten times the outside diameter of pipes for horizontal run. For vertical runs, they
should be spaced at intervals of one metre to maximum of two metres according to
pipe diameters.
Laying of pipes in trenches and concealed locations:
The pipes should be laid over a uniform, relatively soft-grained soil, free from hard
objects such as rocky projections and tree roots. The trench width should not be less
than pipe diameter plus 300mm while trench depth should be 600 to 1000mm
depending on the size of pipe and slope required for gravity flow. Pipes shall be
positioned in the trench so as to avoid any induced stress due to deflection. Any
deviation required shall be obtained by using proper type of rubber ring joints.
Rubber ring joints should preferably be made when the 105 pipe lengths are placed in
position in the trench and they should be checked to ensure that they are fully engaged.
At all times during the ingress, dirt and any foreign matter into the bore of a pipe and
if the jointing is stopped for a time, the end of the last pipe should be blanked off
temporarily.
Concealed installation:
For concealing the pipelines, slots are made in the wall or concrete. The slot size should
be such that the system remains stress-free at the time of installation. Sharp edges
should be avoided. UPVC pipes and fittings should be cleaned and a light coat of
solvent cement applied externally before they are inserted in the slots. Sprinkle dry
sand on them to form a good base for proper fixing with cement. Leakage test must be
carried out before concealing the system.
4.14.6.4
4.14.6.5
a)
b)
4.14.6.6
a)
4.14.6.7
Testing of soil and waste pipelines:
a)
Before the system is put into use, it should be tested for leakages by air test, hydraulic
test or smoke test.
Smoke test:
On completion of laying all above ground, PYC / UPVC soil, waste and ventilation
pipelines shall be smoke-tested by the Contractor under a pressure of 205m head of
water for 15 minutes to detect leakages. This shall be done after all trap seals have
been filled with water. The test shall be conducted using proper apparatus with
attachments for applying smoke to the pipelines under pressure. Cotton waste or
brown paper soaked in creosote oil shall be fixed to obtain dense and pungent smoke.
While conducting smoke test, top of soil, waste and ventilation pipes shall be kept
open till smoke starts coming out of the openings. The openings shall be then be
securely plugged with expanding rubber or any other approved plug. The floor traps
and other openings. for connecting sanitary fixtures shall be sealed with water or
other approved. plug. The entire pipelines shall be tested in suitable sections as
directed by the Engineer. The entire length of the pipelines including all joints under
test shall be closely observed for any sign of smoke leakages. All leakages and defects
shall be rectified before the system is put to use.
b)
i)
c)
Hydraulic testing:
i)
Ideal Structures
All control valves shall be positioned open for the duration of the test and open end
closed with watertight fittings. The testing pressure on completion of the work shall
not be less than one and a half times the working pressure of the pipes.
Page 137 of 185
ii)
Pressures shall be applied either by hand pump or power driven pump. Pressure
gauges shall be correctly positioned and closely observed to ensure that at no time
are the test pressures exceeded. The systems shall be slowly and carefully filled with
water to avoid surge pressure or water hammer. Air vents shall be open at all high
points so that air may be expelled from the system during filling.
iii)
When the system has been fully charged with water and air displaced from the line, air
vent shall be closed and the line initially inspected for seepage at joints and firmness of
supports under load. Pressure may then be applied until the required test pressure is
reached.
iv)
Without any additional requirement of make up water, the test pressure should not fall
more than 0.2 kg/sq. cm. at the end of one hour test duration.
Test pressure should not exceed twice the safe working pressure of the pipe and be
not less than 1.5q times the maximum operating pressure.
v)
vi)
Line Testing Log Books are to be maintained at site. These log books shall be so
prepared that the following information can be recorded on each page: Cluster number,
Name of the branch, Diameter of pipe to be tested, Length of pipe to be tested, Date of
pipe jointing, Date and time of testing, Duration of testing, Results and Remarks on
testing, Signature of the Engineer.
d)
Backfill of the trench shall be progressed only after obtaining the signature of the
Engineer in the Line Testing Log Book.
4.14.7
Concrete Pipes:
4.14:7.1 The laying of concrete pipelines shall conform to Clause-9 00S:783. Pipes shall be laid true
to line and grade. Laying of pipes shall always proceed upgrade of a slope. The type of
jointing for concrete pipes shall be with loose concrete collars and the joints shall be
packed from either side with spun yarn dipped in cement slurry as specified for jointing
stoneware pipes. Stiff cement mortar (1: 1) shall be filled from both sides and splayed at
an angle of 450 on both sides. The joints shall be adequately cured as specified for joints in
stoneware pipes. The pressure test indicated for underground stoneware pipes shall
apply to concrete pipes with the same leakage factor.
4.14.8
Sanitary appliances:
4.14.8.1
a)
All sanitary appliances shall be fixed in position rigidly on floor and walls as indicated
in the drawings / BOQ or as directed by the Engineer.
b)
Each sanitary unit shall be complete in all respects, encompassing all the necessary
fittings, accessories, items, materials and labour between the following two battery
limits: water supply fitting (inclusive) and trap (inclusive), but excluding the platform
and taps in case of wash basins / sinks. The rates in the BOQ shall therefore be deemed
to include all pipes, wastes, valve fittings, etc.
Ideal Structures
Page 138 of 185
4.14.8.2
a)
Water closets and urinals:
The type of water closets and urinals and their mounting on wall / floor shall be as per
the BOQ and drawings.
4.14.8.3
a)
Wash hand basin:
Wall-hung wash hand basins shall be fitted in position to true level on a pair of cast
iron brackets rigidly fixed onto the wall with 50mm long brass screws and suitable
plugs.
Counter-top wash basins shall be fitted below the platform or with their lip above the
counter.
Wash basins shall be fitted with 15mm dia approved quality chromium plated pillar
tap and 32mm dia waste fittings. The type of waste pipe and their connections shall be
as given in the BOQ and as directed by the Engineer.
b)
c)
5.14.8.4Sinks:
a)
b)
5.14.8.5
These shall be as per the BOQ and of approved make and quality. Unless otherwise
specified, these shall comprise all the accessories indicated in the BOQ.
The cast iron brackets, if any, and GI waste pipe of 40mm dia shall be painted with two
coats of approved paint over a coat of approved primer. The rate shall include for
supplying, fitting and fixing the above including any other fittings and is for the
completed work.
Other miscellaneous fittings:
a)
All such fittings shall be of type and sizes prescribed in the BOQ and shall be fitted in
position true to line level and exact locations as shown on the drawings and as directed
by the Engineer and as per manufacturer's instructions.
4.14.9
a)
Mirrors:
Mirror glass shall be AA grade silvering quality polished plate glass silvered on one
side copper backed, varnished and painted. Edge of mirrors shall be bevelled.
b)
The mirror shall be mounted on asbestos sheet 6mm thick and shall be fixed in position
by means of four CP brass screws and CP washers over rubber washers and wooden
plugs firmly embedded in the wall. The plugs shall be of hardwood and of size 50mm x
50mm at base tapering to 38mm x 38mm at top and of length 50mm. These shall be
fixed in wall in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement, 3 coarse sand). After the plugs are fixed in
the wall, the mortar shall be cured till it is set. The height of the bottom edge of the
mirror shall generally be 1200mm above the floor level unless otherwise shown in
drawings. The shorter sides shall be fixed horizontally or as shown in drawings.
4.14.10
a)
4.14.11
Glass shelf unit:
The brackets of the units shall be fixed with CP brass screws to wooden plugs firmly
embedded in the wall with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement, 3 coarse sand). The height of
the glass shelf above the floor level shall be 1150mm. unless otherwise shown in the
drawings.
Towel rail
Ideal Structures
Page 139 of 185
a)
The brackets of the towel rail shall be fixed by means of CP brass screws to wooden
plugs firmly embedded in the wall with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement, 3 coarse sand).
b)
The height of the towel rail above the floor level shall be 750mm unless otherwise
shown in drawings. 14.8.9 Toilet paper holder and soap tray:
c)
The size and make of the toilet paper holder and soap tray shall be as indicated in the
BOQ and shall be fixed with CP brass screws onto wooden plugs embedded in the
wall.
4.14.12
Bibcock and Stop cock:
a) Bibcock and stop cock shall be either plain or CP brass of easy clean, screw down pattern
of medium weight and with crutch head as indicated in the BOQ. These shall be of
approved manufacture and shall conform to relevant Indian Standard Specifications.
4.14.13
a)
4.14.14
Valves:
Unless otherwise mentioned in the BOQ, these shall be peets pattern gun metal fullway valves, heavy type, conforming to relevant Indian Standard specifications.
Testing of drains and sewers:
4.14.14.1 Testing shall be done to establish that the drainage system would function satisfactorily
under working conditions. No work shall be covered up or buried until inspected and
approved by the Engineer. All drains and sewers laid underground shall be tested for
water-tightness, by means of water pressure maintained for not less then ten minutes.
Where possible, testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole and short branches
to a main drain between manholes included in the test for the main drain. Manholes
should be tested separately.
4.14.14.2
a)
b)
Water test method:
The test shall be carried out by suitably plugging the low end of the drain and the ends
of the connections, if any, and filling the system with water. A knuckle bend shall be
temporarily jointed in at the top end and sufficient length of vertical pipe jointed to it
as to provide the required test head.
Subsequence of the test water may be due to one or more of the following causes:
Absorption by pipes and joints; sweating of pipes or joints; leakage joints or from
defective pipes; trapped air. Allowance shall be made for absorption by adding water
until absorption has ceased after which the test may be commenced. Since any leakage
will be visible, the defective part shall be drained, cut out, and made good and the test
repeated. Slight sweating if uniform, may be overlooked but excessive sweating shall
be considered as indicating faulty pipes, joints of fittings. The loss of water after
equilibrium has been achieved for drains upto 300mm diameter over a period of ten
minutes shall not exceed two litres per centimetre of diameter per kilometre of drain.
4.14.14.3
a)
Water tests for cast iron pipes:
Cast iron drains or sewers laid underground shall be tested to a minimum pressure of
Ideal Structures
Page 140 of 185
1.5m head of water. The drain plugs shall be suitably strutted to prevent their being
forced out of the pipe. Alternatively an air test may be applied.
4.14.14.4
a)
Water test for pipes other than cast iron:
Vitrified clayware pipes and concrete pipes, laid underground shall be subjected to a
test pressure of atleast 1.5m head of water at the highest point of the section under test,
but not more than 2.4m at the low end.
4.14.14.5
Testing of cast iron soil and waste pipelines:
a)
On completion of laying, all above ground, cast iron soil, waste and ventilation
pipelines shall be smoke tested by the Contractor under a pressure of 205m head of
water for 15 minutes to detect leakages. This shall be done after all trap seals have been
filled with water.
b)
The test shall be conducted using proper apparatus with attachments for applying
smoke to the pipelines under pressure. Cotton waste or brown paper soaked in
creosate oil shall be fired to obtain dense and pungent smoke. While conducting smoke
test, top of soil, waste and ventilation pipes shall be kept open till smoke starts leaking
out of the openings. The openings shall then be securely plugged with expanding
rubber or any other approved plug. The floor traps and other openings for connecting
sanitary fixtures shall be sealed with water or other approved plug. The entire
pipelines shall be tested in suitable sections as directed by the Engineer. The under test
shall be closely observed for any sign of entire length of the pipelines including all
rectified before the system
joints smoke leakages. All leakages and defects shall be
is put to use.
4.14.14.6 Testing of straightness and obstruction:
a)
b)
For freedom from obstruction: A smooth ball of a diameter 12mm less than the
diameter of the pipe shall be inserted at the high end of the drain or sewer. Provided
that no obstruction exists, the ball should freely roll down the pipe and emerge at the
lower end. Projection into the drain or sewer of any jointing material will usually stop
the ball.
For straightness of run: A lamp shall be inserted at one end of the drain and a mirror
placed at 45° to the invert at the other end. If the pipe is straight, the full circle of light
can be observed. Any deviation or obstruction can be readily seen.
4.14.14.7 Test for manholes:
a)
Manholes shall be tested for water tightness by filling them with water, and observing
any subsidence. It is also necessary to fill the downstream length of drain in order that
the drain plug may be removed on completion of test.
4.14.15
Ancillary structures:
4.14.15.1 Manholes:
a)
All manholes shall conform to the requirements of 18:4111 (Part I). Manholes of
different types and sizes as specified shall be constructed in the sewer line at such
places and to such levels and dimensions as shown in the typical drawings and as
Ideal Structures
Page 141 of 185
directed by the Engineer. The size specified shall indicate the inside dimensions
(between wall faces) of the manholes. Sewers of unequal sectional area shall not be
jointed at the same invert in a manhole. The invert of the smaller sewer at its junction
with the main sewer shall be such that the crown of both sewers shall be in one line.
The branch sewer should deliver sewage in the manhole in the direction of flow and
the junction must be made with ease so that flow in the main is not impeded.
h)
The manholes in general shall be built on a bed of cement concrete 1:4:8 / 40mm (1
cement, 4 coarse find, 8 graded stone aggregate 40mm nominal size). For drop manholes
in particular the bed concrete mix shall be 1 :2:4 (MIS). The thickness of bed concrete for
the different shapes of manholes shall be as indicated in the following table:
Depth of Manhole (mm)
Upto 1000
1010 to 2000
2010 to 2500
Above 2500
Shape of Manhole
Square
Rectangular
Rectangular
Circular
Bed thickness (mm)
150
200
300
300
b)
Projection of bed concrete beyond the masonry wall shall be 150mm.
c)
The brick masonry shall be in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement, 4 coarse sand). All
brickwork shall be carefully built in English bond. The jointing face of each brick shall
be well buttered with cement . mortar before laying so as to ensure a full joint.
d)
In 800 x 800mm square manholes and 900 x 1200mm rectangular manholes, walls shall
be of brickwork 230mm thick, built in English bond in cement mortar 1 :4.
e)
In 1400mm dia circular manholes, walls shall be of brickwork 230mm thick upto
3500mm depth, 350mm thick between 3500 and 9740mm depth. In 1500mm dia drop
manholes, walls shall be of brickwork 230mm thick upto 1900mm depth, 350mm thick
between 1900mm and 3000mm depth, and 470mm thick beyond 3000mm depth.
f)
In the case of manholes of circular type or drop manholes the walls shall be corbelled
inwards on three sides from r height 2050mm to 1900mm as the case may be, below the
top of manhole cover, to reduce its internal size to that of the internal diameter of
manhole cover frame to be fitted.
All manholes shall be constructed so as to be watertight under test. All angles shall be
rounded to 75mm radius with cement plaster 15mm thick. The joints of sewer with
masonry wall shall be made perfectly leak proof.
Excavation, filling back, ramming, disposal of surplus earth, preparation of bottoms
and sides, etc., shall be carried out as indicated in the drawings and / or as directed by
the Engineer.
g)
h)
4.14.15.2 Manhole covers:
a)
Pre-cast PFRC / SFRC Manhole covers shall be as per relevant IS and of duty indicated
in the drawings. For square and rectangular manholes, the cover frames shall be of size
1 000rri.mxl000mmx160mm with clear opening of 500mm diameter. For circular
manholes, the cover frames shall be 1000mm diameter and with clear opening of
560mm diameter.
Ideal Structures
Page 142 of 185
b)
The manhole chambers are to be constructed upto 600-900mm below the ground level,
unless otherwise indicated in the drawings or required by the Engineer. The pre -cast
PFRC / SFRC slab with integral dame is to be placed over the chamber after making
provision for bonding against the top surface of the walls of the chamber using hotasphalt / bitumen mix. Thereafter, the sides, edges of the slab along the chamber /
road surface are to' be packed with additional quantity of hot-asphalt / bitumen mix (6
- 10mm). The manhole cover of required size is to be placed in the frame using proper
lifting handles to prevent damage. The pre-cast PFRC / SFRC manhole cover system
should never be carelessly dropped or handled, during loading / unloading in
transport, or while fixing / placing it in position at site.
4.14.15.3
a)
Plaster:
The inside plastering shall be 12mm thick with cement mortar 1:3 finished with a
floating coat of neat cement and outside plastering shall be 15mm thick with cement
mortar 1:3.
4.14.15.4
a)
Channels and benching:
Channels shall be semicircular in the bottom half, and the diameter equal to the sewer.
Above the horizontal diameter, the sides shall be extended vertically to the same level
as the crown of the outgoing pipe in such a manner as to provide no lodgement for any
splashings in case of accidental flooding. The benching shall rise at a slope of 1:6 from
the edge of the channel towards the wall. The top of the benching shall be suitably
rounded off.
The branch channels shall be similarly constructed with respect to the benching, but at
their junction with the main channel an appropriate fall suitably rounded off in the
direction of flow in the main channel shall be given.
All channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement, 2 coarse
sand, 4 graded r stone aggregate 20mm.nominal size). The channels at the bottom of
the manhole shall be plastered with I cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement, 2 coarse sand) and
all rendered internal surfaces shall have a hard impervious finish obtained by using a
steel trowel.
Testing:
Manholes shall be tested by filling with water to a depth not exceeding 1.2 metres as
directed by the Engineer. After completion of the work, manhole covers shall be sealed
and Contractor's rate for manholes shall include for this.
Steps:
Cast Iron Steps shall conform to the requirements of IS:5455. Plastic encapsulated
footsteps shall comprise an outer layer of plastic to IS: 1 091 0, over 12mm dia steel bar
to IS: 1786, of approved make.
Steps shall be provided in all manholes over 800mm in depth and shall preferably be of
cast iron. These steps shall be set staggered in two vertical runs which shall be 380mm
apart horizontally and 300mm apart vertically. The first step shall be 450mm below the
manhole cover and the lowest step not more than 300mm above the benching. The
steps shall be embedded 200mm deep with 200x200xlOOmm blocks of cement concrete
mix 1 :3:6 (1 cement, 3 coarse sand, 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The
block with steps placed in its centre shall be cast in situ along with the masonry and
surface finished with 15mm thick cement plaster 1:3 (I cement, 3 sand) finished smooth
to match with the surface of the manhole. Steps shall be painted with coal-tar, for the
portion embedded in the masonry, and the cement concrete blocks shall be painted
with thick cement slurry before finishing.
b)
c)
4.14.15.5
a)
4.14.15.6
a)
b)
Ideal Structures
Page 143 of 185
4.14.15.7
a)
Barricading and warning signs:
Where underground works on sewer, C1 water mains, GS pipes, manholes, etc. are in
progress, the excavated site shall be protected by means of suitable barricades to the
approval of the Engineer. Warning signs and night lamps shall be provided for such
excavation in any public thoroughfare. The rates quoted for the main items of work
shall include for such costs.
4.14.16
4.14.16.1
Coverage of rates:
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for sanitary,
plumbing, drainage and sewerage works are deemed to include the cost of all
earthwork, materials, consumables, wastages, curing, transportation, labour,
supervision, tools, tackles, plant, machinery and documentation, apart from preparing
the surfaces, surface treatments and clearing waste and debris out of the site.
4.14.16.2 Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, surface treatments, if any are specified, are
Ideal Structures
Page 144 of 185
4.15 ROAD WORKS
4.15.1
4.15.2
4.15.2.1
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
4.15.2.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.15.2.3
a)
Road works shall be carried out as per lRC Specifications for Road and Bridge Works,
hereinafter referred to as IRC Specns.
Concrete pavements:
The concrete mix and other specifications shall be as for reinforced cement concrete
works.
Concrete shall be deposited on the base as near the joints as possible without touching
them. It shall then be shoveled against the sides, maintaining equal pressure and
deposited approximately 50riun higher than the depth of the joints, care being taken
that it is worked well around the joints. The concrete shall not be dumped directly
upon or against the joints.
Needle vibrator should be used all over the area for obtaining initial compaction of
concrete. These should be of diameter not less than 45mm. If the vibrators are
pneumatic, the pressure must not be below 4 kg/sq.cm. If electrically operated, they
should have a minimum frequency of 3500 impulses per minute.
A vibrating screed consisting of a steel or timber section weighing not less than 15kg
per metre with a tamping edge of not less than 70mm width and having a vibrator
mounted thereon shall follow needle vibrators to obtain full compaction. The face of
the wooden tamping edge of the screed shall be lined with MS plate rigidly fixed by
means of countersunk screws.
At the discretion of the Engineer, for compaction at edges and joints, vibrators may be
supplemented by hand tamping and rodding for securing satisfactory results. Under
no circumstances, honey combing of concrete at joints -or elsewhere shall be permitted.
The screed vibrator should not be dragged over the concrete. During the initial passes,
it shall be lifted to the adjacent forward position in short steps, and subsequently, it
shall be slowly slid over the surface with its axis slightly tilted away from the direction
of sliding and the operation repeated until a close, dense surface is obtained.
Workmen shall not be allowed to walk on freshly laid concrete and proper cat walk
shall be provided with independent supports beyond the width of the concreting bays.
Finishing of concrete:
During compaction, any low or high spots shall be made up by adding or removing
concrete. After longitudinal floating has been completed but while concrete is still
plastic, the pavement surface shall be tested for trueness with 3m straight edge.
Any depressions or high spots showing departure from the true surface shall be
immediately rectified. High spots shall be cut down and refinished. Depressions shall
be enlarged to about 80-100mm and filled up with fresh concrete, compacted and
finished.
The straight edge testing and re-floating shall continue until the entire surface is free
from observable departure from the straight edge, conforms to the required levels and
cross section and conform to the specified surface when the concrete has hardened.
These operations are to be carried out while the concrete is still plastic and workable.
Belting:
Just before concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with a two ply
canvas belt not les than 200mm wide and atleast 1m longer than the width of the
pavement. Hand belts shall have suitable handles to permit controlled uniform
manipulation. The belt shall be operated with short strokes transversed to the
centreline of the pavement and with rapid advance parallel to the centre line.
Ideal Structures
Page 145 of 185
4.15.2.4
a)
b)
Brooming:
After belting and as soon as the surplus water, if any, has risen to the surface, the
pavement shall be given a broom finish with an approved steel or fiber broom not less
than 450mm wide. The broom shall be pulled gently over the surface of the pavement
from edge to edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be
perpendicular to the centre line of the pavement and so executed that the corrugations
formed shall be uniform in character and width and not more than l.5mm deep.
Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such a stage that the surface is
likely to be tom or unduly roughened by the operation. The broomed surface shall be
free from porous or rough spots, irregularities, depressions, and small pockets such as
may be caused by accidental disturbing of particles of coarse aggregates embodied near
the surface. The brooming shall be of uniform pattern all through.
4.15.2.5 Edging:
a)
4.15.2.6
a)
b)
c)
d)
After belting / brooming has been completed, but before the initial setting of concrete,
the edge of the pavement shall be carefully finished with an edger of 6 mm radius, and
the pavement edges shall be left smooth and true to line.
Honeycombing:
The side forms shall not be removed until 12 hours or such longer period as the
Engineer may decide after the 1ating of concrete.
As soon as the side forms are removed, any minor honey combed area shall be filled
with mortar composed of one part of cement and two parts of fine aggregate.
Major honey combing areas or segregated concrete or other defective work or areas
damaged by removal of the forms or concrete damaged by rain or due to any other
reason whatsoever shall be considered as defective work and shall be removed and
replaced by the contractor at his own expense.
The total area of honey combed surface shall not exceed 4% of the area of the pavement
side. However, no individual honey comb patch shall exceed 0.1 0 sq.m. Engineer's
decision as to whether the concrete is defective or not shall be final and binding.
4.15.2.7 Surface accuracy:
a)
b)
c)
After the concrete has sufficiently hardened after about 12 hours and not later than 24
hours, the surface shall be tested again for high spots. All high spots shall be marked
and those exceeding 3 mm shall be ground down immediately. Care shall be taken to
see that the grinding does not in any way damage the concrete surface.
The final surface finish is to be such that when tested with a profilograh / roughness
indicator / or a 3m long straight edge or an equivalent mechanical unevenness
indicator placed anywhere within the same or adjoining pavement in any direction on
the surface, there shall be no variation greater than 3mm.
If the surface irregularity exceeding 3mm still remains despite grinding, the concrete
shall be removed to its full depth. The area of concrete to be removed shall be complete
pavement between the nearest joints, where the defective pavement is less than 4.5m
from the expansion joint, the whole area upto the expansion joint shall be removed to
the. full depth. The concrete so removed shall not be reused in the work. Fresh concrete
shall be laid in the manner already described in these specifications and shall again be
subject to test for surface accuracy and other quality control measures. Nothing extra
Ideal Structures
Page 146 of 185
shall be paid for the same.
Every pavement shall bear an impression not exceeding 3mm in depth comprising the
number allotted to the pavement and the date on which it is laid. This impression shall
be formed by the contractor when the concrete is green so as to leave permanent mark
on setting.
d)
4.15.2.8
Initial curing:
a)
Immediately after completion of the finishing operations, the surface of the pavement
shall be entirely covered with wetted burlap, cotton or jute mats. The mats used shall
be of such length (or width) that as laid they shall extend at least 450mm beyond the
edges of the pavement. The mats shall be placed so that the entire surface and both
edges of the pavement are completely covered.
b)
This covering shall be placed as soon as, in the judgment of the Engineer the
concrete has set sufficiently to prevent damage to the surface. Prior to being placed,
the mats shall be thoroughly saturated with water and shall be placed with the
wettest side down. The mats shall be so placed and weighed down as to cause them
to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered, and the covering shall be
maintained full wetted and in position for 24 hours after the concrete has been
placed or until the concrete is. Sufficiently hard to be walked on without suffering
damage. Water shall be gently sprayed so as to avoid damage to the fresh concrete.
If it becomes necessary to remove a mat for any reason, the concrete pavement shall
not be exposed for a period of more than half an hour.
Worn burlap or burlap with holes shall not be permitted. Burlap reclaimed from
previous use other than curing concrete shall be thoroughly washed prior to use for
curing purposes. If burlap is obtained in strips, shall be laid to overlap by a least
150mm.
Burlap shall be placed from suitable bridges. Walking on freshly laid concrete to
facilitate placing burlap shall not be permitted.
c)
d)
4.15.2.9 Final curing:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Upon the removal of the burlaps, the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted and then
cured as follows:
All joints shall be filled with filler in order to prevent the edges of joints from getting
damaged and entry of clay materials during final curing.
Exposed edges of the pavement shall be banked with a substantial berm of earth. Upon
the pavement shall then be laid a system of transverse and longitudinal dykes of clay
about 50mm high immediately covered with a blanket of sandy soil free from stones to
prevent the drying up and cracking of clay. The rest of the pavement shall then be
covered with sufficient sandy soil so as to produce a blanket of earth not less than
40mm deep after wetting. The earth covering shall be thoroughly wetted while it is
being placed on the surface and against the sides of the pavement and kept thoroughly
saturated with water for 21 days and thoroughly wetted down during the morning of
the 22nd day and shall thereafter remain in place until the concrete has attained the
required strength and permission is given by the Engineer.
Thereafter the covering shall be removed and the pavement cleaned and swept. If the
earth covering becomes displaced during the curing period, it shall be replaced to the
original depth and re-saturated.
Ideal Structures
Page 147 of 185
e)
f)
g)
h)
4.15.2.10
a)'
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Contractor shall appoint necessary watch & ward, at his expense, to prevent workmen,
cattle, etc., straying on the pavement concrete.
Concrete shall not be subjected to any load or weight of any plant until at least 28 days
after laying. 15.2.10 Construction joints:
Construction joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing and also at places where
concreting is stopped due to unforeseen circumstances. The joints shall be straight and
vertical through the full thickness of the pavement.
While concrete in adjacent bay is still green, flats of suitable size shall be drawn along
the edge and a groove of size 10 mmx25mm deep-shall be neatly formed and finished.
The edges of the groove shall be full nosed. After curing of concrete is complete, this
groove shall be thoroughly cleaned of all sand and dust and shall be perfectly dried
and filled with hot poured sealing compound conforming to Grade-B of IS: 1834. Before
filling with sealing compound, the faces of concrete of the joint shall be coated with
Shalijet primer of equivalent to a depth of25mm at the rate of2.6 litres per 10 sq.m.
Dummy joints:
The joints shall be I0mm wide and shall extend vertically from the surface of the
pavement to a depth equal to one-third of the thickness of the pavement but not less
than 40mm in any case.
The joint may be formed by depressing a high tensile MS or other approved Tee or flat
bar, of depth not less than required depth of the joint plus 25mm, into the soft but
compacted concrete. the bar used for forming the groove shall be coated with soft soap
or other suitable lubricant to facilitate Its removal.
Upon removal of the steel Tee or flat, joints shall be neatly formed with proper tools
and mortar / fine material from the pavement itself. No additional cement mortar (rich
or otherwise) shall be used.
Cutting or sawing by a saw mounted on a movable frame and driven mechanically
shall also be permitted as a method for making the joint. In this case the width may be
reduced to 6mm. Any other method for making joints can be followed with the prior
approval of the Engineer.
In all cases, except where cutting is done with saw, the joint edges shall be bull-nosed.
Care should be taken to see that the edges of the grooves are not damaged.
The grooves shall be filled with hot poured sealing compound conforming to Grade-B
of IS: 1834. Prior to filling with sealing compound, the joints shall be cleaned by
compressed air and primed with Shalijet primer or equivalent at the rate specified for
construction joints.
All joints shall be sealed as soon as practicable after 28 days of placing of pavements.
Joints shall be sealed flush with the adjacent pavement surface in summer and 3 to
4mm below finished concrete surface in winter.
The pavement shall be opened to traffic only after joint sealing over the entire
pavement. To prevent tackiness or pickup under traffic, the exposed surfaces of the
sealing compound shall be dusted with hydrated time, if directed by Engineer, for
which nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor.
In case of sudden rain or storm, the work can be conducted at the dummy joints but
these will then be formed as construction joints.
Before sealing of joints, it may be ensured that the groove extends fully across the bay
between consecutive longitudinal joints, in the case of transverse joints and is
continuous in the case of longitudinal joints. Any concrete or other foreign matter must
be removed from the groove.
Ideal Structures
Page 148 of 185
4.15.2.11
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
I)
m)
Expansion joints in concrete pavements (with non extruding filler pad):
Pre-moulded joint filler shall conform to IS:1838 (Part-I). The thickness shall be 20 mm
and shall be of the maximum available standard length.
The joint sealing compound shall be fuel and heat resistant type complying to grade B
of IS:1834. It shall be capable of adhering to the concrete without cracking, spalling and
disintegration.
Primer shall be Shalijet or Expanjet primer or equivalent. Bituminous emulsions shall
not be used as primers.
Expansion joints shall be provided as shown in the drawings and as per directions of
Engineer. All joints shall be constructed true to line with their faces perpendicular to
the surface of the pavement. The joint shall be 20mm wide. The depth of the nonextruding filler pad shall be 25mm less than the depth of the concrete pavement.
Before the provision of expansion joint, the face of the already laid concrete pavement
shall be painted with primer at the rate of 2.6 liters per10 sq.m. The expansion pad shall
be properly cut to shape and shall then be placed in position abutting the painted face
of the already laid concrete pavement. The adjacent pavement shall then be concreted.
The face of the pad against which the new concrete pavement it to be laid shall also be
painted with primer before laying the concrete.
While concreting, a neat groove 20mmx 25mm as per drawing shall be formed on top
of the pad, taking care that the edges are absolutely straight and that the groove so
made does not get filled with any material like concrete mortar or rubbish.
Before the curing process is started, the top of expansion joint shall be filled with
bitumen-sand mixture in order to ensure that no foreign material used in curing enters
into the joint. The filling shall be removed before filling the joints with sealing
compound.
For sealing, the joints shall first be cleared of any foreign matter to the full depth upto
the top of expansion paid With steel spatula. The Joints shall then be blown with
compressed air and cleaned with kerosene. Priming is to be done with spray gun @ 2.6
liter per 10 sq.m. of the surface to be primed and the primer allowed to dry completely
before pouring the sealing compound.
The sealing compound Grade-A is to be heated to the required temperature ranging
between 155°C to 165°C or to the temperature range specified by the manufacturer.
Over-heating shall be avoided. Pouring shall be done from vessel with spout in such a
manner that the material does not get spilled on the exposed surface of the concrete.
Any excess filler on the surface of the pavement shall be removed immediately and the
pavement surface cleaned.
The filling shall be worked into the joints with hot flats to ensure escape of trapped air.
The filling is then to be ironed with hot iron. It is recommended that while in summer
the joints may be sealed flush with the adjacent pavement surface, in winter the sealing
compound may be filled to a depth 3 to 4 mm below the surface.
The edges of the joints are then to be cut and trimmed to ensure neat and straight line
finish.
To prevent tackiness or pick up under traffic, the exposed surfaces of the sealing
compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime, if directed by Engineer, at no extra cost.
The measurement of the specified depth of joint shall be recorded in metres, correct to
two places of decimals. Rates for the joint items shall include the cost of all materials,
plant, machinery and labour involved in all operations described above, including all
cartages and lifts.
4.15.2.12 Painting & marking on roads & pavements:
Ideal Structures
Page 149 of 185
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Special road marking paint of approved brand and manufacture conforming to IS: 164
shall be used. Ready-mixed paint as received from the manufacturer shall be used
without adding any admixture.
During work, if the consistency of the paint gets thick and thinning becomes necessary it
shall be done with the approval of the Engineer, by use of thinner recommended by the
manufacturer.
The paint shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in original sealed
containers. The material shall be brought in one lot in adequate quantity to suffice for the
entire work. The material shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the
Engineer. The empties shall not be removed from the site of work, till the work has been
completed and permission obtained from the Engineer.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All the dirt, scales, oil and grease
shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall be
inspected and approved by thee Engineer before painting is commenced.
Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its
original container. The paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller container while
applying to the
pavement surface so that its consistency is kept uniform. .
The paint shall be applied evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off. The
crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface
hard for the first time over and then brushing, alternatively in opposite direction, two or
three time and then finally brushing lightly in al direction at right angle to the same. In
this process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of
crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.
No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles shall be left on the work.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly before the next coat is applied. The
surface shall ordinarily not be painted until it has dried up completely. Trial patches of
paint shall be laid at intervals to check if drying is satisfactory. Earlier applied coat shall
be cleaned off dust before the next coat is laid .
No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the container
shall be kept properly closed.
The marking shall be done in accordance with the drawing unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer.
After work the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint by rinsing with turpentine. A
brush in which paint has dried up is spoiled and shall on no account be reused for
painting work. On no account kerosene oil shall be used for washing the brush.
4.15.12.3 Measurement and rate for marking work:
a)
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. Area shall be worked out in square
metre, correct to two places of a decimal. Rate shall include cost of all material, tools and
labour involved in al the operations, described above including all cartages and lifts.
4.15.3
Water bound macadam:
4.15.3.1 Road metal shall be either crushed or broken stone, crushed slag or kankar / laterite, hard,
tough and durable. Flat, elongated or flaky materials shall be avoided.
a) The physical requirements shall be as per Table-400-5 of IRC Specns when tested in
accordance with IS:2386 or IS:5640.
b)
The weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 1,120 kg per cu.m. and its water
absorption shall not exceed 10 percent.
Ideal Structures
Page 150 of 185
c)
The grading of coarse aggregate shall be one of the following as detailed in Table-400-6
of IRC Specns: 90mm to 45mm; 63mm to 45mm; 50mm to 22.4mm
4.15.3.2 Screenings:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Screenings needed to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally be of the same
material as the coarse aggregates.
Where drawings / the BOQ specify a non-plastic material like moorum, the liquid limit
and plasticity index (PI) of such material shall be below 20 and 6 respectively and the
fraction passing a 75 micron sieve shall not exceed 10 percent.
Generally screenings of size 13 .2mm Table 400-7 of IRC Specns shall be used with the
first coarse aggregate grade and those of 11.2mm with the last grade mentioned. For
the intermediate grade either type of screenings is suitable.
Approximate quantities are indicated in Table 400-8 of IRC Specns.
4.15.3.3 Binding materials:
a)
To prevent ravelling of water bound macadam the binding material shall be fine
grained material having Plasticity Index value of 6 as determined in accordance with
IS: 2720.
4.15.3.4 Stack measurements:
a)
4.15.3.5
Measurements of materials like stones, aggregates, screenings, sand, etc. shall be taken
in bottomless boxes or measuring boxes or in closely packed stacks on level ground.
While no special compaction is necessary by ramming, shaking or hammering, no
attempt at loose stacking will be permitted.
Materials and labour:
a)
Measurements for finished work for which 'Materials and Labour' rates are to be paid,
shall be taken in two stages, viz. measurements of road aggregates, etc. in stacks as
above, and measurements of the completed work. The former is necessary to ensure
that the required quantities of road aggregates have actually been collected and are of
the sizes, etc. indicated.
b)
Stack measurements shall not, however, absolve the Contractor from the responsibility
of conforming to the required specifications and dimensions, etc. and provision of
more materials, if necessary, to make up the required thickness, etc. without any extra
charge.
4.15.3.6 Quantities of materials for WBM:
Class
ificat
ion
a) Approximate quantities of coarse aggregates and screening required for 10sq.m. of 100mm
compacted thickness of WBM sub-base and 75mm compacted thickness of WBM base
course as per IRC Specns and are given in the following Table:
Ideal Structures
Coarse Aggregates
Screenings
Crushable type, Such
Stone Screenings
as Moorum or Gravel
Grading/
Classification and
size
100
mm
1.21 To
1.43 Cu.m
Type A
13.2 mm
GRADING
2
63 mm to
45 mm
0.91 To
1.07 Cu.m
- Do -
- Do -
Type A
13.2 mm
Type B
11.2 mm
GRADING
3
53 mm to
22.4 mm
75
mm
- Do
75
mm
0.12 to 0.15
Cu.m
0.22 to 0.22
Cu.m
0.18 to 0.21
Cu.m
b)
- Do - Do -
- Do -
Loose Quantity
Loose Quantity
99 mm to
45 mm
Grading
classification &
Size
Compacted
Thickness
GRADING
1
For WBM
Subbade. Base
Course (Loose
Quantity)
Size Range
Page 151 of 185
0.27 to 0.3
Cu.m
Not
Uniform
0.30 To
0.32 Cu.m
- Do -
0.22 To
0.24 Cu.m
- Do -
- Do -
- Do -
- Do -
The quantity of binding material where it is to be used shall depend on the type of
screenings and function of WBM. Generally, the quantity required for 75mm compacted
thickness shall be 0.06-0.09 cu.m. per 10 sq.m. for sub base / base course of WBM. For
100mm thickness the quantity required shall be 0.08 to 0.10 cu.m. per 10 sq.m.
4.15.3.7 Kerbs / edgings:
a)
The kerbs / edgings shall be of PCC precast blocks with cement concrete 1:3 :6 (l cement,
3 coarse sand, 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The size shall be as
indicated in the drawings.
The kerbs / edgings shall be laid to proper alignment and level with sufficient
anchorage as indicated in the drawings and jointed with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement, 2
coarse sand).
b)
4.15.3.8 Macadaming:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly upon the compacted soling in required
quantities. Proper profile shall be maintained by using templates placed across the road
about 6 metres apart.
The aggregates shall normally not be spread in lengths exceeding three days average
work ahead of the rolling and bonding of the preceding section.
After laying, the road metal shall be compacted to full width by rolling with a 8 to 10
tonnes power roller.
The WBM course shall be constructed in layers of not more than 75mm compacted
thickness for Grading 2 & 3 and 100mm for grading 1 as specified in Clause-404.2.5 of
IRC Specns.
The rolling shall begin from edges with roller running forward and backward until the
edges have been compacted. The roller shall then progress gradually from the edges
towards the centre parallel to the centre-line of the road, uniformly lapping each
preceding rear wheel track by one half width. Rolling shall be discontinued when the
aggregates are partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to permit
application of screening.
Ideal Structures
Page 152 of 185
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Sl.No
1.
2.
On super-elevated portion of the road, rolling shall commence from the lower edge
and progress gradually towards the upper edge of the pavement. Rolling shall not be
done when the subgrade is soft or yielding nor when it causes a wave-like motion in
the base course or subgrade. If irregularities develop during rolling which exceed
12mm when tested with a 3 metre straight edge, the surface shall be loosened and
aggregates added or removed as required before rolling again. In no case shall the use
of screening to make up depressions be permitted.
After coarse aggregate have been rolled, screenings to fill the interstices shall be
applied gradually over the surface. Dry rolling shall be done when the screenings are
being spread so that the jarring effect of roller causes them to settle into the voids of the
coarse aggregates. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but applied uniformly
in successive thin layers by the spreading motion of hand shovels. Trucks plying over
the base course to spread screenings shall be equipped with pneumatic tyres and so
operated as not to disturb the coarse aggregates.
After application of screenings, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water,
swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into the
voids, and to distribute them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations
shall be continued and additional screenings applied where necessary until the coarse
aggregates are well-bonded and firmly set and a grout of screenings and water form
ahead of the wheels of the roller. Care shall be taken that the base or sub-grade does
not get damaged due to addition of excessive quantities of water during the
construction.
After the application of screenings, binding materials where specified shall be applied
at a uniform and slow rate in two or more successive thin layers. After each application
of binding materials, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water and the
resulting slurry swept in with hand brooms / mechanical brooms or both so as to fill
the voids properly. This shall be followed by rolling with 8 to 10 tonnes roller during
which water shall be applied to the wheels to wash down the binding material that
may get stuck to them. The spreading of binding material, sprinkling of water,
sweeping with brooms and rolling shall continue until the slurry of binding material
and water forms a wave ahead of the wheels of moving roller.
Setting and drying: After final compaction of the course, the road shall be allowed to
cure overnight. Next morning, hungry spots shall be filled with screenings or binding
materials lightly sprinkled with water if necessary, and rolled. No traffic shall be
allowed till the macadam sets.
In the case of water bound macadam base course to be provided with bituminous
surfacing, the latter shall be laid only after the WBM course is completely dry and
before allowing any traffic on it.
Surface evenness: The permitted tolerances are as below:
90 - 45mm
63 -45mm
or 50 - 22.4mm
Ideal Structures
15mm
Maximum permissible variation
from specified profile when
measured
with
a
camber
template.
12mm
12mm
8mm
Size
range
of Maximum
permissible
coarse aggregates
undulations when measured
with a 3m straight edge.
Page 153 of 185
m)
4.15.4
4.15.4.1
a)
b)
c)
Measurement for payment: The volume of the stone aggregate stacks (calculated as per
the actual measurement) shall be reduced by 7.5 percent for looseness in stacking to
arrive at the net quantity for payment. The volume of the binding material stacks
(calculated as per the actual measurement) shall be without any reduction for looseness
in stacking to arrive at the net quantity for payment.
Premix carpet:
Materials:
Coarse aggregates shall be broken stone of best quality granite or trap obtained from
approved quarries and shall be clean, dry, hard and free from dust and any other
foreign material. The stone shall be of angular shape with rough surface and free from
flaky and laminated pieces. The sand shall be clean, dry and coarse grained.
Bitumen for surfacing and priming shall conform to either 18:217 or IS:73 and as
approved by the Engineer. Bitumen shall be obtained from approved manufacturer in
sealed drums.
The materials required per 10 sq.m., shall be as per Table 500-17 of IRC Specns and as
indicated in the Bill of Quantities.
4.15.4.2
a)
Preparation of base:
Before the carpet is applied to the existing base, the road shall be free from dust or
caked mud. Where the existing base is potholed or rutted, these irregularities shall be
corrected with premixed chippings coated, laid after applying a tack coat of binder and
well rammed thereafter. The surface shall be cleaned by removing caked earth and
other foreign matter with wire brushes, following by sweeping with brooms and finally
dusting with sacks.
4.15.4.3
a)
Priming tack coat:
The binder shall be heated to the temperature as recommended by the manufacturer
and then applied uniformly to the base by means of a sprayer.
4.15.4.4
Preparation of premix:
a)
b)
c)
Mechanical mixers shall be employed. For small quantities of work, improvised hand
mixing drums may be used as directed by the Engineer.
The binder shall be heated to the temperature as recommended by the manufacturer
and mixed until the chippings are thoroughly coated with the binder.
The premix shall then be emptied on to stretchers or wheel barrows and carried to the
site.
4.15.4.5
a)
Spreading of premix:
Immediately after applying the tack coat I priming coat, the premix shall be spread
with rakes to the desired thickness and to the correct camber, or distributed evenly by
means of a drag spreader. The surface shall then be checked for camber by means of a
camber board and any inequalities found, shall be corrected.
4.15.4.6
a)
Rolling:
As soon as sufficient length, say 15 metres of the premix, has been laid, the surface
shall be rolled with 8 to 10 tonnes power roller. Rolling shall commence at the edge and
progress towards the centre (except in case of super-elevated curves, where the rolling
shall progress from the inside towards the outside of course), longitudinally.
Ideal Structures
Page 154 of 185
b)
4.15.4.7
a)
b)
I
4.15.5
When the roller has passed once over the area, any high spot or depression which
becomes apparent shall be corrected by removing or adding premix. When this has
been done, the surface shall be rolled to compaction. The roller wheels are moistened in
the process to prevent from adhering to wheel and being picked up.
Seal coat:
Premix sand seal coat wherever indicated shall be applied immediately after laying the
carpet. The binder shall be heated in boilers of suitable design, to the temperature
appropriate to the grade of bitumen. The aggregates shall be dry and suitably heated to
a temperature directed by Engineer before the same are placed in the mixer of suitable
design. Mixing of binder with aggregates to the specified proportions shall be
continued till the latter are thoroughly coated with binder. The mix shall be
immediately transported from the mixing plant to the point of use and spread
uniformly on the bituminous surface to be sealed. As soon as sufficient length has been
covered with premix material, the surface shall be rolled with 8 to 10 tennes power
roller. Rolling shall be continued till the premix material completely seals the voids in
the bituminous course, yielding a smooth uniform surface.
Where only spreading of sand is indicated in the BOQ, the required quantity of and
shall be spread and r rolled till the voids are sealed and uniform surface is obtained.
Drainage pipes:
4.15.5.1
Pipes meant for surface drainage and utility crossings shall be NP2 class (non-pressure)
reinforced concrete pipes confom1ing to 18:458, unless otherwise stated.
4.15.5.2
a)
Laying:
Reasonable care shall be exercised in loading, transporting and unloading of concrete
pipes. Handling shall be such as to avoid impact. Gradual unloading by inclined plane
or by chain blocks is recommended.
All pipe sections and connections shall be inspected carefully before being laid. Broken
or defective pipes or connections shall not be used.
Pipes shall be lowered into trenches carefully. Mechanical appliances may be used.
Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade as specified.
Laying of pipes shall always proceed upgrade of a slope. If the pipes have spigot and
socket joints the socket ends shall face upstream.
In the case of pipes, with joints to be made with loose collars, the collars shall be
slipped on before the next pipe is laid. Adequate and proper expansion joints shall be
provided, wherever necessary.
In cases Where the alignment of pipes are in the proximity of trees or poles, under
existing or proposed tracks, near manholes, etc., the pipe shall be encased in low
strength concrete.
In places where the natural foundation is inadequate, the pipes shall be laid either in a
concrete cradle supported on proper foundations or any other suitably designed
structure.
If the concrete cradle bedding is used, the depth of concrete below the bottom of the
pipe shall be atleast one-fourth of the internal diameter of the pipe subject to a
minimum of 100mm and a maximum of 300mm. The concrete shall extend up the sides
of the pipe atleast to a distance of one-fourth of the outside diameter for pipes 300mm
and over in diameter. The pipe shall be laid in this concrete bedding before the concrete
has set.
When the pipe is laid in a trench in rock, hard clay, shall or other hard material, the
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Ideal Structures
Page 155 of 185
k)
1)
m)
n)
0)
p)
q)
r)
4.15.6
a)
b)
c)
4.15.7
a)
b)
c)
space below the pipe shall be excavated and replaced with an equalising bed of
concrete, sand or compacted earth. In no place shall the pipe be laid directly on such
hard material.
Trenches shall be kept free from water until the material in the joint has hardened.
When the pipe is closed and the trench liable to be flooded by rain, care shall be taken
to prevent the pipe from floating.
Walking or working on the completed pipe shall not be permitted until the trench has
been backfilled to a height of atleast 300mm over the pipe, except as may be necessary
in tamping and backfilling.
The tamping around the pipe shall be done by hand or other hand operated mechanical
means. The water content of the soil shall be as near the optimum moisture content as
possible.
Filling of the trench shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the pipe in such
a manner that unequal pressure does not occur.
In case of embankment of low or medium heights, the following considerations shall
apply.
In the case of pipes 600mm or less in diameter, the embankment shall be constructed to
an elevation 150mm above the level proposed for the top of the pipe after which the
trench shall be excavated and the pipe installed.
In the case of very high embankments, the embankment shall be built to an elevation
above the top of the pipe equal to the external diameter of the pipe, after which a
trench shall be excavated and the pipe laid. When the backfill material is placed above
the pipe, the vertical surfaces of the trench above the top of pipe shall not be more than
200mm beyond the outside diameter of the pipe. After the pipe has been laid, suitable
backfill material shall be placed around the pipe and carefully compacted in layers, not
more than 150mm, after compaction upto the top of the pipe. Therefore, a loose fill of
depth equal to external diameter of pipe shall be placed before further layers are added
and compacted.
Boulder pitching:
The stone boulders for the pitching shall be granite, trap, basalt or similar hard stone.
Pitching stones shall generally be 225mm thick unless otherwise mentioned in the
drawing.
Sand used shall be approved fiver or pit sand conforming to IS: 1542.
The proportion of cement mortar for grouting the joints and plastering or flush
pointing the top surface shall be as per the BOQ and or as indicated in the drawing.
Fencing:
RCC posts and struts shall be as shown in the drawings, precast to correct dimensions
and details.
The spacing of posts shall be three metres centre to centre unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer to suit the dimensions of the area to be fenced. Every tenth post, last but
one end post and comer post shall be strutted on both sides and end post on one side
only.
Pits of sizes as shown in drawings for the posts and struts shall first be excavated, true
to line and level to receive the posts. The pits shall be filled with PCC of specified mix
to the thickness indicated in the drawings. The posts and struts shall then be placed in
the pits. The posts projecting above ground shall be true to line and position. Where
the drawings indicate that the PCC top is below the finished level, the remaining
portions of pits shall be tilled up with excavated earth and the surplus earth disposed
off as directed by the Engineer and the site cleaned.
Ideal Structures
Page 156 of 185
d)
The barbed wire for fencing shall be galvanised steel barbed fencing wire of 2-ply 12G
with 4-point thick set barbs at 75mm centres (weighing atleast 9.38 kg/100m) and
conforming to IS:278. The barbed I wire shall be stretched and fixed in the number of
rows as shown in the drawings. The diagonals wherever indicated shall be stretched
between adjacent posts from top wire of one post to the bottom wire of the second post.
The barbed wire shall be fixed to the RC posts by means of GS binding wire tied to
6mm galvanised nibs fixed while casting the posts. Turn buckles and training bolts
shall be used at the end posts. The work shall be done as per IS:4996.
The chainlink shall be of gaivanised steel 10 gauge conforming to IS:2721. The chainlink
shall be stretched and fixed to the RC posts by means of two rows of GS binding wire
at top and bottom, tied to 6mm galvanised MS nibs fixed while casting the posts.
e)
4.15.8
Coverage of rates:
4.15.8.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for road works
are deemed to include the cost of all earthwork, materials, consumables, wastages,
documentation, apart from preparing the surfaces and clearing waste and debris out of
the site.
Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, surface treatments, if any are specified,
4.15.8.2
4.16 ANTI – TERMITE TREATMENT
4.16.1 Materials:
a) The materials to be used for pre-construction anti-termite soil treatment shall generally
conform to IS:6313 (Part II), unless specified otherwise.
b) The materials to be used for post-construction anti-termite soil treatment shall generally
conform to IS:6313 (Part III), unless specified otherwise.
c) Any of the following chemicals, conforming to the relevant BIS Specifications, and as
permitted by law applicable at the time of work, shall be applied uniformly in water
emulsion at the prescribed rate in all stages of treatment:
Chemical
a)
Chlorpyrifos emulsifiable concentrate
Relevant
Indian
Standard
IS: 8944
Concentration by weight: Percent
For mound
For soil
treatment
treatment
0.50
1.00
4.16.3 Safe handling:
a. Detailed precautions for the safe handling of these chemicals shall be taken as described
herein.
4.16.4 Pre-constructional anti-termite treatment:
Ideal Structures
Page 157 of 185
4.16.4.6 Site preparation:
a) The removal of trees, stumps, logs or roots from a building site reduces the hazards from
subterranean termites. Similarly, the sub floor area should be kept free from all debris in
which new colonies of termites might be established. In order to ensure uniform
distribution of the treating solution and to assist penetration, some site preparation may
be necessary. The information given below is for guidance in preparing the site for
chemical treatment.
i) On clays and other heavy soils where penetration is likely to be slow and on sloping
sites where run off of the treating solution is likely to occur, the surface of the soil
should be scarified to a depth of atleast 75mm.
ii) On loose, sandy or porous soils where loss of treating solution through piping or
excessive percolation is likely to occur, preliminary moistening to fill the capillary
spaces in the soil is recommended.
iii)
All sub floor filling, leveling and grading should be completed; all cutting,
trenches and excavations should be completed with backfilling in place; borrowed fill
must be free from organic debris and shall be well compacted. If this is not done,
supplementary treatments should be made to complete the barrier.
iv)
All concrete formwork, leveling pegs, timber off-cuts and other builder's
debris should be removed from the area to be treated.
4.16.4.7 Soil treatment:
a) Anyone of the chemical emulsions described hereinabove shall be applied uniformly at
the prescribed rate in all the stages of the treatment. A suitable hand-operated
compressed air sprayer or watering should be used to facilitate uniform dispersal of the
chemical emulsion. On large jobs, a power sprayer may be used to save labour and time.
4.16.4.8 Mound treatment:
a) If termite mounds are found within the plinth area of the buildings, these shall be
destroyed by pouring chemicals into the mounds at several places, after breaking open
the earthen structure, and making holes With crow-bars, at the rate of 4 litres of chemical
emulsion per cubic metre of mound.
4.16.4.9 Conditions of formation:
a) Barrier shall be complete and continuous under the whole of the building / structure to
be protected.
b) All foundations shall be fully surrounded by and in close contact with the barrier of
treated soil. Each part of the area treated shall receive the prescribed dosage of chemical.
4.16.4.10
Time of application:
a) Soil, treatment should start when foundation trenches and pits are ready to take mass
Ideal Structures
Page 158 of 185
concrete in foundations. Laying of mass concrete should start when the chemical
emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite dry. Treatment should
not be carried out when it is raining or when the soil is wet with rain or sub soil water.
This applies also in the case of treatment to the filled earth surface within the plinth area
before laying the sub-grade for the floor.
4.16.4.11
Disturbances:
a) Once formed, treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed. If, by chance, treated soil
barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and
completeness of the barrier system.
4.16.4.12
Treatment for masonry foundations and basements:
a) The bottom surface and the sides (upto a height of about 300mm) of the excavations
made for masonry foundations and basements shall be treated with the chemical at the
rate of 5 litres per square metre surface area.
b) After the masonry foundation and the retaining wall of the basements come up, the
backfill in immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate
of7.5 litres per square metre of the vertical surface of the sub-structure for each side. If
water is used for ramming the earth fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out after
the ramming operation is done by rodding the earth at l50mm centres, close to the wall
surface and spraying the chemical emulsion at the above dosage. After the treatment, the
soil should be tamped in place. The earth is usually returned in layers and the treatment
shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemical emulsion shall be directed towards
the masonry surfaces so that the earth in contact with these surfaces is well treated with
the chemical.
4.16.4.13
a)
Treatment for RCC foundation and basements:
The treatment shall stal1 at a depth of 500mm below the ground level except when such
ground level is raised or lowered by filling or cutting after the foundations have been
cast. In such cases, the depth of 500mm shall be determined from the new soil level
resulting from the filling or cutting mentioned above, and soil in immediate contact with
the vertical faces of RCC foundations shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 litres per square
metre. The other details shall be as specified above for masonry foundation structures.
4.16.4.14
Treatment of top surface of plinth filling:
a) The top surface of the consolidated earth. within plinth walls shall be treated with
chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 litres per square metre of the surface before the sand
bed or sub-grade is laid. If the filled earth has been well rammed and the surface does
not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes upto 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centres
both ways may be made with 12mm diameter mild steel rod on the surface to facilitate
saturation of the soil with the chemical emulsion.
4.16.4.15
Treatment at junction of the wall and the floor:
a) Special care shall be taken to establish continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on inner
Ideal Structures
Page 159 of 185
wall surfaces from ground level upto the level of the filled earth surface. To achieve this,
a small channel 30 x 30mm shall be made at all the junction of wall and columns with the
floor (before laying the sub-grade) and rod holes made in the channel upto the ground
level 150mm apart and the iron rod moved backward and forward to break up the earth
and chemical emulsion poured along the channel at the rate of 7.5 litres per square metre
of the vertical wall or column surface so as to soak the soil right to the bottom. The soil
should be tamped back into place after this operation.
4.16.4.16
Treatment of soil along external perimeter of building:
a) After the building is complete, the earth along the external perimeter of the building
should be rodded at intervals of 150mm and to a depth of 300mm. The rods should be
moved backward and forward parallel to the wall to break up the earth and chemical
emulsion poured along the wall at the rate of7.5 litres per square metre of vertical
surfaces. After the treatment, the earth should be tamped back into place. Should the
earth outside the building be graded on completion of building, this treatment should be
carried out on completion of such grading.
b) In the event of filling being more than 300mm, the external perimeter treatment shall
extend to the full depth of filling upto the ground level so as to ensure continuity of the
chemical barrier.
4.16.4.17
Treatment of soil under apron along external perimeter of building:
a) Top surface of the consolidated earth over which the apron is to be laid shall be treated
with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 litres per square metre of the vertical surface
before the apron is laid. If consolidated earth does not allow all emulsion to seep
through, holes upto 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centres both ways may be made with
12mm diameter mild steel rod on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with the
chemical emulsion.
4.16.4.18
Treatment for walls retaining soil above floor level:
a) Retaining walls like the basement walls or outer walls above the floor level retaining soil
need to be protected by providing chemical barrier by treatment of retained soil in the
immediate vicinity of the wall, so as to prevent entry of termites through the voids in
masonry, cracks and crevices, etc., above the floor level. The soil retained by the walls
shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 Iitres per square metre of the vertical surface so as to
effect a continuous outer chemical barrier, in continuation of the one formed under
19.2.7.
4.16.4.19
Treatment of soil surrounding pipes, wastes and conduits:
a) When pipes, wastes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundations, soil
surrounding the point of entry shall be loosened around each, of such pipe, waste or
conduit for a distance of 150mm and to a depth of 75mm before treatment is commenced.
When they enter the soil external to the foundations, they shall be similarly treated for a
distance of over 300mm unless they stand clear of the walls of the building by about
75mm.
Ideal Structures
Page 160 of 185
4.16.4.20
Treatment for expansion joints
a) Expansion joints at ground floor level are one of the biggest hazards for termite
infestation. The soil beneath these joints should receive Special attention when the
treatment under 19.2.9 is carried out. This treatment should be supplemented by treating
through the expansion joint after the sub grade has been laidt at the rate of 2 litres per
linear metre.
4.16.4.21
Precautions for health hazards and safety measures:
Safety precautions as outlined under Appendix-B of 18:6313 (Part II) shall be adopted.
a) All the chemicals indicated herein are poisonous and hazardous to health. These
chemicals have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the skin, inhaled
as vapours or spray mists or swallowed. Persons handling or using these chemicals
should be warned of these dangers and advised that absorption through the skin is the
most likely sources of accidental poisoning. They should be cautioned to observe
carefully the safety precautions given in 19.3.3 to 19.3.6 particularly when handling these
chemicals in the form of concentrates
b) These chemicals are to be brought to the site in the form of emulsifiable concentrates. The
containers should be clearly labeled and should be stored carefully so that children and
pets cannot get at them. They should be kept securely closed.
c) Particular care should be taken to prevent skin contact with concentrates. Prolonged
exposure to dilute emulsions should also be avoided. Workers should wear clear clothing
and should wash thoroughly with soap and water especially before eating and smoking.
In the event of severe contamination, clothing should be removed at once and the skin
washed with soap and water. If chemicals splash into the eyes they shall be flushed with
plenty of soap and water and immediate medical attention should be sought.
d) Flames should not be allowed during mixing, since the concentrates are oil solutions and
present a fire hazard owing to the use of petroleum solvents.
e) Care should be taken in the application of soil toxicants to see that they are not allowed
to contaminate wells or springs which serve as sources of drinking water.
f) In case of poisoning, suitable measures shall be taken for protection in accordance with
IS:4015 (Part I): Guide for handling cases of pesticide poisoning- First-aid measures, and
IS:40 15 (Part II): Guide for handling cases of pesticide poisoning: Symptoms, diagnosis
and treatment.
4.16.5 Coverage of rates:
Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for anti-termite
treatment works are deemed to include the cost of all attendant earthwork, drilling,
materials, consumables, wastages, transportation, labour, supervision, tools, tackles, plant,
machinery and documentation, apart from preparing the surfaces, and clearing waste and
debris out of the site.
Ideal Structures
Page 161 of 185
4.17
4.17.1
General
a)
4.12.2
CONDUITING
This specification covers the requirements of supply and installation of concealed
conduits, pipe sleeves, junction boxes, fan hook boxes and allied accessories for the
electrical and related installations.
Materials and items:
a) All materials and manufactured items for. conducting shall be of approved make and as
indicated in the BOQ and / or drawings, conforming to the relevant BIS specifications.
Samples shall be got approved in advance of procurement and installation.
b) PVC conduits and fittings shall be of heavy class conforming to IS: 9537-Part III. PVC
bends, couplers and draw boxes, to be provided at suitable locations, shall correspond to
the conduit sizes.
c) Junction boxes for luminaires shall be made of cast iron (CI). The junction boxes to be
installed in slabs shall be of 65mm dia and 65mm deep and that on wall shall be of 65mm
dia and 25mm deep. They shall have two or four knockouts with extensions for conduit
entry. The knockouts shall be suitable for the particular diameter of the conduits. The
junction box shall be suitably treated to avoid corrosion. Where sheet steel junction boxes
are specified, they shall of l6G CRCA sheet steel, galvanised after
fabrication.
.
d) Fan hook boxes shall be made of 16G CRCA sheet steel with 10 / l2mm dia MS hook cum
lug and 25mm dia x 25mm long conduit extension closed at one end, suitable for
insertion of bolts, with 4 numbers of knockouts for conduit entry. The fan hook boxes to
be provided in RCC members shall be 95mm dia and 60mm deep. Where specified, these
shall be galvanised after fabrication. The fan hook boxes shall be painted with two coats
of red oxide primer, whether galvanised or not.
e) Switch boxes shall be made of l6G CRCA sheet steel with front / corner lips with screw
holes. Where specified, these shall be galvanised after fabrication. The switchboxes shall
be painted with two coats of red oxide primer, whether galvanised or not.
f) Galvanised steel / GI pipes shall of medium class, unless otherwise indicated.
g) Any material or work not specifically mentioned in this specification but considered
essential shall be included by the tenderer in this offer.
4.17.3 Drawings:
a) All items and their placement and location in the work shall be as indicated in the
drawings, true to line, level and alignment.
b) Where required, the Contractor shall prepare drawings indicating the conduit layout,
based on the drawings available for location of electrical and other points, in which case
the work shall be carried out based on the Engineer's approval to the same.
Ideal Structures
Page 162 of 185
4.17.4 Installation:
a) PVC conduiting shall comprise the conduits and necessary bends and couplers for
vertical dropping and for joining together conduits respectively.
b) Draw boxes shall be provided for every 10m length of conduiting meant for wiring, in
stretches involving more than two bends and where the alignment passes through ceiling
slabs which are at different levels as well as at points where specifically called for as per
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Elbows shall not be used.
c) PVC items shall be jointed together using approved adhesive only.
d) GI fish wires shall be provided in the conduits.
e) All openings shall be sealed to prevent entry of concrete or creatures.
f)
Conduits, draw boxes, junction boxes, fan hook boxes, etc., which would be concealed,
shall be secured in position by tying to the reinforcement bars using binding wire or
appropriate check nails in case of masonry.
g) Conduits to be concealed in masonry shall be set into necessary chases, secured in
position and the chase patched up using cement mortar. The dimensions of the chases
shall be appropriate for the sizes of the concealed items and as approved.
h) The conduits, accessories, junction boxes and fan hook boxes fixed in position shall be
inspected thoroughly during concreting and concealing, for any displacements, damages,
etc. Sufficient stock of materials and workmen shall be deployed to immediately attend
to any rectifications. A thorough check for any damages or chokages shall also be carried
out after concealment. All such measures and rectifications shall be at the Contractor's
own cost.
i)
Conduits and sleeves meant for passage of cables, etc. shall be fixed on / through
masonry / RCC members or laid in excavated / pre-formed trenches, all as approved by
the Engineer. Curves in the alignment of metallic conduits shall be achieved by bending
to profile using non-heat methods only, without the use of elbows. .
j)
Switchboxes shall be fixed in position using cement mortar. Cement concrete with
small size aggregates shall be used where the gap exceeds 20mm. The front lips shall be
flush with the face of wall plaster. Front covers for switchboxes are normally outside the
scope of civil engineering works. These shall however be provided, where specifically
called for in the BOQ.
4.17.5 Coverage of rates:
a) Unless otherwise indicated in the BOQ, the rates for the various Items for conduiting
works are deemed to include the cost of all earthwork, materials, consumables, wastages,
b) Only where specifically indicated in the BOQ, masonry chambers, if any are specified,
Ideal Structures
Page 163 of 185
Section 5 BOQs
Ideal Structures
Page 164 of 185
5. BILL OF QUANTITIES ( FINANCIAL BID )
SI
No
Description
Unit Quantity
SECTION - I
STRUCTURAL WORKS
1.00 EARTH WORK
1.1 Earth work in surface excavation not
exceeding 30 cm in depth but exceeding 1.5
m in width as well as 10 sqm on plan
including disposal of excavated earth upto
500m and lift upto 1.5 m, disposed soil to be
levelled and neatly dressed
All kinds of soil
M2
100
Earth work in excavation by mechanical
means (Hydraulic excavator) / manual
means over areas (exceeding 30cm in depth.
1.5 m in width as well as 10 sqm on plan)
including disposal of excavated earth, lead
upto 500m and lift upto 1.5m, disposed earth
to be levelled and neatly dressed
All kinds of soil
M3
875
Ordinary Rock
M3
875
Hard Rock Excavation for Retrofitting work
M3
875
1.30 BACK FILLING:
Filling available excavated earth (excluding
rock) in trenches, plinth, sides of
foundations etc. in layers not exceeding
20cm in depth, consolidating each deposited
layer by ramming and watering, lead up to
500m and lift upto 1.5m
Back Filling
M3
910
M3
390
EARTH WORK EXCAVATION
1.2
1.4
- do - Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m
or part thereof in excavation / banking
excavated or stacked materials
All kinds of soil Back Filling above 1.5m
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 165 of 185
SI
No
1.5
1.6
1.7
Description
Supplying and filling in plinth with Jamuna
sand under floors, including watering,
ramming, consolidating and dressing
complete.
Surface dressing of the ground including
removing vegetation and inequalities not
exceeding 15 cm deep and disposal of
rubbish, lead upto 500 m and lift upto 1.5m
All kinds of soil
Unit Quantity
M3
15
M2
900
M3
1
M3
180
M2
1030
Applying a coat of residual petroleum
bitumen of grade of VG-10 of approved
quality using 1.7 kg per square metre on
damp proof course after cleaning the surface
with brushes and finally with a piece of cloth
lightly soaked in kerosene oil
M2
1
Extra for providing and fixing water
proofing material 'Impermo' or equivalent in
cement concrete work / plastering @ 1 Kg.
per 50kg of cement
50kg
1
Carriage of material by mechanical transport
including loading unloading and stacking
(upto 10km)
2.00 PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC)
2.10 PCC FOR FOOTING
Providing and laying in position cement
concrete of specified grade excluding the
cost of centering and shuttering - All work
up to plinth level
1:4:8 (1 Cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded
stone aggreg te 40 mm nominal size)
2.20 DAMP-PROOFING COURSE
Providing and laying damp-proof course 50
mm thick with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size)
2.3
2.4
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 166 of 185
SI
Description
No
3.00 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
3.10 READY MIX CONCRETE
Providing and laying in position machine
batched and machine mixed design mix M25 grade cement concrete for reinforced
cement concrete work, using cement content
as per approved design mix, including
pumping of concrete to site of laying but
excluding the cost of centering, shuttering,
finishing and reinforcement, including
admixtures in recommended proportions as
per IS: 9103 to accelerate, retard setting of
concrete, improve workability without
impairing strength and durability as per
direction of Engineer-in-charge
All works upto plinth level
Unit Quantity
M3
1225
M3
1890
Upto plinth level
KG
65000
Above plinth level
KG
245000
M2
1
M2
2100
M2
7150
All works above plinth level upto floor V
level
3.20 REINFORCEMENT STEEL (REBARS)
3.30 Steel reinforcement for R.C.C. work
including straightening, cutting, bending,
placing in position and binding all complete
Thermo-Mechanically Treated bars
3.40 Smooth finishing of the exposed surface of
R.C.C. work with 6 mm thick cement mortar
1:3 (1 Cement : 3 fine sand)
4.00 FORM WORK (SHUTTERING WORK)
4.10 Centering and shuttering including
strutting, propping etc. and removal of form
for
a
Foundations, footings, bases of columns, etc.
for mass concrete
b
Lintels, beams, plinth beams, girders, etc
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 167 of 185
SI
No
c
Description
Unit Quantity
Columns, Pillars, Piers, Abutments, Posts
and Struts
M2
5100
Suspended floors, roofs, landings, balconies
and access platform
M2
765
5.00 BRICK MASONRY WORK
5.10 Brick work with clay flyash F.P.S. (non
modular) brick of class designation 7.5 in
superstructure above plinth level up to floor
five level in
Cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand)
M3
101
5.20 Random rubble masonry with hard stone in
foundation and plinth including
levelling up with cement concrete 1:6:12 (1
cement : 6 coarse sand : 12
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size)
upto plinth level with :
M3
25
5.30 Random rubble masonry with hard stone in
superstructure above plinth
level and upto floor five level, including
leveling up with cement concrete
1:6:12 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand : 12 graded
stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) at window sills, ceiling level
and the like.
M3
45
M2
350
d
SECTION -II
6.00 FINISHING WORK
PLASTERING WORK
6.10 INTERNAL PLASTERING WORK
CEMENT PLASTER (IN FINE SAND) 12
mm cement plaster of mix
1:6 (1 cement: 6 fine sand)
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 168 of 185
SI
No
Description
CEMENT PLASTER (IN FINE SAND) 12
1:4 (1 cement: 4 fine sand)
6.30 ROUGH PLASTERING FOR DADOING
AND CLADDING WORK
CEMENT PLASTER (IN COARSE SAND) 12
1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand)
Unit Quantity
M2
8
M2
264
M2
17000
RM
1000
M2
12,800.00
6.40 EXTERNAL PLASTERING WORK
Providing Plastering for external plaster are
for height upto 10m from ground level
unless otherwise stated
CEMENT PLASTER (IN FINE SAND)
12 mm cement plaster of mix
6.50 ELEVATION GROOVE WORK
Forming groove of uniform size in the top
layer of washed stone grit plaster as per
approved pattern using wooden battens,
nailed to the under layer, including removal
of wooden battens, repair to the edges of
panels and finishing the groove complete as
per specifications and direction of the
Engineer-in charge
6.60 PAINTING WORK
CEMENT PRIMER FINISH FOR
INTERNAL WALL
Applying one coat of water thinnable
cement primer of approved brand and
manufacture on wall surface
Water thinnable cement primer
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 169 of 185
SI
Description
No
6.70 PUTTY FINISH FOR INTERNAL WALL
Providing and applying plaster of paris
putty of 2 mm thickness over plastered
surface to prepare the surface even and
smooth complete
Unit Quantity
M2
350
M2
350
6.90 WHITE WASH FINISH FOR INTERNAL
CEILING - NEW WORK
White washing with lime to give an even
shade
New work (three or more coats)
M2
8
6.10 CEMENT PRIMER FINISH FOR
EXTERNAL WALL - OLD WORK
M2
17500
M2
17000
M2
12,800.00
M2
12800
6.80
DISTEMPER FINISH FOR INTERNAL
WALL
Distempering with dry distemper of
approved brand and manufacture (one or
more coats) and of required shade on old
work to give an even shade
6.11 CEMENT PAINT FINISH FOR
EXTERNAL WALL - OLD WORK
Finishing walls with water proofing cement
paint of required shade
Old work (one or more coats @ 2.20 kg/10
sqm) complete
6.12 CEMENT PRIMER FINISH FOR
EXTERNAL WALL - NEW WORK
Finishing walls with water proofing cement
paint of required shade
New work (Two or more coats applied @
3.84 kg/10 sqm)
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 170 of 185
SI
Description
No
6.13 Painting with synthetic enamel paint of
approved brand and
manufacture to give an even shade :
13.61.1 Two or more coats on new work
7.00 FLOOR / WALL / DADOING TILES FINISH
7.10 VITRIFIED FLOOR TILES FINISH
Providing and laying vitrified floor tiles in
different sizes (thickness to be specified by
the manufacturer) with water absorption
less than 0.08% and conforming to IS : 15622,
of approved make, in all colours and shades,
laid on 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand), including grouting
the joints with white cement and matching
pigments etc., complete.
Size of Tile 600x600 mm
7.20 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING
Anti- Skid Cement concrete flooring 1:2:4 (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate) finished with a floating coat of
neat cement, including cement slurry, but
excluding the cost of nosing of steps etc.
complete.
40 mm thick with 20 mm nominal size stone
aggregate
7.30 MAKING APPROVED PATTERN ON
CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORS
Extra for making chequers of approved
pattern on cement concrete floors, steps,
landing, pavements etc
7.40
GRANITE WALL DADOING
(CLADDING)
Stone tile work for wall lining upto 10 m
heightwith special adhesive over 12 mm
thick bed of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3
coarse sand), including pointing in white
cement with an admixture of pigment to
match the stone shade.
18mm thick (mirror polished and machine
cut edge) Granite of any color and shade
Ideal Structures
Unit Quantity
M2
900
M2
80
M2
500
M2
500
M2
174
Rate
Amount
Page 171 of 185
SI
Description
No
7.50 GRANITE EDGE MOULDING
Providing edge moulding to 18 mm thick
marble stone counters, Vanities etc.,
including machine polishing to edge to give
high gloss finish etc. complete as per design
approved by Engineer-in Charge.
Granite work
Unit Quantity
LM
198
STEEL & IRON WORK (HAND RAILS &
GATE)
8.10 Providing and fixing (Hand rail / Steel Gate
/ Steel Door) steel work welded in built up
sections/ framed work, including cutting,
hoisting, fixing in position and applying a
priming coat of approved steel primer using
structural steel etc. as required
In gratings, frames, guard bar, ladder,
railings, brackets, gates and similar works
Fixing of Foundation bolts supplied by
ownerfor PEB works in Second floor (one set
may contain 8nos of 25mm bolts 900 long –
Labour charges only for aligning and fixing
as instructed
SECTION -III
9.00 REPAIRS WORK
DEMOLITION WORK
9.10 Demolishing cement concrete manually/ by
mechanical means including disposal of
material within 500 metres lead as per
direction of Engineer - in - charge.
9.20 Nominal concrete 1:3:6 or richer mix (i/c
equivalent design mix)
KG
7800
1set
200
M3
101
9.30 Demolishing R.C.C. work manually/ by
mechanical means including stacking of steel
bars and disposal of unserviceable material
within 500 metres lead as per direction of
Engineer - in- charge.
M3
1200
8.00
9.40 Making the opening in brick masonry
including dismantling in floor or walls by
cutting masonry and making good the
damages to walls, flooring and jambs
Ideal Structures
Rate
Amount
Page 172 of 185
complete, to match existing surface i/c
disposal of mulba/ rubbish to the nearest
municipal dumping ground.
For door/ window/ clerestory window
M2
276
9.50 Demolishing brick work manually/ by
mechanical means including stacking of
serviceable material and disposal of
unserviceable material within 500 metres
lead as per direction of Engineer-in charge
In cement mortar
M3
121
Demolishing stone rubble masonry
manually/ by mechanical means including
9.60 stacking of serviceable material and disposal
of unserviceable material within 50 metres
lead as per direction of Engineer-in-charge :
In cement mortar
M3
55
9.70 BRICK MASONRY WORK
Brick work with clay flyash F.P.S. (non
modular) brick of class designation 7.5 in
superstructure above plinth level up to floor
five level in :
M3
41
9.80 REMOVE THE KOTA STONE FLOORING
Dismantling KOTA STONE Slab Flooring
laid in cement mortar including stacking of
unserviceable material within 500 metres
lead
- do – for Reception Area
M2
1
M2
1
M2
500
- do – for Main Building - Ground Floor –
Corridor Floor Area
9.90 REMOVE THE EXISTING PLASTER
Dismantling old plaster or skirting raking
out joints and cleaning the surface for plaster
including disposal of rubbish to the
dumping ground within 500 metres lead
9.10 MAIN BUILDING - REMOVING
Ideal Structures
Page 173 of 185
EXISTING TERRACE FLOOR
WEATHERING COURSE (1st Floor Roof)
SI
No
Description
Dismantling tile work in floors and roofs
laid in cement mortar including stacking
material within 500 metres lead
For thickness of tiles 10 mm to 25 mm
Unit Quantity
M2
3100
9.11 Demolishing dry brick pitching in floors,
drains etc. including stacking serviceable
material and disposal of unserviceable
material within 500 metres lead
M3
465
9.12 Demolishing brick tile covering in terracing
including stacking of serviceable material
and disposal of unserviceable material
within 500 metres lead
M2
1
9.13 Dismantling tiled roofing with battens,
boarding etc. complete including stacking of
unserviceable material within 50 metres lead
M2
1
KG
1
KG
1
KG
1
9.14 Dismantling steel work in single sections
including dismembering and stacking
within 500 metres lead in
R.S. Joists
Channels, angles, tees and flats
9.15 Dismantling steel work manually/ by
mechanical means in built up sections
without dismembering and stacking within
50 metres lead as per direction of Engineerin-charge.
Grand Total of all works:
Rate
Amount
Rs.
Financial Bid:
Total cost of all works is Rs.
(Rupees
Ideal Structures
=
)
Page 174 of 185
SECTION-6:
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES
A.
APPROVED STANDARDS/MAKES
1.
Coarse sand
:
2.
Fine sand
:
-do-
3.
Stone aggregate
:
-do-
4.
Construction Chemicals
:
Sika/Fosroc/Pidilite/BASF/Hilti/Fischer
5.
Expansion/
insulation board
:
Armour board of Supreme Industries
6.
Fibres for
plaster
:
12mm Cera Fiber
7.
Fibres for Conc
:
Fibremesh
8.
Micro Silica for
concrete floor
:
Elkhem
9.
Water vapour
barrier HMHD
polythene sheet
:
Supreme Industries Limited
10.
Bitumen and
solignam
:
Shalimar
11.
Bitumen sealing
compound
:
Shalitex
12.
Flush doors
:
As Instructed By Client during Pre Bid
13.
Commercial ply and
commercial board
:
Truwood, Greenlam, National, Alpro
14.
Mortice latches and
locks Multipurpose
lock
:
Godrej,Dorset, Gurdian
15.
Door closers and
:
Everite, Garnish, Hardwin
Ideal Structures
As IS:383 (Latest edition) from approved
area
Page 175 of 185
floor spring
16.
Brass hinges
17.
Screws
:
Nettlefolds
18.
Adhesive – Wood
:
Fevicol of Pidilite Industries
19.
Adhesive – Glass/
marble
:
Araldite, Laticrete
20.
Dash fasteners/
cutting tools
:
Hilti, Fischer
21.
Floor hardener and
construction
chemicals
:
Fosroc, Sika,Cera, Tehney Chemy,
Roff
22.
Glazed/Cerami
tiles
:
Kajaria, Johnson, Somany
23.
Acid resistant tiles
:
Restile, Coromandal, Johnson
24.
Vitrified tiles
:
Johnson, Bell, Restile, Kajaria
25.
Polythene sheet
:
I.C.I.
26.
Aluminium sections:
27.
Aluminium fittings
:
Sigma, Duke, Hardwin
28.
Float glass and
mirrors
:
Modiguard, Saint Gobain, Indo Asahi
29.
Water-proof cement :
paint
Super Snowcem (Killick Nickson)
30.
Wax polish
:
Mansion
31.
Paints, primers,
thinners
:
Asian Paints, ICI, Berger Paints, Jenson &
Nicholson
32.
Sun-control film
:
Garware Polyester
33.
Textured paint
:
Spectrum, Heritage
34.
Welding rod
:
Any IS Certified
Ideal Structures
:
Saffire, Palladium
Jindal, Indal, Hindalco
Page 176 of 185
B.
SANITARY WORK
1.
Vitreous china
fittings
:
Hindustan Sanitaryware, Cera,
Parryware
2.
C.I. pipes and
fittings
:
R.I.F., Neco, B.C.
3.
C.P. brass bib-cock,
angle valves etc
:
Gem, Parko, Ess Ess
4.
R.C.C. pipes
:
India Hume Pipe Co.
5.
Gully traps and
stoneware pipes
:
Perfect (Jabalpur), Dalmia
6.
Stainless steel
sinks
:
Sanifire, Neel Kamal, Prince
7.
G.I. pipes
:
Tata, I.T.C., Jindal (Hissar)
8.
G.I. fittings
:
‘R’ Brand, Unik
9.
Full-way valve/
Ball valve
:
Leader, G.G., Zoloto
10.
P.V.C. pipes
:
Supreme, Finolex
11.
Water tank
:
Sintex
12.
Floor & traps
:
‘Chilli’ of Veer Sanitaryware or equivalent
Ideal Structures
Page 177 of 185
SECTION- 7 : PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE FORM
[To be executed on stamp paper of appropriate value]
BANK GUARANTEE
To
Principal,
ARSD College,
Dhaula Kuan,
Gentlemen:
1.
In consideration of ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi, an existing college Under
University of Delhi, located at Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi, (hereinafter referred to as the “Owner”
which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors
and assigns) has proposed to contract (as contained in documents hereinafter collectively referred to
as “Contract”) in favour of _____________________________ [Name and address of the Contractor]
(hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor” which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context
or meaning thereof, include its successors and assigns) for the work of “Retrofitting Existing GF & FF
for Earthquake; Modifications of Entrance & Compound wall; Construction of New Ramp for Physically
Challenged & Emergency Stairs” (“Work”) at ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi 110 021.
2.
The Contractor has agreed to abide by and perform all its obligations in terms of the terms and
conditions contained in the Contract and in terms thereof, the Contractor is required to submit to the
college a Performance Guarantee for a total amount of Rs. 10,00,000/- (Rupees Ten Lacs Only), before
the execution of the Contract.
3.
We, ________________(hereinafter referred to as "the Bank" at the request of the Contractor do
hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantee to the Owner that the Contractor shall duly
perform and fulfill all its obligations under the Contract and undertake to pay the Owner an
amount not exceeding Rs. 10,00,000/- (Rupees Ten Lacs Only) (the “Guaranteed Amount”) for (a) or
any loss, liability or damage arising out of any defects or shortcomings of the Contractor in
performance of its obligations in terms of the Contract (b) or the debts the Contractor may have
incurred to any party(ies) involved in execution of the Work under the Contract mentioned above,
whether these defects or shortcomings or debts are actual or estimated or expected and (c) for any loss
or damage caused to or suffered by, or would be caused to or suffered by, the Owner by reason of
any breach or failure on the part of the Contractor to perform or fulfill any of the terms and
conditions, contained in the said Contract.
4.
We, the Bank do hereby, in pursuance of the terms and conditions contained in the Contract,
absolutely, unconditionally and irrevocably guarantee, as primary obligor, and not as a surety, the
payment of the Guaranteed Amount to the Owner to secure due, proper and faithful performance
and fulfillment by the Contractor, of all its obligations under the Contract.
5.
We, the Bank, do hereby undertake to pay the amounts due and payable under this
Guarantee without any demur or protest, merely on a demand from the Owner stating that the
Ideal Structures
Page 178 of 185
amount claimed is due by way of loss, liability, damage, debts, defects or shortcoming caused to or
suffered by the Owner by reason of breach or failure by the Contractor in performance or
fulfillment of any of the terms or conditions contained in the Contract. We, the Bank, do hereby
agree that the decision of the Owner as to whether the Contractor has failed or committed breach or
failed to perform or fulfill any of its obligations under the Contract, as aforesaid, and as to the
amount payable to the Owner by the Bank hereunder, shall be final, conclusive and binding on the
Bank.
6.
We, the Bank, do hereby undertake to pay to the Owner any money so demanded forthwith
on receipt of demand from the Owner without it being necessary to prove to the Bank the loss,
liability, damage, debts, defects or shortcoming of the Contractor or the failure of the Contractor to
perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract, notwithstanding any dispute or disputes
raised by the Contractor in any suit or proceeding pending before any court or Tribunal relating
thereto.
It is expressly agreed that the Bank’s liability under these presents is absolute and
unequivocal.
7.
We, the Bank, further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall come into force from
the date of execution of the Contract and shall remain in full force and effect for a period of six (8)
months from the date of execution of the Contract.
8.
We, the Bank further agree, that notwithstanding the validity period specified in paragraph
7 above, the validity of the guarantee shall be extended under the terms and conditions contained
herein, for successive periods of three (3) calendar months at a time, until the Owner has certified in
writing that the terms and conditions of the said Contract have been fully and properly carried out
by the Contractor and accordingly discharges this guarantee. The guarantee shall expire and become
ineffectual only upon such certification by the Owner.
9.
We, the Bank do hereby undertake to issue and forward appropriate extension sheets to the
Owner regarding extensions envisaged in paragraph 8 above.
10.
We, the Bank, do hereby agree that any claim, which we have or may have against the
Contractor, shall be subject and subordinate to the prior performance and payment in full, of all our
obligations hereunder to the Owner, and the amount guaranteed hereunder and we will not,
without prior written consent of the Owner, exercise any legal right or remedy of any kind available
to us in respect of any such performance or payment so long as our obligations hereunder remain
owing and outstanding.
11.
We, the Bank, further agree that the Owner shall be at liberty, at its option, to enforce this
guarantee against the Bank as a principal debtor, in the first instance, notwithstanding any other
security or guarantee that the Owner may have in relation to the Contractor’s liabilities or
obligations under the Contract.
12.
We, the Bank, further agree and confirm that this guarantee shall be irrevocable without
prior written consent of the Owner and our obligations under this guarantee shall not be
conditional upon any prior notice by us or by the Contractor. We, the Bank, undertake not to
revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent in writing of the Owner.
13.
This guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee and shall not be discharged or affected by
any change in the constitution of the Contractor or of the Bank or of the Company or liquidation or
winding up of the Contractor. We, the Bank, further agree that our obligations under this
guarantee shall not be affected by reason of the Contractor acquiring any new status or change in its
Ideal Structures
Page 179 of 185
status or the Contractor becoming entitled to or claiming any special exemptions, privileges or
immunities, whether pursuant to any existing or new statutes, regulations, orders or otherwise,
including without limitation, the Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Act, 1985 or any
enactment made in replacement thereof.
14.
We, the Bank, further agree that this guarantee is in addition to, and not by way of
limitation of or substitution for, any other guarantee or guarantees, if any, hereto before given to
the Owner by the Bank (whether alone or jointly with other(s)) and now existing in force and
that this guarantee is not intended to and shall not revoke or limit any such guarantee or
guarantees.
15.
The payment so made by us under this guarantee shall be a valid discharge of our liability or
payment there under and the Contractor shall have no claim against us for making such payment.
Executed at _________, this ________ day of _______________, 2013.
For: [Name of the Bank]
By:
Name:
Designation:
Ideal Structures
Page 180 of 185
SECTION 8 : BANK GUARANTEE FORM TOWARDS MOBILISATION ADVANCE
[To be executed on stamp paper of appropriate value]
BANK GUARANTEE
To
Principal,
ARSD College,
Dhaula Kuan,
Gentlemen:
1.
In consideration of ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi, an existing college Under
University of Delhi, located at Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi, (hereinafter referred to as the “Owner”
which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors
and assigns) has proposed to contract (as contained in documents hereinafter collectively referred to
as “Contract”) in favour of _____________________________ [Name and address of the Contractor]
(hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor” which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context
or meaning thereof, include its successors and assigns) for the work of “Retrofitting Existing GF & FF
for Earthquake; Modifications of Entrance & Compound wall; Construction of New Ramp for Physically
Challenged & Emergency Stairs” (“Work”) at ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi 110 021.
2.
The College has agreed to pay Mobilization Advance under the terms and conditions of Letter
of Acceptance, subject to production of a Bank Guarantee for Rs. ___________(Rupees
__________________), by the Contractor.
3.
We, ________________(hereinafter referred to as "the Bank" at the request of the Contractor do
hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantee to the Owner that the Contractor shall duly
perform and fulfill all its obligations under the Letter of Acceptance and undertake to pay the
Owner an amount not exceeding Rs. _____________ (Rupees ____________ Only) (the “Guaranteed
Amount”) against any loss or damage caused to or suffered by, or would be caused to or suffered
by, the Owner by reason of any breach or failure on the part of the Contractor to perform or fulfill
any of the terms and conditions, contained in the said Letter of Acceptance.
4.
We, the Bank do hereby, in pursuance of the terms and conditions contained in the Letter of
Acceptance, absolutely, unconditionally and irrevocably guarantee, as primary obligor, and not as a
surety, the payment of the Guaranteed Amount to the Owner to secure due, proper and faithful
performance and fulfillment by the Contractor, of all its obligations under the Letter of Acceptance.
5.
We, the Bank, do hereby undertake to pay the amounts due and payable under this
Guarantee without any demur or protest, merely on a demand from the Owner stating that the
amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to or suffered by the Owner by reason of
breach or failure by the Contractor in performance or fulfillment of any of the terms or conditions of
the said Letter of Acceptance. We, the Bank, do hereby agree that the decision of the Owner as to
whether the Contractor has committed breach or failed to perform or fulfill its obligations under the
Letter of Acceptance, as aforesaid, and as to the amount payable to the Owner by the Bank
hereunder, shall be final, conclusive and binding on the Bank.
Ideal Structures
Page 181 of 185
6.
We, the Bank, do hereby undertake to pay to the Owner any money so demanded forthwith
on receipt of demand from the Owner notwithstanding any dispute or disputes raised by the
Contractor in any suit or proceeding pending before any court or Tribunal relating thereto. It is
expressly agreed that the Bank’s liability under these presents is absolute and unequivocal.
7.
We, the Bank, further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall come into force from
the date Contractor receives from the Owner the said Mobilization Advance and shall remain in full
force and effect so long as the said advance or any part thereof remaining outstanding and shall
expire and become ineffectual only after the recovery of the entire sum of
Rs.________________________ covered by the Guarantee or till the Owner certifies in writing that the
terms and conditions of the said Letter of Acceptance have been fully and properly carried out by
the Contractor and accordingly discharges this guarantee.
8.
We, the Bank, do hereby agree that any claim, which we have or may have against the
Contractor, shall be subject and subordinate to the prior performance and payment in full, of all our
obligations hereunder to the Owner, and the amount guaranteed hereunder and we will not,
without prior written consent of the Owner, exercise any legal right or remedy of any kind available
to us in respect of any such performance or payment so long as our obligations hereunder remain
owing and outstanding.
9.
We, the Bank, further agree that the Owner shall be at liberty, at its option, to enforce this
guarantee against the Bank as a principal debtor, in the first instance, notwithstanding any other
security or guarantee that the Owner may have in relation to the Contractor’s liabilities or
obligations under the Letter of Acceptance.
10.
We, the Bank, further agree and confirm that this guarantee shall be irrevocable without
prior written consent of the Owner and our obligations under this guarantee shall not be
conditional upon any prior notice by us or by the Contractor. We, the Bank, undertake not to
revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent in writing of the Owner.
11.
This guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee and shall not be discharged or affected by
any change in the constitution of the Contractor or of the Bank or of the Owner or liquidation or
winding up or filing of the Contractor. We, the Bank, further agree that our obligations under this
guarantee shall not be affected by reason of the Contractor acquiring any new status or change in its
status or the Contractor becoming entitled to or claiming any special exemptions, privileges or
immunities, whether pursuant to any existing or new statutes, regulations, orders or otherwise,
including without limitation, the Sick Industrial Companies (Special Provisions) Act, 1985 or any
enactment made in replacement thereof.
12.
We, the Bank, further agree that this guarantee is in addition to, and not by way of
limitation of or substitution for, any other guarantee or guarantees, if any, hereto before given to
the Owner by the Bank (whether alone or jointly with other(s)) and now existing in force and
that this guarantee is not intended to and shall not revoke or limit any such guarantee or
guarantees.
Ideal Structures
Page 182 of 185
13.
The payment so made by us under this guarantee shall be a valid discharge of our liability or
payment there under and the Contractor shall have no claim against us for making such payment.
Executed at _________, this ________ day of _______________, 2013
For: [Name of the Bank]
By:
Name:
Designation:
Ideal Structures
Page 183 of 185
SECTION 9 : BID PROPOSAL SUBMISSION FORM
To
Principal,
ARSD College,
Dhaula Kuan,
Dear Sirs,
Subject: Tender in relation to Retrofitting the Existing GF & FF for Earthquake; Modifications of front
Entrance & Compound wall; Construction of Ramp for Physically Challenged &
emergency Stairs for ARSD College, Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi
1.
We have received and examined the tender documents, including General Conditions of
Contract, Tender Drawings, Time lines, Contract Agreement, Specifications of Work, Bill of
Quantities, Rate Schedule, Bid Proposal Submission Form issued in connection with
“Retrofitting the Existing GF & FF for Earthquake; Modifications of front Entrance & Compound
wall; Construction of Ramp for Physically Challenged & emergency Stairs of ARSD College” at
Dhaula Kuan, New Delhi.
2.
We have inspected and examined the indicative site and its surroundings and have
satisfied ourselves before submitting the tender as to the nature of ground and subsoil in the
region, the form, nature and means of access to the site, availability of water, power and other
requirements.
3.
We hereby submit our tender for the execution of the works referred to in the aforesaid
documents upon the terms and conditions referred to therein and in accordance in all respects with
the specifications, designs, drawings and other relevant details at the rates contained in the Bill of
Quantities and to complete the same within the stipulated period of completion.
4.
We agree that any arithmetical errors in our submission can be corrected by applying a
percentage adjustment so that the tendered amount remains unchanged.
5.
We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any other tender and you have
the right to accept the whole or part of our tender and We agree to execute whatever part is accepted
by you at the quoted amount for the same.
6.
We agree to keep the tender open for minimum period of 90 days from the date of opening of
the Bid Proposals by the Consultants/you and for such extended period, as you may require from
time to time.
7.
We also understand that any time during the validity of the tender, you have the right to
abandon the tendering process and the tenderers will not be compensated in such a case, in any
manner whatsoever.
9.
A Pay Order/ Demand Draft for a sum of 2% of Contract Price Rs.
(Rupees ---------- Only)
dated __________issued by ______________________ (name of bank) in favour of “Principal, ARSD
College” Payable at New Delhi is attached as Earnest Money.
Ideal Structures
Page 184 of 185
10.
We agree that the Earnest Money shall be forfeited if we withdraw the tender during the
period of validity or if we fail to accept corrections or errors in our submission, or enter into the
contract in the format prescribed in Section 3 of the Bid Document, after fulfilling all requirements
including submission of performance Bank Guarantee, Bank Guarantee towards Mobilization
Advance.
11.
We agree that should this tender be accepted in whole or in part, we agree to abide by and
fulfill all the terms and conditions annexed hereto. If we fail to execute the contract in the specified
form or commence the work specified in the above Contract Documents by _________, we agree that
our Earnest Money shall be forfeited, otherwise this shall form part of the Retention Money
mentioned against Clause 14 of the Instructions to Tenderers.
12.
We understand that forfeiture of Earnest Money will be without prejudice to any of your rights
or remedy available in law.
13.
We have independently considered the amount shown as liquidated damages and agree that
they represent a fair estimate of the damages likely to be suffered by you in the event of the work not
being completed in time.
14.
We agree to provide a performance Guarantee in the form of a Bank Guarantee for Rs. Ten
Lacs, from a reputed Bank in the form prescribed in Section 7 of the Bid Document, to your
satisfaction, within the stipulated time, if the work or part thereof is awarded to us.
15.
We agree to provide a Bank Guarantee for an amount representing 10% of the contract value
as specified in the Letter of Award, from a reputed Bank in the form prescribed in Section 8 of the Bid
Document and agree that the provision of Bank Guarantee will be a pre-condition to payment of
mobilization advance by you.
16.
In the event of award of tender, we agree to abide by all the terms and conditions specified in
the Bid documents.
Dated the ______ day of. ______, 2013
Signature:
In the capacity of duly authorized person to sign
the tender for and on behalf of:
Ideal Structures
Page 185 of 185
Appendix – Tender Drawings
Ideal Structures

Construction - ARSD College

Transcription

Similar documents

CSAH 5 Newletter - Sherburne County

Nelnet Professional Services Agreement (04/25/2012)

Britco Supplies Disaster Relief Housing for Save the Children

Romania

Tender for Construction of Bathroom and Store Room in Look Out

CONTROLLED EXPANSION WATERSTOP

senarai kuantiti pengurusan keselamatan dan kesihatan pekerjaan

Flexilite MC Cement Datasheet

Artificial grass crown green at St. Lawrence recreation ground

Millau Viaduct